Radar 1000 Tech - Manual Ver 3.1 PDF

Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
CHARTRADAR 1000
Including Installation Instructions

Software Version 3.1
Display Electronics Unit GE3044
Item No.: ED3038G542 Revision: 02 (2005-09) Order No.: 390002009

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Telefax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
e-mail:shipservice@sam-electronics.de
t_eu1_eti.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual List of Contents
List of Contents
List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.4 Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.6 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6.1 Man Aloft Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6.2 HV Supply Switch (Interlock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.1 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.3 Operating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.4 CHARTRADAR 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4.1 Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4.3 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.6 VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.1 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.1.1.2 Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.2 Electronics Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.1.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2 Specific Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship´s Sensors / Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 3
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
List of Contents Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.5 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.2 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.5.4 Radar Scan Converter (RSC) GE3044G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.5.4.1 RSC Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.5.4.2 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.5.4.3 Software Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.5.5 ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T) GE3044G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.5.5.1 ARPA Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.5.5.2 Functional Description of the ARPA Pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G203, GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.5.7 Interface and Memory Board (IMB) GE3044G205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.5.7.1 Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.5.7.2 Service Switch of the IMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.5.8 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.5.9 Ethernet Module (Upgrade Kit GE3044G011, optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.5.10 Interconnection Box VS3034O000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.5.10.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.5.10.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.5.10.3 Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.5.10.4 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . 80
4.5.10.4.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.5.10.4.2 Additional Power Supply Cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.5.11 Analog Interface GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.5.11.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.5.11.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.5.11.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5.12 COM-Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.5.12.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.5.12.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.5.12.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.5.12.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.5.12.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.5.12.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.5.13 Operating Unit BD 3027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.5.13.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.5.13.2 Trackball BD 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.5.13.3 Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.5.13.4 Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.5.13.5 Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.5.14 RGB Buffer GE3044G208 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.5.15 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.2 CHARTRADAR 1000 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.3.2 Installation and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.3.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.4 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.5 System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.5.1 Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.5.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.6 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.7 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.7.1 Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.7.2 .Map Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.7.3 Map Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.7.4 Track Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.7.5 Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.8 Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.8.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.8.2 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.8.3 Map Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.8.4 RSC Test Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.8.5 ARPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.9 Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.9.1 Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.9.2 Determining the Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.10 Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.10.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.10.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.10.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.10.4 Configuration File Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.10.5 System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.10.6 System / Ship Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.10.7 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.10.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.10.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5.10.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers (1000 Series, 9xxx Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.10.8 Sensor Interfaces (Analog Interface, Interface Expander, COM Expander)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.10.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of Analog Interface and Interface Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.10.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.10.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...8 of the Interface Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.10.8.4 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM-Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.10.9 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.10.10 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.10.11 Planning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.10.12 Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.10.13 ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.10.14 VDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.11 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.11.1 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5.11.2 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
5.11.2.1 Setting-to-Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
5.11.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.11.2.3 Magnetron Hours (1000 series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.11.2.4 Antenna Information (1000 series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 5
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
5.11.3 Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

5.11.4 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5.12 Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.13 Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.13.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.13.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.13.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.13.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.13.4.1 Motherboard Tekram S3ZX-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5.13.4.2 Motherboard DFI CA61/CB61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
5.13.4.3 Motherboard DFI CA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
5.14 Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.14.1 Analog Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.14.2 RGB Buffer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.14.3 ARPA Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.14.4 Ethernet Module Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6 Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.2.1 System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.2.2 System Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
6.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
6.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.2.6 Configure (Sensor Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6.2.7 Configure (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.2.8 Configure (Planning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6.3 Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.3.1 Radar Scan Converter (RSC) GE3044G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.3.2 ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T) GE3044G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.3.3 Interface and Memory Board (IMB) GE3044G205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
6.3.4 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.3.5 COM-Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6.3.6 Interconnection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7 Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8 Repair/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.1 Diskette Drive for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.2 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.3 Service at Systems with the Monitor Type AZ 3040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.4 Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.4.1 Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.4.2 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.4.3 Trackball works jerking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.4.4 Defective Ethernet Module for Tekram S3ZX-A Motherboards causes "Red Screen" . . . . . 212
8.4.5 Display Electronics Unit does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8.4.6 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.5 Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.5.1 Software Update Version 2.2 or newer and RSC Rev. 04 or newer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
6 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
8.5.2 Software Update Version 2.2 or newer and RSC Rev. 03 or older . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.5.3 System Software Installation/Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.6 Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.6.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.6.2 Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8.6.3 Console Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.6.4 Desktop Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8.7 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8.8 Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.8.1 Exchange of the Main Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.8.2 Exchange of the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.8.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G203, GE3044G213) . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.7 Exchange of Radar Scan Converter (RSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.8 Exchange of ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.8.9 Exchange of Interface and Memory Board (IMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.8.10 Exchange of RSC, IMB or ARPA PCB: Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.8.11 Exchange of Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.8.12 Exchange of the COM-Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.8.13 Exchange of the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.8.14 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.8.15 Exchange of Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.8.16 Exchange of Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.8.16.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.8.16.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
8.10 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.10.1 Spare Part Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.10.2 Spare Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.10.3 Spare Parts for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
9 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
9.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
9.2.1 Performance Data of Radar Scan Converter GE3044G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
9.2.2 Performance Data of the ARPA-PCB GE3044G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.2.3 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.2.4 Performance Data of the Interface and Memory Board GE3044G205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.2.5 Performance Data of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.2.6 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G208 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.2.7 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.3 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.3.1 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.3.1.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.3.1.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.3.2 Interface Expander (EXTSIR1T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.4.1 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.4.1.1 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.5 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 7
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
9.6 Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

10.1 System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.2 AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.3 System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
11 Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
12 Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
13 Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
8 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig. 1-1 Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 2-1 System overview of RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2-3 Desktop and console indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 2-4 Display Electronics Unit GE3044GO000 with Interconnection Box, dismounted . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 2-5 Operating Unit with all keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 2-6 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the IMB, single installation . . . . 38
Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the IMB, dual installation . . . . . 39
Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 4-3 CAN Bus concept and termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker/multiple listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board) 49
Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker/multiple listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander) . . . . . 49
Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit GE3044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 4-8 Example of a Pentium Celeron motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 4-10 RSC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 4-12 Check RSC Adjust (Gain 100% and GAIN 0%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 4-13 ARPA pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 4-14 GVP pcb GE3044G203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 4-15 IMB pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 4-18 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box (with RGB buffer GE3044G208) . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 4-19 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box (with RGB buffer GE3044G222) . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 4-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 4-21 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 4-22 Power supply cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 4-23 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 4-24 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 4-25 SH3014T203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 4-26 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 4-27 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 4-28 TTL plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 4-29 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 4-30 RS232 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 4-31 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 4-32 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 4-33 Keyboard electronics with controller 0824/01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 4-36 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 4-38 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fig. 5-3 Interfaces for ship sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 5-4 Connection of the Primary Display Port, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 9
t_eu1_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
List of Figures Technical Manual
Fig. 5-5 System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Fig. 5-6 System Maintenance Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 5-7 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 5-8 System fault list (present faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 5-9 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 5-10 List of software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 5-11 Configure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 5-12 TRACKPILOT configuration manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fig. 5-13 PMA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 5-14 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 5-16 BIOS update software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 5-17 Bracket for RG58 / RG213 adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fig. 6-4 System Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fig. 6-14 Sensor Interface 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 6-15 Sensor Interface 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fig. 6-16 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fig. 6-17 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fig. 6-18 RSC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 6-19 ARPA pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 6-20 IMB pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fig. 6-21 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 6-22 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 6-23 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 6-24 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 6-25 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fig. 12-1 Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fig. 12-2 Cable Diagram, Single Installation, 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fig. 12-3 Cable Diagram, Dual Aloft Installation (Version A), 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fig. 12-4 Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G206, 1/4 . . 276
Fig. 12-5 Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G216, 2/4 . . 277
Fig. 12-6 Connection Diagram, Intercon. Board GE3044G216, Analog Interface, COM Expander 3/4 278
Fig. 12-7 Connection Diagram, Transceiver up, Transceiver down, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 12-8 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fig. 12-9 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fig. 12-10 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined Headmarker and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fig. 12-11 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fig. 12-12 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined Headmarker and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fig. 12-13 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 12-14 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . 287
Fig. 12-16 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
10 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual List of Figures
Fig. 12-17 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fig. 12-18 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fig. 12-19 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 12-20 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7 . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 12-21 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fig. 12-22 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7 . . . . . . 294
Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 13-1 Interconnection Box, GE3044G015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3044O000 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . 300
Fig. 13-3 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone, GE3044O000 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fig. 13-4 Electronics Unit Stand-Alone,GE3044O000 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fig. 13-5 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.154 270.GZ 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fig. 13-6 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Front/Side View, opended, 271.154 270.GZ 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fig. 13-7 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Space for Installations, 271.154 270.GZ 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fig. 13-8 SCC ’96 Console, b=55 mm, Foundation, 271.154 270.GZ 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Fig. 13-9 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.151 009.GZ 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fig. 13-10 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Front/Side View, opened, Monitor 29", 271.151 009.GZ 2/6 . 308
Fig. 13-11 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Front/Side View, opened, Monitor 24", 271.151 009.GZ 3/6 . 309
Fig. 13-12 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Space for Installations, 271.151 009.GZ 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fig. 13-13 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.151 009.GZ 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fig. 13-14 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fig. 13-20 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 13-26 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.167 236.GZ 1/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fig. 13-27 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Front View, Mounting Panel, 271.167 236.GZ 2/5 . . . . . . . . 325
Fig. 13-28 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Panel View, 271.167 236.GZ 3/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Fig. 13-29 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Foundation, 271.167 236.GZ 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Fig. 13-30 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Bracket, 271.167 236.GZ 5/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Fig. 13-31 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.167 237.GZ 1/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Fig. 13-32 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Front View, Mounting Panel, 271.167 237.GZ 2/5 . . . . . . . . 330
Fig. 13-33 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Panel View, 271.167 237.GZ 3/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fig. 13-34 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.167 237.GZ 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fig. 13-35 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Bracket, 271.167 237.GZ 5/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Fig. 13-36 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.166 391.GZ 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fig. 13-37 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Front View, 271.166 391.GZ 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fig. 13-38 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Panel View, 271.166 391.GZ 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Fig. 13-39 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Casing Base, 271.166 391.GZ 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fig. 13-40 Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3027O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fig. 13-41 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Fig. 13-42 Floppy Disk Drive, Panel Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fig. 13-43 Floppy Disk Drive, Bulkhead Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fig. 13-44 20.1" TFT Color Monitor AZ 3056 G 041, AZ3056G041 MB 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fig. 13-45 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fig. 13-46 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fig. 13-47 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 11
t_eu1_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
List of Figures Technical Manual
Fig. 13-48 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, AZ3063G041 MB, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Fig. 13-49 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, brackets, AZ3063G041 MB, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Fig. 13-50 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, bracket mounting, AZ3063G041 MB, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fig. 13-51 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, rotation bracket mounting , AZ3063G041 MB, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fig. 13-52 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, AZ3056G040 MB 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fig. 13-53 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, brackets, AZ3056G040 MB 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fig. 13-54 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, bracket mounting, AZ3056G040 MB 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Fig. 13-55 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, rotation bracket mounting, AZ3056G040 MB 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Fig. 13-56 AZ3066G040, 15.1" TFT, AZ3066G040 MB 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fig. 13-58 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, AZ3068G040 MB 1/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Fig. 13-59 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, brackets, AZ3068G040 MB 2/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Fig. 13-61 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, rotation bracket mounting, AZ3068G040 MB 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fig. 13-62 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, rotation bracket, AZ3068G040 MB 5/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
12 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations
This list also contains abbreviations which are not used in this manual but in additional documentation.
A
A/D Analog/Digital
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AGP Advanced Graphics Port
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
ATA Automatic Tracking Aid
AZS Azimuth Start
B
BSH Bundesamt für Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency of Germany)
C
CAN Controller Area Network
CD Centred Display
CRR Close Range Resolution
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CWL Construction Water Line
D
DMA Direct Memory Access
E
EPA Electronic Plotting Aid
ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System
F
FIFO First In First Out (Memory)
FTC Fast Time Constant => Rain (Rain Clutter)
G
GPS Global Positioning System
GVP Graphics and Video Processor
H
HF High Frequency
HM Head Marker
HSC High Speed Craft
HV High Voltage
I
IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
IMB Interface and Memory Board
ISA Industry Standard Architecture Bus
K
KBC Keyboard Controller
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 13
t_eu1_akv.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000
List of Abbreviations Technical Manual
M
MMI Man-Machine Interface
N
NACOS Navigation and Command System
NI NAVIGATION INTERFACE
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association
NOB Number of Bits
n.c. Not connected/normally closed (break contact)
n.o. Normally opened (make contact)
O
ONP 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with positive potential
ONN 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with negative potential (no ground potential)
P
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCI Processor-Controlled Interswitch, current designation: Interswitch
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PMB Pentium Motherboard
PPI Plan Position Indicator
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
R
Rev. Revision (as-delivered status), see Section 1.2
RF Radio Frequency
RGB Red Green Blue
RKE Remote Keyboard Electronics
ROT Rate of Turn
RPM Revolutions per Minute
RSC Radar Scan Converter
S
SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SI Ship’s Interface = Interface Expander
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
STC Sensitivity Time Control => Sea (Sea Clutter)
T
TFT Thin Film Transistor
T/R Transmitter/Receiver
TCU Transmitter Control Unit
TM True Motion
TVA Trigger Video Azimuth (Combined Video)
14 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_akv.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 1 General
Technical Manual 1.1 Software Releases
1 General
This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:

- RADARPILOT 1000
- CHARTRADAR 1000
- Indicator versions
- 12" shipyard installation kit
- 16" shipyard installation kit
- 12" desktop version
- 12" console versions
- 16" console versions
1.1 Software Releases
This manual describes the RADARPILOT 1000/CHAR-

TRADAR 1000 with the software release 2.6. If the radar
runs with a release <1.3, an update must be performed.
Some of the menu items described for NACOS and plan-
ning system configuration do not exist in previous
releases.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 15
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1 General RADARPILOT 1000
1.2 Hardware Versions Technical Manual
1.2 Hardware Versions
All pcbs and units are labelled with a sticker which shows the revision (Rev.) and the print version (for
pcbs only). Modifications on a pcb or a unit cause a new revision which is marked by a figure (-, 01, 02,
03...). The numbering of the Rev. is continuous, even when a new print is used for a pcb. If no revision
is marked, the first revision number on the label is valid.
The print version of a pcb is marked by means of characters. The original version is marked with "-"; the
following versions are marked with A, B, C, ... . Sometimes it is possible to update pcbs with an older
print version to a higher revision, and so the print version is not a reliable characteristic for the revision
of a pcb.
Rev., marked by "X"

ztr1_139.jpg
Order No. Item No. of Serial No.

the complete
pcb with all
components
Fig. 1-1 Version label
The pcbs are marked with their print version. The revision status is not recognizable.
ztr1_179.jpg
Item No. of the pcb itself, Print version

without any components
Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling
If an item has to be exchanged, the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Refer to Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information.
16 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work
SAM Electronics gives advice and recommendations for the arrangement of SAM Electronics equipment
and the installation sites. A prerequisite is that the necessary drawings of the ship should be made avail-
able in good time.
This advice and these recommendations are given on the basis of our up-to-date practical experience
and to the best of our knowledge. However, they are given without any commitment. As far as is permis-
sible, any liability on the part of SAM Electronics for resulting damage is expressly ruled out, regardless
of whether the damage is of a direct or indirect nature.
Unusual shipbuilding shapes, additions or superstructures as well as environmental influences can impair
the functioning of the equipment. We are, of course, willing to help the customer with optimizing solutions
subject to suitable commercial arrangements.
The customer is responsible for ensuring that SAM Electronics equipment is installed properly according
to our instructions and in compliance with the regulations issued by the relevant classification society and
national authorities.
1.4 Safety Warnings
WARNING
This unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe precautions for handling.
The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its
properties. Before a unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equipment, Order
No. 586-5011, must be used.
1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.
2. The potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a suitable
protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MΩ resistor which must not be removed.
3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the
discharge line is established.
4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are
supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,
stock No. 593-8099.
Boards and units that contain ESD-endangered semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown
above.
All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESD
equipment.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 17
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1.4 Safety Warnings Technical Manual
DANGER
It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the
system before setting-to-work by a qualified technician.
The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of a
common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s
supply or the mains cable must be disconnected until
setting-to-work takes place.
If a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Inter-

face or Interface Expander, dangerous voltages might be
present, even although all supplies to the radar system are
switched off.
Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for

several hours, even when they have been disconnected
from the supply voltage.
The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the

mains supply for the motor, and so dangerous voltages are
present, even when the switch is set to position 0.
WARNING
Pay attention to the regulations for the prevention of accidents.
DANGER
Even when the system is switched off, there might be a
dangerous voltage present on exposed contacts. Therefore,
before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the elec-
trical supply to all units is, and remains, disconnected from
the ship’s mains.
DANGER
If the Scanner is stationary because the system is switched
off or because the radar has been switched into stand-by
mode, then unless the man aloft switch is set to 0 the
Scanner might begin to rotate at any time.
18 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation
DANGER
When the Scanner is rotating, there is a danger caused by
high frequency radiation. Do not connect the system to the
ship’s mains before setting-to-work by a qualified techni-
cian.
During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically

switched off with a delay of 30 s, if the speed of the
Scanner continuously falls short of 50% of its nominal
speed. This function is disabled, if the service mode is acti-
vated (switch S1/8 on the IMB or S1/8 on the TCU)!
DANGER
Never look down into the open waveguide while the trans-
mitter is active. Therefore, before any work in the cabling
is done, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to the
unit is, and remains, disconnected from the ship’s mains.
There are no international standards concerning the danger caused by high frequency radiation of the
kind produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m² is
regarded as dangerous. In some countries, values over 10 W/m² are regarded as being not completely
safe.
The distances from the various antennas of the radar at which the radiation density is 100 W/m² and
10 W/m², respectively, are stated in the following table.
Distance
Scanner type Transceiver Radiation density Radiation density
100W/m² 10W/m²
12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 14 m
5 ft X-Band 25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 21 m
25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 16 m
12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 7m
8 ft X-Band 25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m
25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 9m
30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m
14 ft S-Band
30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 7.8 m
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 19
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1.6 Safety Switches Technical Manual
1.6 Safety Switches
1.6.1 Man Aloft Switch
The man aloft switch is situated under the Gearbox. If it is switched to

"0", the motor is disconnected from the mains. The Scanner cannot
start to rotate. The Transceiver Electronics Unit is still supplied with
power. See Section 1.6.2.
ztr1_064.jpg
Man aloft switch
1.6.2 HV Supply Switch (Interlock)
The HV supply switch in the Transceiver switches off the high

voltage power supply for the RF electronics, as soon as the
Gearbox or the housing of the bulkhead Transceiver version
is opened. The motor supply and the supply for the other
electronic components are independent of this switch. The
switch has three positions:
1. Gearbox/Transceiver closed; HV electronics supply
3 2 1
switched on.
2. Gearbox/Transceiver opened; HV electronics supply
switched off.
3. Gearbox/Transceiver opened; the switch bolt has been
ztr1_066.jpg
pulled out to supply power to the RF electronics.

Caution! Dangerous voltages and RF radiation. See
Section 1.4 and Section 1.5.
1
2
3
ztr1_149.jpg
HV supply switches (different versions)
20 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e01.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 2 Overview
Technical Manual
2 Overview
The following drawing shows the structure of the radar system. It consists of 3 main groups of assem-
blies:
- The Indicator, consisting of the Display Electronics Unit, including a monitor and the Operating Unit
(various versions available).
- The Transceiver, which can be installed in the Gearbox (Version A, "Transmitter Up") or at a
distance from the Antenna Unit in a housing of its own (Version B, "Transmitter Down").
- The Antenna Unit, consisting of the Gearbox and the Scanner.
5 ft X-Band GR 3004 G 150 8 ft X-Band GR 3004 G 160 14 ft S-Band GR 3009 G 090
Gearbox/
Gearbox Gearbox Scanner
X-Band X-Band Gearbox
GR 3017 GR 3017 S-Band
GR 3018
Transceiver
X-Band X-Band S-Band Version A
Transceiver, Transceiver, Transceiver, (Transceiver mounted
12.5 kW 25 kW 30 kW in the Gearbox,
NG 3028 NG 3028 NG 3029 "Transmitter Up")
or
X-Band S-Band Version B

Transceiver, Transceiver, (Transceiver mounted
25 kW 30 kW in a bulkhead housing,
NG 3028 NG 3029 "Transmitter Down")
Gyro
Log
Position Display Electronics Unit
NMEA
AIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Log and Interconnection Box
Display Display
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit via optional Analog Interface GE 3044 O 000 (or separate
Interface Expander or COM Expander units GE 3044 G 020 and
ARPA EPA Audio Alarm Off, Alarm (reserve) VS 3034 O 000)
Dead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm,
Interconnection Interconnection Chart Alarm, System Alarm
Box Box Interswitch (PCI)
CHARTPILOT (via Ethernet LAN)
Slave Monitor via Indicator Electronics
optional Video Buffer/RGB Buffer as console version, desktop
version or shipyard kit.
16" Radar:
29" AZ 3040 (CRT);
9" Radar 12" Radar 23.1" 16" Radar AZ 3054 (CRT
15” 20.1"/21” Monitor
TFT CRT/TFT Monitor TFT
Monitor Monitor with Resolution Monitors/
1024x768) Operating Units
Radar TRACKPILOT
Keyboard Keyboard
(optional) (optional)
BD 3027
ztr1_007.eps
BD 3027
Trackball
BD 3028
Fig. 2-1 System overview of RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 21
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2 Overview RADARPILOT 1000
2.1 Nomenclature Technical Manual
2.1 Nomenclature
The nomenclature shows the versions of Gearbox, Transceiver and Indicator for the Radar 1000 series.
RADARPILOT 10XYY / NNNN-XN XN

CHARTRADAR X = X-Band
MULTIPILOT S = S-Band
Scanner version
5 = 5 ft
8 = 8 ft
14 = 14ft (S-Band only)
Transceiver version
A = Up
B = Down (Bulkhead)
1 = 12.5 kW
2 = 25.0 kW
3 = 30.0 kW (S-Band only)
Indicator version
EPA = EPA version (not for MULTIPILOT)
ARPA = ARPA version
1T = 180 mm PPI, 15" TFT (not for MULTIPILOT)
2 = 250 mm PPI, 21" CRT
2T = 250 mm PPI, 20.1", 19" TFT
6 = 340 mm PPI, 29" CRT (not for MULTIPILOT)
9 = 340 mm PPI, 29" CRT
9T = 340 mm PPI, 23.1" TFT
0 = Radar
1 = Radar with TRACKPILOT (only for NACOS
ztr1_166.eps
purpose)
2 = MULTIPILOT (for NACOS purpose only)
Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature
Beginning with the software version 2.4 the RADARPILOT 1000 can be upgraded to be a CHARTRADAR
1000 or it can be delivered ex works already as a CHARTRADAR 1000. The system of the nomenclature
stays the same.
22 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.2 Indicator
2.2 Indicator
2.2.1 Versions
ztr1_122.jpg
ztr1_126.jpg
Fig. 2-3 Desktop and console indicator
The Indicator consists of the Display Electronics Unit GE3044, the Interconnection Box GE3044G015, the
monitor AZ30XX and the Operating Unit with the trackball BD3028 and the optional keyboards BD3027.
Depending on the version, the Display Electronics Unit is mounted together with the Interconnection Box
in a console housing or it is mounted separately. The Interconnection Box can be mounted below the
Display Electronics Unit or separated from it (stand-alone version with cover, VS3034O000).
The Display Electronics Unit is available in two different electronic versions:
- True Motion (TM) (contains EPA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-3)
- ARPA (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, contains also ATA functionality corresponding to
IEC 60872-2)
The following mechanical versions are available:
15"/20.1"/ 23.1" TFT or 21"/ 29" CRT shipyard installation kit:
- Chassis-monitor with monitor frame and optional monitor hood
- Operating Unit (consists of the trackball or a holder plate equipped with keyboards / trackball
corresponding to the order with additional shielding plate)
- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing (GE3044)with mounted Interconnection Box or
with a separate Interconnection Box.
Desktop unit (21"/20.1") prepared for horizontal surfaces:
- Desktop housing with integrated monitor and Operating Unit
- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing (GE3044)with mounted Interconnection Box or
with a separate Interconnection Box.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 23
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.2 Indicator Technical Manual
Console versions:
- 20.1"/21" version completely mounted in a 550 mm standard console housing
- 29"/23.1" version completely mounted in a 700 mm standard console housing (not available for
Monitor AZ 3040)
- 19"/20.1"/21" version completely mounted in a 550 mm SCC console housing
- 29"/23.1" version completely mounted in a 700 mm SCC console housing
The following monitors are existing:
Radar (PPI) size 9" 12" 16" 16"
Resolution 1024x768 1280x1024 (1024x768 not 1024x768 1280x1024 (960)

for TFT)
CRT: TFT:
21" AZ3053 23.1" AZ3063
TFT: 21" AZ3058 23.1" AZ3069
15" TFT: CRT:
Monitor type AZ3066G040(ECDIS 17.4" AZ3065 (ECDIS slave) 29" AZ3054
slave) 19" AZ3068
20.1" AZ3059
20.1" AZ3056
It is possible to connect a slave monitor via the RGB buffer GE3044G208 or further slave monitors via
an additional video buffer SH3023. The required technical specifications for these slave monitors depend
on the settings of the graphics and video processor. It is not possible to connect the monitor AZ 3054
with a maximum resolution of 1024x768 pixel as a slave to a radar configuration with a monitor having a
resolution of 1280x1024 pixel. The maximum vertical and horizontal refresh rates are also important. In
case of doubt ask the SAM Electronics Customer Support Center. A slave monitor can get damaged if it
is driven with the wrong parameters.
Depending on the installation location, the Display Electronics Unit can be installed as a package with the
Interconnection Box (e.g. in the console housings) or both units separately. In both versions, the housings
of the units stay the same. The Interconnection Box gets an additional cover as a stand-alone unit.
ztr1_013.jpg
Fig. 2-4 Display Electronics Unit GE3044GO000 with Interconnection Box, dismounted
24 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.2 Indicator
2.2.2 Interfaces
Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors

The Display Electronics Unit provides four serial interfaces (RS422), which are compatible with
IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2. For a dual installation, these interfaces are available for other purposes,
such as redundancy or extension, because the data of the sensor inputs of one radar are available for
the other radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system, too.
With the Interconnection Board GE3044G206 only RS422 interfaces are available. By means of the Inter-
connection Board GE3044G216 the interfaces can be adapted also to RS232, RS422, TTL and 20 mA
current loop (TTY). The type of each interface can be defined by means of plug-in interface cards.
The interfaces are available at the Interconnection Box. See Section 4.5.10 on page 76 for further infor-
mation.
Additional Sensor Interfaces

It is possible to install an Analog Interface or a COM Expander (it is not possible to install both in one
Interconnection Box) in the Interconnection Box.
- Analog Interface for log/gyro, AIS
The Analog Interface GE3044G207 offers a gyro interface (AC/DC), a pulse log interface and a
serial interface for the connection of an AIS. It is mounted inside the Interconnection Box. For further
information see Section 4.5.11 on page 82.
- COM-Expander with serial interfaces
The COM Expander GE3044G210 offers five serial interfaces (inputs/outputs) which can be adapted
to RS232, RS422, RS485, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY) or for the connection e.g. of an AIS,
a unit with an NMEA interface or a bridge alarm system. For further information see Section 4.5.12
on page 88.
- Optional Interface Expander (not available any longer)
If more interfaces are needed than the Indicator offers, an Interface Expander can be added. The
Interface Expander must also be used if the sensor requires an interface different from RS422 (when
the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 is used, the type of interface can be modified at the Inter-
connection Board itself). The Interface Expander offers the possibility of defining the type of each
interface by means of plug-in interface cards. The hardware of the Interface Expander is described
in the technical manual of the ship’s interface. The parameterization of the Interface Expander is
described in Section 5.
The Interswitch and/or the Interface Expander are mounted together in a separate housing
(GE3023).
Interswitch
If the system exceeds the size of a dual installation, an Interswitch (former called PCI) must be integrated
to switch the video signal (TVA) of the chosen Transceiver to the Indicator being operated.
The Interswitch and/or the Interface Expander are mounted together in a separate housing (GE3023).
RGB Buffer
As a further option, an RGB buffer, e.g. for the connection of up to three (or two, depending on the
version) slave monitors, can be installed. It is also mounted in the Interconnection Box. Alternatively, it is
possible to connect more slave monitors via the RGB buffer SH3023 (former version SH3022).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 25
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.2 Indicator Technical Manual
Alarm Outputs
For the connection of an external (central) alarm system, potential-free switch contacts (inputs and
outputs) exist.
2.2.3 Operating Units
The Operating Unit is divided into three sections. To operate the radar functions, only the trackball unit
is necessary. To improve the handling, an additional Radar Keyboard is available. For the integration into
a NACOS system, the Operating Unit can be extended by addition of the Trackpilot Keyboard, which
includes the steering joystick.
ztr1_017.jpg
Fig. 2-5 Operating Unit with all keyboards
For service purposes, the radar and/or Trackpilot Keyboard can be replaced by a standard PC keyboard
with a PS/2 connector. By means of this keyboard it is possible to enter numeric values and to parame-
terize the system in a more convenient way.
2.2.4 Monitors
The monitors are not covered by this manual. For further information, see the technical manuals
for your monitor.
26 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment
For the CHARTRADAR 1000 see Section 2.4.
RADAR equipment:
The following combinations with SAM Electronics equipment are possible:
- The RADAR 9xxx transmitter can be used with a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000Display Elec-
tronics Unit (see the restriction below).
- The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000 Transceiver can be used with a RADAR 9xxx electronics
unit.
Restriction:
If one 1000 series Transceiver is integrated in a radar system, than at least one RADARPILOT/
CHARTRADAR 1000Display Electronics Unit must be installed.
NACOS equipment:
- Connection of a TRACKPILOT 9401
- Connection of a SPEEDPILOT
- Connection of an ENGINE INTERFACE
The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000 can be integrated in the NACOS xx-2 and xx-3 systems. The
following restrictions are valid:
- If there is an NCC integrated in the NACOS system, at least one RADAR 9xxx electronics unit
(or MULTIPILOT I or II) must be available.
- An MPS is not permissible in the NACOS system.
- A PCS-LAN is not permissible in the NACOS system.
General:
The RADAR 1000 series cannot be combined with the RADAR 1100 series in one system.
1)
Navigation and Command System
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 27
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.4 CHARTRADAR 1000 Technical Manual
2.4 CHARTRADAR 1000
The hardware of the CHARTRADAR 1000 is the same as the hardware of the RADARPILOT 1000, but
it is necessary to enable the CHARTRADAR software functionalities by means of an authorization code.
The radar can be delivered either as a CHARTRADAR 1000 ex works or a RADARPILOT 1000 can be
updated if the prerequisites of Section 2.4.2 are fulfilled.
2.4.1 Functionalities
- Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

- Conning Display
2.4.2 Prerequisites
- Software version ≥2.4.

- The radar must be licensed by means of an authorization code ex works or the authorization code
must be ordered from the manufacturer. See Section 5 for further information.
- Ethernet network adapter to connect the CHARTRADAR by means of the Ethernet LAN to a
CHARTPILOT 9320 or 9330.
- At least one CHARTPILOT 9320/9330 must be installed in the system.
- Vector chart data installed at the CHARTPILOT
- The monitor AZ3054 cannot be used in systems complying IEC 60936-3. See also the parameters
in Section 5.10.7.1 on page 132.
- The conning display should be activated only, if a TRACKPILOT and an ENGINE INTERFACE are
connected, because without these systems there is not enough data available to be displayed.
2.4.3 User Chart Objects
User Chart Objects which have been generated on a connected CHARTPILOT 9320/30 can be displayed
on the radar without the CHARTRADAR licensing. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT must be config-
ured as a connected planning system (see Section 5.10.5 on page 127) and the CHARTPILOT must be
configured as a chartserver (see the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT).
28 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.5 AIS
2.5 AIS
It is possible to connect an AIS electronics unit to the RADARPILOT 1000 (radar software version 2.6 or
newer). For further information see the operating manual of the radar and the technical manual of the
UAIS Electronics Unit DEBEG 3400. If other AIS systems are used, the minimum demands concerning
functionality and interfacing corresponding to the regulations are fulfilled.
SAM SAM
VHF GPS
Antenna Antenna
Ship's
sensor data
RS 422
Display Display 1
Sensor Input
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit 2 )
3 Channels *
RS 422
Interconnection CAN Bus Interconnection UAIS

Ship's
sensor data Box Ship's Box with RS 422 Electronics Unit
sensor data Analog Prim. Display
Interface Port
or
Ethernet LAN Ethernet
LAN **
) 24 VDC
)
*
Gyro: HDT, ROT
Speedlog (bottom-track): VBW
Position Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM
CHARTPILOT 9320/30
All data are transferred with a
repetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1)
except of DTM (0.1 Hz)
)
**
LAN connection only for radar or
MULTIPILOT with software
version 3.0 or newer.
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR
MULTIPILOT 1000 /MULTIPILOT 1000 ***)
ztr1_601.eps
When the radar is connected to

the AIS by means of the Primary
Display Port, the DCU can be used
as Slave only.
Fig. 2-6 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 is connected to the Interconnection Box of the RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/
MULTIPILOT 1000. The ship’s sensors are connected to the radars/MULTIPILOTs. The sensor data are
transferred from the radar(s) to the AIS (in dual or multiple installations, from two radars or MULTIPILOTs
as redundancy, if possible).
The repetition interval of the ship’s sensor data is set automatically if the Indicator’s serial interface is
configured as AIS Navigation Data interface.
If the RADARPILOT 1000 and/or MULTIPILOT 1000 has a software of version 3.0 or newer, it is also
possible to connect the AIS by means of the Ethernet LAN.
All CHARTPILOT systems receive the AIS data via the Ethernet LAN. If the AIS Electronics Unit is not
connected to the LAN, only the activated targets can be displayed at the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS Elec-
tronics Unit is connected to the LAN and a Software Version 5.2 or newer is installed on the CHART-
PILOT, the complete AIS functionality is available at the CHARTPILOT.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 29
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.6 VDR DEBEG 4300 Technical Manual
2.6 VDR DEBEG 4300
The VDR DEBEG 4300 can be connected to the Ethernet LAN. For the configuration of the 1100 series
system which is necessary for the connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 see Section 5.4 on page 110.
The configuration/setting-to-work of the VDR see the documentation of the VDR.
30 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e02.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 3 Installation Recommendations
Technical Manual 3.1 General Recommendations
3 Installation Recommendations
3.1 General Recommendations
3.1.1 Cables
Cable types, cable data, maximum cable length, special instructions for cable laying and connection
details are defined in the Cabling Documents of the corresponding equipment (consisting of schematic
diagram, remarks, cable list and connection diagram).
Interface connections should be discussed and agreed with SAM Electronics.
In order to ensure proper functioning of the equipment, the cable types should be selected according to
the cable lists.
In general, the following points must be taken into account:
- For the cables inside the units (cabinets), an extra length of 1 metre is necessary at each end. If
the height of the unit exceeds 0.5 metre, an extension by 1 m plus the height of the cabinet is neces-
sary.
- The cables must be marked by the electrician at both ends with the cable numbers corresponding
to the SAM Electronics Cabling Documents.
- Where necessary, particular cable glands - marked with letters and/or numbers - are assigned to
the cables.
The identification letters and numbers are stated in the connection diagrams; they are either fixed to
the unit or can be seen from the outline drawings (...BZ or ...MB).
- All cables should be kept as short as possible, especially coaxial cables to minimize attenuation of
signal.
- All outdoor installed connectors (e.g. on coaxial cables) should be waterproof by design to protect
against water penetration into the cable.
- Coaxial cables should be installed in separate signal cable channels/tubes and at least 10 cm away
from power supply cables. Crossing of cables should be done at right angles (90°). Coaxial cables
should not be exposed to sharp bends, which may lead to change the characteristic impedance of
the cable. The minimum bend radius should be 5 times the cable’s outside diameter.
- It must be ensured that all cables - including their screens - are passed into the units in contin-
uous lengths and are not terminated before reaching the destination equipment. This is not valid
for the use of cable glands with grounding inserts.
The cables must be prepared by means of a wire (0.5...1.0 mm², length: 800 mm) as shown in Figure
3-1. The wire has to be connected at the shielding terminal contact.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 31
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3 Installation Recommendations RADARPILOT 1000
3.1 General Recommendations Technical Manual
1. 2.
ztr1_153.jpg
ztr1_196.jpg
3. 4.
ztr1_197.jpg
ztr1_198.jpg
Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings
- When putting the cables into cable glands with grounding inserts, the procedure described must
be followed (see Figure 3-2).
Coaxial cables must be grounded at the cable gland or cable entry of the
housing and at the suitable terminal.
The internal diameter of the sealing ring (1) must be adjusted to the cable diameter. The screen
braiding (2) must be pushed over the anti-cone (3) of the grounding insert. Then the cone (4)
must be put into position. The screen foil (5) must be protected against tearing by means of
32 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
insulating tape (6) before it is unwound. Form a kind of wire from the unwound part of the foil
and crimp a connector (7) to the end. The gland must be screwed tight. If the gland is screwed
tight with too much strength, it can happen that the screen braiding is cut.
ztr_176.jpg
7 6 5 4 2 3 1
as short as
possible
ztr_180.jpg ztr_178.jpg
Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts
- With the use of cable glands without grounding inserts, the screen braiding inside the unit must
be plaited to form a "pigtail", terminated by a cable terminal, and connected to the prescribed
grounding terminal. It must be ensured that the grounding lead is kept as short as possible.
- In the case of a unit whose cable inlet consists of a hole with brackets attached on the inside
and outside, the cable must be dressed as shown in Figure 3-3.
- With multicore cables, it is useful to strip down and lace the single wires according to the terminal
sequence.
- Receptacle-type cable terminals included in the delivery must be crimped to the connecting leads
by means of a suitable pair of AMP pliers. If a terminal board of a unit has no tabs for the above-
mentioned receptacles, other suitable cable terminals must be used.
- Existing cable grippers in the units must be used.
- All cable connections must be carefully checked after completion of the cable work and all cable
screens must be grounded via the shortest possible connections - if not stated otherwise in the
Cabling Documents/Connection Diagram.
- All cables must be secured by means of suitable clamps (pull-relief) before entering the units.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 33
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
- When soldering stripped coaxial cables to connectors, it must be ensured that the central
conductor and the screening do not produce a short circuit. A short-circuit check after installation is
advisable.
- It must be ensured that cables do not block any moving parts within a unit.
- Stuffing tubes exposed to the open air must, without fail, be sealed with compound.
- Power leads must be protected by "slow-blow" fuses according to their cross section.
Brackets
Metal clamp inside Installation cables

FMGCH, FMKHC, MGCH etc.
35+5 Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing;

contact with the brackets via metal clamp
Metal clamp outside

ztr1_072.gif
Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets
3.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length
Coaxial Cable for TVA Signal

The maximum length of the TVA cable must not exceed 300 m. For a length of more than 150 m see the
description of the IF-amplifier in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
CAN Bus
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 0 must not exceed a length of 500 m between the termination resistors
when a cable FMGCH or FMKHC is used.
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 1 must not exceed a length of 100 m.
Ethernet LAN
The Ethernet LAN thin wire cabling must not exceed a length of 185 m.
Video Cable (RGB Buffer)

The video cable (VGA) which is connected to the RGB buffer must not exceed a length of 50 m.
34 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.1.1.2 Cable Sets
Cable sets for the standard-cables of X/S-Band installations are no longer available. The cables can be
ordered in the required length by means of the following order numbers:
Cable type Order No. of the individual items

Coaxial Cable
Draka 1.0/4.8 AF FRNC 300006082
(former TELASS 100 PE) (535-1708)
Cable (8-core)
FMKHC 4x2x0.75 300005306
(former FMGCH) (535-4461)
3.1.2 Electronics Units
Dimensions, weights, spaces required for service and maintenance and special installation instructions
are stated in the outline drawings and installation drawings of the corresponding unit. In general, the
following points also apply:
- The useful life of the components of all electronics units (display units, pulse generators, Trans-
ceivers etc.) generally decreases with increasing ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to
install such units in air-conditioned rooms. if there are no such facilities - e.g. deckhouse or space
near or below the water line - these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a
suitable temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside these units.
- With most electronic units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing.
The cooling must not be impaired by partial covering of the unit as a result of insulation (if any) of
the room (the wall on which the casing is mounted), or by installation of the unit in a confined
cabinet.
Furthermore, the distance from the ceiling and the floor or from a unit situated underneath must be
at least 500 mm.
- For service purposes, a power socket (AC 220/230 V) and adequate lighting are necessary in the
vicinity of each electronics unit.
- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic protec-
tion distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the "wing control console" -
protected against the weather - if they do not at least correspond to the enclosure type IP 56. In
order to avoid misting of the viewing screen, 25 ... 50 W console-heating (power depending on the
volume) is recommended.
- When selecting the site of a unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered according to
the notes in the cabling documents (remarks, cable list).
- The accessibility for maintenance and service (stated in the outline drawings or installation draw-
ings) must be considered.
- The impairment of a digital read-out or a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must
be avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or venetian blinds.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 35
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
- Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must
be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).
- When a unit is being installed, the base, floor or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it is
flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such twisting
would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by means of
spacing-washers.
- The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire
used should have a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm.
Aboard fibreglass (GRP) vessels, a "grounding network" with a high conductance - taking into
consideration the working frequencies of the other equipment - must be provided in order to achieve
satisfactory EMC (electromagnetic compatibility).
- In the interests of safety during maintaining or servicing, the shipyard should provide a common
isolating switch or circuit breaker (in conjunction with a contactor, if necessary) for all intercon-
nected equipment.
- Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be exam-
ined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment is too
late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.
- The equipment should never be switched on by the electricians who did the installation work
- not even just for a moment - never!
This is a job for the authorised SAM Electronics service engineer.
- After hand-over of the equipment in good operating condition to the customer, the Installation
Report (Annex of the Warranty Certificate) should be filled in completely and then forwarded to SAM
Electronics as proof of such fulfilment. It is important that these requirements be fulfilled in order to
avoid the risk of losing the warranty.
3.1.3 Indicator
All radar Indicators in the wheel house must be installed in such a way that the radar observer faces in
the forward direction of the ship.
In the case of ferries and special-purpose vessels, the authorities (e.g. the BSH) may permit exceptions
to this rule.
3.1.4 Monitors
General
1. The SAM Electronics radar and navigation equipment monitors have been type-tested and are
approved only in the original as-delivered condition in accordance with IMO Resolution A.694(17);
they fulfil the test and approval conditions as per IEC 60945 and DIN EN 60945 ("B-protected from
the weather").
2. Changes in the monitors, such as the removal of casings or the closing of existing ventilation open-
ings, or improper mounting of the monitors, such as installation in a different casing, will lead to loss
of approval; furthermore, our warranty for any resulting damage or malfunctions will become null and
void.
36 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3. Please note: Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating
temperature of 55°C, continuous operation of all electronic components should, if possible, take
place at ambient temperatures of only 25°C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low
service costs.
Installation, Mounting of Monitors

1. Most monitors are intended for various methods of installation or mounting (mounting on the
pedestal/panel, desk-top or fixed mounting, or bracket mounting to allow tilting for service purposes);
for details, please see the relevant installation drawings.
When monitors are mounted side by side or next to a panel wall (for example), the tilting bracket for
service purposes is mandatory.
2. Existing vibration or shock absorbers must not be removed.
3. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the electronic components. The air
inlet and outlet openings marked in the installation drawings must definitely be kept clear; coverings
which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to excess temperature. This point should already be borne
in mind when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows, venti-
lation, ...).
5. The space stated in the installation drawings as being necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for
the operating procedures and for maintenance, must be provided.
6. If the push buttons of the monitor are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination (e.g. goose-
neck light) is required for navigational use.
7. The installation of additional active electronic components in the units or in the pedestals is not
permissible.
8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings. Attention
must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service work.
Ergonomics
1. For observation of the screens both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a monitor
inclination of about 30° to 40° (mounting of the monitors on a surface inclined at an angle of about
30° to 40°) has turned out to be favourable. This does not apply to monitors in bridge wing panels.
For this purpose, as well as for the operating areas, the rules of the classification society concerned
must in all cases be incorporated into the planning.
2. The brightness of monitors is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means (negatively
inclined window surfaces, Venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring of the deck-
head, ...).
3. Monitors in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or bulkhead/
deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the monitor are not
directed into the observer's viewing direction.
4. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment that
require approval (by optical effects, "aids" of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 37
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.2 Specific Recommendations Technical Manual
3.2 Specific Recommendations
3.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables
The cables between the Display Electronics Unit, the Interconnection Box and the monitor are prefabri-
cated. They are marked with numbers which correspond to the numbers of the connectors. See also
Section 4.5.3.3 on page 56.
3.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship´s Sensors / Redundancy
The IMB offers 4 RS 422 interfaces for ship’s sensors. It is advisable to use the interfaces as shown in
Figure 3-4 which describes the connection of the ship’s sensors to the IMB(s) in a single installation and
in a dual installation.
Single Installation
Display Electronics Unit
Gyro Interface 1
Log Interface 2
IMB
Position Sensor 1 Interface 3
ztr1_118.eps
Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the IMB, single installation
38 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 3.2 Specific Recommendations
Dual Installation
Display Electronics Unit 1
Output 1
Gyro *) Output 2 Interface 1
Output 1
Log *) Output 2 Interface 2
IMB
Other Sensors Interface 4
*)
with two electrically Display Electronics Unit 2
separated outputs
Redundancy
Interface 1
Redundancy
Interface 2
IMB

ztr1_637.eps
Other Sensors Interface 4
Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the IMB, dual installation
For further information see the cabling diagrams in Section 12 and the description of the IMB in Section
4.5.7, page 69.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 39
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
For ship’s sensors with Analog Interfaces, the Analog Interface pcb must be used. The system can also
contain two Analog Interfaces for redundancy purposes.
Single/Dual Installation without Redundancy
Output 1
Position Sensor 1*) Output 2 IMB pcb, Interface IMB pcb, Interface
*)
with two electrically
separated outputs
Display Electronics Unit Display Electronics Unit

Nav Bus
Gyro Gyro interface
Log Log interface

ztr1_162.eps
AIS Analog
Interface
Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy
Dual Installation with Redundancy
Output 1 IMB pcb, Interface IMB pcb, Interface

Position Sensor 1*) Output 2
*)
with two electrically
separated outputs
Display Electronics Unit Display Electronics Unit

Nav Bus
Gyro Gyro interface Gyro interface
Log Log interface Log interface

*)
Analog AIS Analog
Interface 1 Interface 2
ztr1_638.eps
*)
Connect to Analog Interface 2 with software version 2.6.1
or newer, to Analog Interface 1 with software version 2.6.
The AIS must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces
Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy
If the system also contains RADAR 9xxx radars, all sensors must be connected to the ship’s interface
NG3013G209.
40 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 3.2 Specific Recommendations
3.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400
Software Version ≤2.6.1, Connection via RS422 Interface:

In a single installation, an Analog Interface must be existing to connect the AIS system. In dual or
multiple installations with two Analog Interfaces, the AIS must be connected as follows:
Radar software version 2.6: Analog Interface 1 (usually at Indicator No. 1)
Radar software version ≥2.6.1
and MULTIPILOT 1000: Analog Interface 2 (usually at Indicator No. 2)
The AIS electronics unit must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces!
In dual or multiple installations it is recommended to use two Analog Interfaces or one Analog Inter-
face and an Interface Expander for reasons of redundancy of the ship’s sensors (see Section 3.2.2).
Software Version ≥3.0, Connection via Ethernet LAN:
The AIS can be connected via Ethernet LAN, so that it is not necessary to install an Analog Interface.
If the AIS shall be connected via RS422 interface, see the information for software version ≥2.6.1
above.
3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface
ATTENTION
Setting the compass input to serial IEC 61162-1 data
(HDT message with 4800 Baud and 1 Hz repetition rate) will
result in degradation of stabilization smoothness. There-
fore such compass installations should only be used for
stabilization purposes of EPA radars.
For any installation which is required to meet the IEC 60872-1 (ARPA) or
IEC 60872-2 (ATA) specification, the serial data of the gyro compass
must conform to the IEC 61162-2 standard. The interface shall provide a
heading data update rate of at least 20 Hz for normal radar and 40 Hz for
HSC radar.
ATTENTION (compass systems with synchro transmission)
Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degra-
dation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore
this setting should not be used where:
- the radar installation has to meet the IMO/IEC Radar Performance

Standards
- type approval certification is required
- the ARPA option is fitted.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 41
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems
It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate to
the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.
- When using a planning system, position coordinates obtained from a chart with a datum deviating
from WGS 84 can be converted to WGS 84 map and track data.
- The only position receivers that may be connected to the radar system or NACOS system are those
that output the position values in the geographical reference system WGS 84 via an interface as per
IEC 61162-1 1).
- If the radar is installed in conjunction with a navigation system (NACOS/TRACKPILOT), see the
appropriate manuals.
1)
This part of IEC 61162 is closely aligned with NMEA 0183 Version 2.3 dated March 1, 1998
42 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e03.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 4 Functional Description
Technical Manual 4.1 Block Diagram
4 Functional Description
4.1 Block Diagram
The radar system can be extended to up to five MULTIPILOT or RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000

units. If there are more than two Display Electronics Units or Transceivers in one system it is necessary
to use an Interswitch in a separate housing to switch the radar videos (TVA signals). The "power on"
concept stays the same.
The optional Interface Expander 1) with the optional Interswitch and the Analog Interface are permanently
connected to the ship’s mains.
SAM
SAM
Gearbox GR 3017 G 150

Gearbox GR 3017 G 150
Transceiver NG 3028 G 150

Transceiver NG 3028 G 150 (Version A/B) with power supply
(Version A/B) with power supply and relay
and relay
1-ph / 3-ph
1-ph / 3-ph Ship's Mains
Ship's Mains
CAN 1, Nav Bus CH1...5 CAN 0 CAN1 CAN 1, Nav Bus
Ship’s
CAN 0, Radar Bus CAN 0, Radar Bus
Data Ship´s
AIS TVA 1 out TVA 1 out
Data
Gyro TVA 2 out Gyro TVA 2 out
Log TVA in Log TVA
CAN 0 CAN 0
GPS Power On Display Electronics CH1 Interswitch GPS Power On Display Electronics
NMEA GE3044 (Radar) or ... out ≥ 3 Radars NMEA GE3044 (Radar) or
GE3048 (MULTIPILOT) CH5 (optional) GE3048 (MULTIPILOT)
Mains Mains
RGB
RGB Interface Expander
(optional) RGB
Power- Buffer Power-
On (optional) On
Signal Signal
RGB RGB
Mains
Monitor Monitor
AZ 30xx AZ 30xx
Mains
To Slave- Sensor Inputs
Monitor
Data (PS/2)
Data (PS/2)
ztr1_005.eps
Operating Unit
Operating Unit
BD3027
BD3027
Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept
1)
Is not delivered any longer. The COM Expander must be used instead.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 43
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4 Functional Description RADARPILOT 1000
4.2 "Power On" Concept Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept
Transceiver Electronics Unit 1 Transceiver Electronics Unit 2
Mains Mains
Input Unit Input Unit
NG 3028 G 204 NG 3028 G 204
Ship's Mains Ship's Mains
24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN) 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)
Monitor Monitor
Power- Power-
Switch Switch
TB13 TB10 TB5 TB13 TB10 TB5
T1 TB4 Ship's Mains T1 TB4 Ship's Mains

Interconnection Interconnection
CR1 Box CR1 Box
24V ON/OFF 24V ON/OFF

from/to (ONP/ONN) (ONP/ONN)
other
units
TB3 K1 TB3 K1
TB11 TB11
Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2

ztr1_060.eps
24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)
Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept
The system is switched on by means of the mains power switch of the master monitor. The master
monitor is supplied with power by the Interconnection Box. If the mains switch of the monitor is switched
to position "On", the mains supply is led back to the transformer T1 in the Interconnection Box. The trans-
former and a rectifier generate the voltage 24V ON/OFF. In contrast to the name, the voltage is about
30...36 VDC without load. In the circuit diagrams the two wires of 24V ON/OFF are also called ONP and
ONN. The signal is not connected to a ground potential. It is not permissible to use ONN as a GND line
or to use ONP as a power supply line. 24V ON/OFF is connected as an output on TB3 and it switches
the relay K1 in the Interconnection Box. K1 switches the mains power supply of the Display Electronics
Unit and of an optional slave monitor. If there are more radars or MULTIPILOTs in the system, the 24V
ON/OFF signals of these units are connected as an input on TB3, too. The signals are connected by strip
44 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.2 "Power On" Concept
conductors, so that all radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system get the signal if only one radar has been
switched on. This is necessary to enable the user to obtain the radar video of a second system whose
Indicator has not been switched on. The remote video inputs and outputs are delivered by the Display
Electronics Unit.
The 24V ON/OFF signal is led to all Transceivers of a system. At Transceivers NG3028/NG3029 it is
connected to TB 3 of the connection board GR3017G200 and switches the mains supply relay for the
mains input of the mains input unit NG3028G204. In version A, the unit NG3028G204 is situated in the
Gearbox. In version B it is situated in the bulkhead housing.
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started as described above. If the BIOS settings are
incorrect, the radar might not start.
NOTE:
If the Display Electronics Unit is supplied by a UPS, the Transceiver Electronics Unit must not be
connected to TB5. The mains supply for the Transceiver must be connected independently from the UPS.
Only if the capacity of the UPS is sufficient for the supply of the Transceiver and the motor (in 1-ph
systems), TB5 can be used.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 45
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination Technical Manual
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2
TP53 CAN0 TP53 CAN0

1/2 termination 1/2 termination
TCU TCU
J2 J2
J1 J1
TB3 Connection Board TB3 Connection Board
max. length of CAN 0

500 m between the
CAN0 termination resistors CAN0
J7 J5 (CAN1) J7 J5 (CAN1)
Analog Inter- Analog Inter-
Interface connection Interface connection
Board Board
CAN1 CAN1
term. TB3 term. TB3
TP78 TP78
1/2 1/2
Box J1 Box J1
CAN0 & CAN1 CAN1

CAN0 & CAN1 CAN0 & CAN1 Interface Expander
(optional)
CAN0 termination CAN0 termination

TP161 1/2 TP161 1/2
IMB IMB
CAN1 termination CAN1 termination
TP162 1/2 TP162 1/2
ztr1_125.eps
Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2
This symbol shows an available connector for the termination of a CAN

bus in the drawing above. Do not connect jumpers to all termination
connectors. Each CAN bus must be terminated by means of only 2
ztr1_175.eps
jumpers. See the following descriptions to choose the correct units for the
termination. Do never leave out the termination.
Fig. 4-3 CAN Bus concept and termination
WARNING
If the termination is not performed, the system might work

unreliably!
46 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
Figure 4-3 shows the principle of the wiring of the CAN Bus system. The example shows a dual installa-
tion, version A. The termination resistors must only be implemented at the beginning and at the
end of a CAN-line. For further examples see the technotes. The CAN wires should be as short as
possible.
Advice for the Termination of the CAN Buses

1. Determine the beginning and the end of a CAN Bus.
2. Terminate the CAN Bus only at the beginning and at the end.
3. The CAN Bus (CAN 1) is also connected to an optional trackpilot or Interface Expander. It is
possible, that they are connected at the beginning or the end of a CAN Bus wiring.
CAN0
CAN0 is also called "radar bus". By means of the radar bus the system is controlled. All orders and
parameters are sent via the radar bus.
For the example on page 46 CAN0 should be terminated at TP53 1/2 of both Transceivers.
If a direct CAN0 connection between the Transceiver Electronics Units has been performed, the termina-
tion must be performed at the TCU (TP53 1/2) of the last Transceiver in the CAN0 line and at TP161 1/
2 of the last IMB of one Display Electronics Unit in the CAN0 line. If an Interswitch (PCI) is used in a
separate housing, it might be necessary to terminate CAN 0 at the Interswitch pcb.
CAN1
CAN1 is also called "navigation bus" or "nav bus". The data of the ship’s sensors, such as position data,
speed data and gyro data, are sent via the nav bus.
For the example on page 46, CAN1 should be terminated at both IMBs TP162 1/2 (Radar 1000 Series).
WARNING
If the cable connection between J5 of the Interconnection
Board and J7 of the Analog Interface is not present (e.g.
no Analog Interface is installed), the CAN Bus output
terminals of TB3 have no function.
In this case the following pins of the Interconnection
Board must be short-circuited by means of jumpers:
J5 1/2
J5 3/4
J5 5/6
J5 7/8
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 47
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces Technical Manual
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces
Single Talker/Single Listener

In single talker/single listener systems via the Interconnection Board, it is not necessary to terminate the
RS422 interface, because the interface is always terminated at the IMB.
In single talker/single listener systems via the COM Expander, it is necessary to terminate the RS422
interface at TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. See page 92 for a description of TP3.
RS422 connected to interconnection board

Interconnection Board Indicator
Ship's Sensor RS422
IMB
internal
termination
RS422 connected to COM expander

COM Expander Indicator
Ship's Sensor RS422 GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_649.eps
Jumpers must be set to TP3
Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection
Single Talker/Multi Listener

Single talker/multi listener connections result from sensors which are connected to two Indicators (redun-
dancy). The serial connection must be terminated at the Indicator with the longest distance to the ship’s
sensor.
For a RS422 connection via the Interconnection Board the termination is given by the IMB, so that the
termination at the Indicator with the shorter distance must be deactivated. This must be performed by
means of an additional plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. The pcb GE3044G218 must be connected to
the Interconnection Board and all jumpers on TP3 must be removed. See page 92 for a description of
TP3.
48 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces
Interconnection Board Indicator 1

TP3
IMB
All jumpers from TP3
must be removed internal
termination
IMB
ztr1_650.eps
internal
termination
Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker/multiple listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board)
For a RS422 connection via the COM Expander the termination resistor must be deactivated at the Indi-
cator which is in a shorter distance to the ship’s sensor (all jumpers must be removed from TP3 of the
plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). It must be activated at the Indicator which is in a longer distance to
the ship’s sensor (jumpers must be set to TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). See page 92
for a description of TP3.
COM Expander Indicator 1

TP3
Jumpers must be removed

from TP3
Com Expander Indicator 2
GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_651.eps
Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker/multiple listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 49
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces Technical Manual
Separate Serial Interfaces

If the sensor has two separate outputs, they must be used to install two single talker/single listener
connections.
RS422 IMB
Ship's Sensor
RS422 internal
termination
COM Expander Indicator 2

GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_652.eps
50 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.5 Display Electronics Unit
4.5 Display Electronics Unit
4.5.1 System
LOG Radar Alarm TVA1 to R

Serial Gyro Target Alarm TVA2 Monitor G
I/O Position Dead Man Alarm trigger B
NMEA Chart Alarm TVA1 out
CAN 0 Audio Alarm Ack. (Remote Video)
CAN 1 Reserve
Video
Buzzer
Interface & RSC - PCB ARPA - PCB Graphics & Video

Memory Board Processor
(IMB) (GVP)
Speaker
Monitor Control (COM1)
Debug Port (COM2)
LAN Parallel Port

(optional)
Trackball (PS/2)
Keyboard (PS/2)
1 2 Par. PS/2 PS/2

Power Supply
(ATX)
COM
RAM
AGP Slot
PCI
On/Off
ISA
Mains
CPU Module
Pentium
ztr1_001.eps
ATX Motherboard Floppy Disk Drive
Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit GE3044
The block diagram does not show the correct order of the pcbs. This order depends on the type of moth-
erboard which is used in the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 4.5.3 for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 51
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5 Display Electronics Unit Technical Manual
The Display Electronics Unit contains the following components:

- Pentium motherboard (PMB)
- Radar scan converter (RSC)
- ARPA electronics (ARPA) (optional)
- Graphic and video processor (GVP)
- Interface and memory board (IMB)
- Power supply
- Interconnection Board
- LAN network adapter (optional)
- RGB buffer (optional)
- Floppy Disk
The monitors are not dealt within this manual. Separate technical manuals are available for all types
which can be serviced. The monitors can be connected to the Display Electronics Unit or to the RGB
buffer.
The Display Electronics Unit has to process the radar video and to act as the interface to the user
together with the Operating Unit and the monitor. The functions are described in detail in the following
chapters.
4.5.2 Housing
The components of the Display Electronics Unit are mounted in a metal housing. There are two versions
of the housing for the different power supplies. See Section 4.5.8 on page 73 for further information.
52 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB)
CAUTION
The motherboard shown and described below is only an example
(version DFI CA64). The Display Electronics Unit can be equipped with
different motherboards in accordance with technical progress.
PCI slots
ISA slot Main processor Power supply
(not used) BIOS Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 AGP slot Memory banks with fan connector
1 2 3 4 5
ztr1_015.jpg
Power On, LED, Lock, IDE connectors Floppy connector

Speaker connectors
Fig. 4-8 Example of a Pentium Celeron motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set ex works.
WARNING
For the use of the different motherboards, some prerequi-
sites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for
further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 53
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards
The main processor is the Pentium processor on the motherboard. The motherboard is a PC board of
ATX standard with sockets for CPU, BIOS, RAM, ISA cards and PCI cards.
The interfaces of the motherboard are shown in the block diagram in Figure 4-7. An example of the posi-
tion of the connectors is shown in Figure 4-9. The location and the number of connectors depend on the
version of the motherboard. For the sequence of the pcbs in the PCI slots see Section 4.5.3.2 on page
55.
Types of Motherboards
The Display Electronics Unit is equipped with different motherboards in accordance with technical
progress. The different versions of the motherboards can be recognized by means of the number of PCI/
ISA slots and some labels of the manufacturer. Some types of motherboards have an onboard sound-
card. In this case, the sound option must be disabled in the BIOS settings (see Section 5.13) and in case
of exchange, the covers must be removed from the openings for the sound card connectors in the Display
Electronics Unit’s housing.
Number of Number of
Type of motherboard ISA slots PCI slots Position of the manufacturer’s label
- next to the primary IDE connector and

Tekram S3ZX-A 2 5 - on one of the ISA slots
DFI CA61 3 4 - on the housing of the parallel interface and

- printed on the pcb next to the memory slot
- on one of the ISA slots
DFI CB61 3 4 - on the pcb next to the memory slot
DFI CA64 1 5 - on the housing of the parallel interface
Connection of the Buzzer

The speaker output of the motherboard is connected to TP11/1 of the IMB. The position of the connector
on the motherboard depends on the version of the motherboard. Usually the motherboard pcb is
inscripted. See Figure 4-8 for an example. Only one contact of the connector is used. If the cable is
connected to the wrong connector, the buzzer does not work.
54 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slots
The pcbs which are described in the following sections have to be plugged in at a defined PCI slot. It is
not permissible to change the position of the pcbs on the motherboard. If a pcb has been plugged in at
the wrong PCI slot, then unforeseen faults will probably occur.
CAUTION
For the slot numbers, see Figure 4-8 on page 53. The
numbers printed on the motherboard pcb may be different
and are not valid. Start to count from the ISA slots onwards
in direction of the processor as shown in Figure 4-8. The
number of ISA and PCI slots depends on the motherboard
type.
PCI Slot No. 1)

Tekram DFI DFI
PCB S3ZX-A CA61/CB61 CA64
Ethernet module (optional) 5 2) 1 2
Interface and memory board (IMB) 2 2 3
Radar scan converter (RSC) 3 3 4
ARPA pcb (optional) 4 4 5
1)
The slot numbers printed on the pcb are not valid! See Figure 4-8 on page 53 for the correct sequence.
2)
The Ethernet module has been plugged into slot 1 ex works. It is definitely advisable to change its position
to slot 5 to prevent problems during Ethernet network problems. See also Section 8.4.4 on page 212
for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 55
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit
4 5 10 9
ztr1_078.jpg
1 2 3 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16
Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
No. of Function
Contact
1 Mains connector
2 Voltage selector (115/230 V). If this switch is not existing, the power supply unit adapts automati-
cally to the mains supply voltage.
3 Mains switch (Important: The system must be switched on / off by means of the monitor mains
switch!)
4 Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit (= 5)
Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit or Interconnection Board GE3044G216 if
5 plug-in pcbs are used (= 4). This connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted
additionally (modification kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if necessary.
6 Trackball connector
7 Keyboard connector
8 USB connector, not used
9 Diskette drive data cable
10 Parallel port, not used
11 Serial port, for monitor OSD data (depending on monitor type), to J3 of the Interconnection Box
12 Serial port, not used
13 1) VGA connector for Monitor
1)
14 VGA connector for RSC input (TVA1, TVA2, TVA1 out), to J4 of the Interconnection Box
15 1)
IMB connector, to J1 of the Interconnection Box
16 1) Ethernet module (optional)
1)
The positions of the connectors depend on the motherboard type. See Section 4.5.3.2.
56 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
The Display Electronics Unit needs no hard disk for the radar functions. The
diskette drive is used for SW updates, for service purposes or for the exchange
and back-up of user data. In former versions the diskette drive was mounted in
the console housing (outside the Electronics Unit’s housing). In this case and in
case of the connection of an external diskette drive (service purposes), the power
supply can be connected at one of these connectors.
ztr1_101.jpg
The connectors for the supply of power to the keyboard and the diskette drive
12 V 5V are similar. The 12 V supply is not needed. Current versions of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit have an internal diskette drive.
If an Interconnection Board GE3044G216 is used and plug-in pcbs for the interface conversion are
mounted, the Interconnection Board needs a separate power supply cable which must be connected at
one of these connectors. The second connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted
additionally (modification kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if necessary.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 57
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.4 Radar Scan Converter (RSC) GE3044G201
Test Pins Potentiometers

TP11 Function R201 Function
1 Input signal TVA1 or TVA2 Adjustment of TVA1 video signal ampli-
TVA1 tude. See Section 4.5.4.1, R S C A d j u s t -
2 Video/azimuth signal without trigger m e n t s on page 61.
3 n.c.
4 n.c. R202 Function
5 Auto FTC video Adjustment of TVA2 video signal ampli-
6 AZIMUTHSTART active low m e n t s on page 61.
7 AZIMUTHDATA active low
8 Transmitter trigger R203 Function
9 Test TVA signal, internal test generator Adjustment of the TVA signal offset. See
Video Section 4.5.4.1, R S C A d j u s t m e n t s on page
10 Analog GND Offset 61.
LEDs
Function
DS1 green On = video overflow (video offset

adjustment)
DS1 red On = no azimuth data
DS5 DS6
TP11 R201 R202 J3 DS1 DS2 S1 TP71 TP92 TP112 DS4 DS7 TP141 R203 TP171
DS3 DS8
1
1
ON 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
TP41 TP42 TP72 TP103 TP113/

ztr1_079.jpg
114
Fig. 4-10 RSC pcb
58 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
WARNING
For the use of the different revisions of the RSC, some
prerequisites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n
O v e r v i e w for further information.
Connectors / Jumpers / Test Pins

Function
J3 ARPA video output
TP41 Function
1 Jumper on 1/2 = default
No jumper on 1/2 = 8.5 µs azimuth signal
2
TP42 Function
2 No jumper on 1/2 = PCI controller floating. Manufacturer’s setting
TP72 Function
1 GND
TP141 Function
141 GND
TP171 Function
1 Video offset for A/D converter.
U
Video from +1.9 V to +3.1 V
Set range to 12 NM and SEA (STC) to 100% for
+1.87 V (+/-150 mV) the adjustment with R203. The signal must be
min.
R203 completely above ≈1.87 V. It is advisable to adjust
the video offset by means of the LED indication
as described in Section 4.5.4.1.
t
2 WARNING
Do not short circuit the Pins 2 and 3 of TP171.
This will destroy the RSC. It is advisable to adjust
the video offset by means of the LED indication
(DS1). See the description in Section 4.5.4.1 on
page 61.
3 Rev. ≤03: Analog GND Rev. ≥04: Not connected
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 59
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
DIP Switch
S1 1) Function
On Off
1 Default = on, manufacturer’s setting Not permissible
1)
on=close=0; off=open=1
LEDs
Function
DS1 green On = video overflow (video offset adjustment)
DS2 green On = no azimuth start
DS2 red On = no trigger
DS3 green On = DSP2_Post_Failure
DS3 red On = DSP1_Post_Failure
DS4 green On = Antenna toggle
DS4 red On = Headmarker toggle
DS5 green On = DSP2_COMM toggle
DS5 red On = DSP1_COMM toggle
DS6 green On = DSP2_Stand by, off = DSP2_RADAR_MODE_ON
DS6 red On = DSP1_Stand by, off = DSP2_RADAR_MODE_OFF
DS7 green On = "SWEEP"-FiFo’s reset (signal "~IFRES" = active)
DS7 red On = "PCI"-FiFo’s reset (signal "~RES_FIF" = active)
DS8 green DSP wait (signal "ACK" active)
DS8 red For manufacturer’s use
60 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.4.1 RSC Adjustments
TVA Amplitude
TVA1 can be adjusted by means of R201 and TVA2 by means of R202. Adjust the TVA trigger +2 V
(minimum), the maximum amplitude of the video signal to -2 V, the azimuth start to -4 V and azimuth data
to -2 V, see Figure 4-11. The TVA signal can be measured at TP11/1. In single installations, only TVA1
is used.
The adjustment of TVA1 is also affecting TVA1 out which is used in case of a double installation as TVA2
at the second Display Electronics Unit.
Important:
In dual installations, the Transceiver of the second radar must be selected at the Indicator to get the
TVA2 signal.
In systems with more than two Transceivers, the adjustments must be performed at the Interswitch. Only
TVA1 is used. Nevertheless, the signal should be checked.
U 2 ms / 1ms / 0.5ms
+2 V/75 Ohm
100 µs
5 µs 5 µs
Trigger Trigger t
Video ~15 µs
-2 V/75 Ohm
Azimuth data
LSB MSB
ztr1_024.ceps
-4 V/75 Ohm
Azimuth
start
Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 61
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Video Offset
Select the 24 NM range and set SEA (STC) to maximum for the adjustment. Turn R203 counterclockwise
until DS1 green lights up. Turn R203 clockwise until DS1 green flashes. Then slowly turn R203 in the
same direction until DS1 green is off.
Open the dialogue box Check RSC Adjust (Maintenance >
Service > Radar Indicator > Check RSC Adjust; see Section
Click check box to
5.5 on page 111 for information about the System Mainte- replace the TVA
nance Manager). signal at the RSC
input by an unproc-
essed video signal.
1. Click on the button to feed the RSC with an unprocessed
video signal (already switched on if the Check RSC
Adjust window is opened).
2. Set TX /RX to Master
3. Set SEA (STC) and Rain to 0%
4. Select the 24 NM range.
5. Set GAIN to 100%.
6. Check the result in the PPI. The PPI must be filled
(yellow) almost completely (see Figure 4-12).
Instructions for the
7. Set GAIN to 0%. check.
8. Check the result in the PPI. No radar video is displayed
in the PPI except very strong targets (see Figure 4-12).
ztr1_169.gif
Check RSC Adjust
ztr1_170.gif ztr1_171.gif
GAIN = 100% GAIN = 0%
Fig. 4-12 Check RSC Adjust (Gain 100% and GAIN 0%)
62 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.4.2 Hardware Description
The RSC unit consists of the following components:

- TVA1 and TVA2 Input with video selector (Interswitch)
- Remote video and ARPA video outputs
- Video A/D converting with 10-bit (8-bit NOB) quantization
- Input-FIFO
- Two DSPs for video processing and transformation of coordinates.
- 1 MB sweep memory and 1 MB X/Y-memory in SRAM version
- PCI / DMA interface (master) to the graphics processor.
- PCI interface (slave) to main processor.
The RSC unit transfers the processed radar video via the PCI bus with at least 15 Hz to the graphics and
video processor (GVP).
The DSP software includes the functions Range Scale, North Up Stabilization and True Motion Stabilisa-
tion.
The video processing includes gain adjustment, Rain (FTC), Auto Rain, Interference Rejection, Direct
Video, Video STC, Video Enhancement (if Clean Sweep is switched on) and turn by turn correlation.
4.5.4.3 Software Description
The software of the RSC runs on a dual DSP system and has the following functions:
- Reception of the radar video as sweep data from the video digitizing stage.
- Turn-by-turn correlation
- Auto and manual RAIN function
- Detection of the noise threshold and the noise reduction
- Gain function
- Transformation of data from polar coordinates to X/Y data including:
- sweep-filling
- target-enhancing and
- generating of the offset in TM mode
- Transfer of the X/Y data via PCI bus to the graphics video processor (GVP)
From Rev. 04 on, the software of the RSC is updated automatically during the software update of the
radar. See Section 8.5 on page 215 for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 63
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.5 ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T) GE3044G202
For the installation of a retrofit kit see Section 5.14.

1 Jumper on 1/2 = 50 Ω input TVA TVA Gain, see Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66.
No jumper on 1/2 = 75 Ω input, default
2
R102 Function
TVA signal test point. Trigger=+2 V,
Video=-2 V, AZIMUTHSTART=-4 V, Video Adjust according to the description in Section
3 AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, adjustable with R101, Offset 4.5.5.1 on page 66.
see Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66 and Figure
4-11 on page 61.
4 Test-TVA signal, internal test generator
LEDs
Function
DS4 green Flashing = DSP Interrupt
Video Offset Adjustment, see Section
DS4 red 4.5.5.1.
DS1 DS3
TP11 R101 J2 DS2 DS4 TP61 R102 TP71 DS5
1
1 1
1
1
1 1 ON
TP22 TP21 TP42 TP41 TP62 TP131 S1

ztr1_063.jpg
Fig. 4-13 ARPA pcb
64 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05

J2 Function
Input for TVA signal from RSC
TP21 Function
1
No jumper on 2/3 = 8.5 µs azimuth signal
3
TP22 Function
1 Analog GND
TP62 Function
1 GND
TP71 Function
Video signal test point. Adjust amplitude between +2 V (lower
peaks of the noise) and +3 V with R102 (video offset, A/D
U
max.
+3 V
converter). See Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66 for an easier way
to adjust the video offset.
1
+2 V
min.
2 DC offset test point, about 0.7t V

3 Analog GND
TP131 Function
1 GND
DIP Switch
S1 1) Function
On Off
1 Default Not permissible, set to On
2 Default Not permissible, set to On
3 Not permissible, set to Off Default
4 Not permissible, set to Off Default
1) on=close=0; off=open=1
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 65
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
LEDs
Function
DS1 green On = no azimuth start
DS1 red Off = no trigger
DS2 green Flashing = north up
DS2 red TVA signal level indication, see Section 4.5.5.1.
DS3 green Flashing = video DMA (state changes for every 64 sweeps received)
DS3 red On = video DMA error
DS4 green Flashing = DSP interrupt
DS4 red Video offset adjustment, see Section 4.5.5.1.
DS5 green No function
DS5 red Flashing = DSP O.K.
4.5.5.1 ARPA Adjustments
Preparations
1. Turn the potentiometer R101 clockwise as far as it will go.
2. Open the dialogue box ARPA Adjust (Maintenance > Service > Radar Indicator > ARPA Adjust, see
Section 5.5 on page 111 for information about the System Maintenance Manager).
Video Offset Adjustment

1. Start the video offset adjust by clicking the start
button. Start button for the
2. Set TX/RX to Master. video offset adjust-
3. Set SEA (STC) to 100%. ment.
4. Select the 0.25 NM range.
5. Turn R102 clockwise until the display field shows the Display field for the
test result of the video
message: "Error: Offset too low" or DS4 red lights up. offset adjustment.
6. Turn R102 slowly counterclockwise until the display
field shows "OK" or DS4 red is off again. Leave R102
in this position.
7. Set SEA (STC) to 10% and check the result in the
display field. The result must be "OK" and DS4 red
must be off.
(For an alternative adjustment of the video offset by
means of an oscilloscope see the description of TP71.) Instructions for the
adjustment.
The display field can show the following messages:
- Error: Offset too high
ztr1_167.gif
- Error: Offset too low (DS4 red on)

- OK (DS4 red off)
- Invalid (switch TX/RX on and set it to Master) ARPA adjust, video offset
66 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
TVA Gain Adjustment

1. Start the video gain check by clicking the start button.
2. Set TX/RX to Master.
3. Select the 0.25 NM range.
4. Set SEA (STC) to 10%.
5. The display field must contain the message "OK". If
the LED DS2 red is on, or if the message is "Check
Start button for the
TVA Video", measure the TVA signal at TP11/3. If the video gain check.
amplitudes are too high (see the values in the
description of TP11/3 and the signal description in Display field for the
Section 4.5.4.1 on page 61) they must be adjusted by test result of the video
means of R101. If the message "Check TVA Video" gain check.
stays in the display field, it is permissible to reduce
the amplitude of the azimuth start signal to -3.8 V.
The display field can show the following messages: Instructions for the
adjustment.
- OK
- Check TVA Video
- Invalid (switch TX/RX on and set it to Master)
ztr1_168.gif
ARPA adjust, video gain
4.5.5.2 Functional Description of the ARPA Pcb
In spite of its name, the ARPA pcb is not responsible for the complete ARPA functionality. The ARPA
processing (acquisition, tracking, zone control, display of tracked targets) is done by the main processor
on the motherboard (PMB).
The ARPA pcb prepares the combined video signal of the RSC unit and transfers it via the PCI bus to
the main processor.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 67
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G203, GE3044G213

ztr1_014.jpg
Fig. 4-14 GVP pcb GE3044G203
The graphics and video processor is a standard video adapter card with the following specifications:
- AGP bus interface
- 8 MB video RAM
- Video output with VGA connector, synchronisation coupled to green signal or separate signals
- QNX-qualified
The main processor’s software controls the overlay of the MMI graphics, the line graphics of the PPI area,
the ARPA/plot graphics and the radar video (generated by the RSC unit), by the use of "intelligent“ copy
commands to the graphics processor of the GVP unit.
The function Centered Display and the calculation of the afterglow lines of the trails and targets are
performed by software from the main processor and the GVP.
NOTE:
GE3044G213 is marked by means of a label. GE3044G203 is not marked.
For the use of GE3044G213 the software version must be 2.4 or newer.
68 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.7 Interface and Memory Board (IMB) GE3044G205
DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi- Switch No. DIP Function

cator Number Switch
On=closed=0; off=open=1 4 3 2 1 S1/5...8 ON OFF
Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On Software Version ≥2.0
(Settings for Software Version 1.3: see page 71)
Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off
Boot from diskette drive
Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On Boot from IMB flash (the software update
5 memory (default) routine is started while
Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off booting).
Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On Monitor resolution Monitor resolution
6
All other settings are not admissible 1024x768 1280x1024
ON S1 Monitor frequency
7 72 Hz Monitor frequency 60 Hz
1 8 Normal operation
8 (default) Service Mode On 1)
1)
See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e I M B on page 71.
Settings for the different Monitor Types

(valid for Software Version ≥2.0)
Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7
AZ3040G0xx Off Off AZ3058G0xx" 1) Off On AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off
AZ3054G0xx On Off AZ3063G041/50 Off Off AZ3065G040 Off Off
AZ3053G0xx" 1) Off On AZ3056G04x Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off
AZ3069G040 Off Off
1) Recommended settings. These Monitors are "multisync" types and can be operated with all other settings, too.
CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2 TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1
Jumper on 1/2 = CAN Bus terminated
TP162 1/2 No jumper on 1/2 = CAN Bus not terminated
TP11 TP71 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 S1 TP151 TP161 TP162 TP63
ON
1 1
1 1 8
TP152
1
1
ztr1_091.jpg
Fig. 4-15 IMB pcb
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 69
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
WARNING
For the use of the different revisions of the IMB, some
Connectors/Jumpers/Test Pins
TP63, TP71, TP161, TP162 are for manufacturer´s use only. It is not permissible to connect cables or
jumpers to one of these contacts.
TP11 Function
1 Connection of the motherboard’s speaker output (cable is included in the delivery)
2-4 n.c.
TP151 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = alarm acknowledge input (Interconnection Board TB2 13/14) suitable for 20 mA
current loop (optocoupler driver input)
2 Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
3
4
TP152 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB2 15/16) suitable for 20 mA current loop
(optocoupler driver input)
2 Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
This input can be used to turn the headmarker by 180° caused by an external contact. This func-
3 tion must be configured in the System Maintenance Manager (Configure). If the external contact
is closed, the headmarker is turned. This function must not be used in NACOS systems.
4
LEDs
g = green, r = red
From left to right
Status
DS1r DS1g DS2r DS2g DS3r DS3g DS4r DS4g
UART 0 ON = interrupt in process, X
OFF = interrupt finished
UART 1 ON = interrupt in process,
OFF = interrupt finished X
UART 2 ON = interrupt in process,

UART 3 ON = interrupt in process, X

OFF = interrupt finished
CAN0 ON = interrupt in process,
CAN1 ON = interrupt in process,

Not used X
Toggle on every interrupt entry X
70 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
DIP Switch Settings for Software Version 1.3

DIP Function
Switch
S1/5...8 ON OFF
Settings for Software Version 1.3. Invalid for Software Version 2.0!
Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is
5 Boot from IMB flash memory (default) started while booting)
Boot from diskette drive (the software update routine is
6 Boot from IMB flash memory (default) started while booting)
7 No diskette drive installed Diskette drive is installed
8 Normal operation (default) Service Mode On (see Section 4.5.7.2)
Functional Description of the IMB PCB:

The IMB contains inputs for the connected sensors and outputs for alarms.
4 serial interfaces RS422 for the standard sensors, 2 CAN Bus interfaces (Radar Bus and Nav Bus), 4
alarm outputs (incl. 1 dead man alarm) and 2 alarm inputs are available.
It is advisable to use the serial interfaces as shown in Section 3.2.2, page 38 and in the cabling docu-
ments.
4.5.7.1 Alarm Contacts
The alarm outputs are:

1. Radar alarm
2. Dead man alarm trigger
3. Target Alarm (formerly ARPA Alarm)
4. Chart alarm
The alarm inputs are:
1. Audio Alarm Acknowledge
2. Not used
The outputs are relays contacts. The maximum load is 24 V/0.3 A. The inputs can be switched by means
of TP151 and TP152 to zero potential inputs (switch, relays) or suitable for 20 mA current loop (optocou-
pler driver input).
For further information to the alarms see the operating instructions.
4.5.7.2 Service Switch of the IMB
The service switch of the IMB (S1/8) activates also the service functions of the TCU, so that it is not
necessary to set the service switch S1/8 of the TCU additionally (see the technical manual of the Gear-
boxes/Transceivers). If the service switch of the TCU is switched on, the service mode functions of the
IMB are not available, so that it is advisable to activate the service mode by means of the service switch
of the IMB.
If the service switch is switched on by means of the DIP switch S1/8, the following functions are available:
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 71
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
- Acquire targets without gyro data (to test ARPA functions).

- Acquire targets without Radar Bus data.
- Display the radar video even although the Radar Bus is not working correctly.
- Activation of a check mode during the start. The sequential start of the processes is displayed. When
an error crops up, the booting routine is stopped immediately and the faulty process can be recog-
nized.
- Activation of the TCU service mode with the following functions:
- If the Scanner stops turning, the Transceiver is not switched off.
- If the magnetron current exceeds or falls short of its limits, the Transceiver is not switched off.
- If a communication time-out occurs in the communication with the master Indicator, the Trans-
ceiver is not switched off.
The maintenance menus can be entered and used without the use of the service switch. The switch offers
the additional functionalities described above, especially for the setting-to-work phase.
NOTES:
- As soon as setting-to-work, maintenance or service works have been finished, the service mode
must be switched off!
- The service mode must not be active during normal operation!
- If the service switch is activated during normal operation, a frozen radar video might be displayed at
the Indicator if the Transceiver is switched off!
- If the service mode is activated, the Transceiver is not switched off automatically, when the Scanner
stops turning!
72 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.8 Power Supply
The power supply for the Display Electronics Unit is

a standard PC power supply corresponding to the
ATX specification. It supplies the following volt-
ages:
- +3.3 V
- +5 V
- +12 V
- -12 V
- -5 V
- +5 V stand-by
ztr1_022.jpg
Power Supply
There are two different versions of the Power Supply Unit:

WARNING
For the use of the different power supply units, some
NOTE
The power supply is equipped with a protective gear against tottering
contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, the
power supply does not start and it must be switched off and waited for
5...10 s until it can be switched on again.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 73
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.9 Ethernet Module (Upgrade Kit GE3044G011, optional)

The Ethernet network adapter is needed for
the integration of the radar into a NACOS
system. It is not needed for a single, dual or T
multiple radar installation.
The network adapter is plugged into the
motherboard slot. The wiring must be done
following Figure 4-16 with 50 Ω coaxial cable
(for example inside the enclosures, RG 58,
for ship’s cabling RG 213 / U, see cabling
diagrams). The network is a 10 Mbit network
with Thin Ethernet wiring.
The BNC-T plugs must be connected directly
into the Ethernet module. It is not admissible
to connect the T-plug and the network
adapter by means of a coaxial cable.
The proper termination with a 50 Ω BNC-
termination plug at both ends of the Ethernet
line is very important.
It is not permissible to use cable with a char-
acteristic impedance different from 50 Ω.
No settings or adjustments have to be made
on the Ethernet module.
ztr1_071.eps
Fig. 4-16 Principle of wiring for LAN Network
NOTE:
If the Ethernet network adapter is not used, it must be removed from the Electronics Unit.
It must be replaced by a slot cover with the order No. 5582688.
74 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Figure 4-17 shows the various Display Electronics Units or

possibilities of wiring for the LAN CHARTPILOT Electronics Units Interconnection Units
Ethernet. It is not admissible to
connect RG213/U coaxial cable RG58 RG213
directly to the Ethernet module. T
The cabling has to be converted into
RG58C/U by means of the adapter
bracket in the interconnection unit
and the RG58C/U coaxial cable
which must be used between the
adapter bracket and the T-plug on
RG58 RG213
the LAN network adapter pcb. Direct
wiring with RG58C/U cable is
possible if the cables are routed
inside the console housings.
RG58 RG213
RG58 RG213
ztr1_161.eps
Fig. 4-17 LAN Ethernet wiring of a quadruple system
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 75
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10 Interconnection Box VS3034O000
The Interconnection Box provides the termi-

nals for the connection of the ship’s cables
and for the internal wiring to components of
the Display Electronics Unit.
The Interconnection Box contains also
components for power supply and the
system’s power switch. Two different Inter-
connection Boards can be mounted inside
the box, GE3044G206 with four RS422
interfaces or GE3044G216 with four inter-
faces which can be adapted to 20 mA
zt1r_016.jpg
current loop (TTY), TTL, RS422, RS232 or

RS485 by means of plug-in pcbs.
If the Interconnection Box is mounted below Interconnection Box with RGB Buffer and Analog Interface
the Display Electronics Unit. This complete
unit is named GE3044O000. The optional RGB buffer and Analog Interface can be mounted in the Inter-
connection Box. Suitable bolts are provided.
NOTE:
The RGB buffer GE3044G208 with two video outputs can be mounted inside the former version of the
Interconnection Box only. For the RGB buffer GE3044G222 the current version of the Interconnection
Box (VS3034G030) must be used.
The main signals which are connected via the Interconnection Box are:
- TVA video (TVA1 in and TVA2 in)
- TVA1 out (remote video)
- Serial interfaces (ship’s sensors, AIS)
- 2 CAN Buses
- Alarm signals (input and acknowledge)
- Mains supply
- Power on/off switch signals
76 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box
RGB buffer
J2 J3 J4 connectors, see
RGB IN RGB OUT RGB OUT Section 4.5.14
zt1r_081.jpg
J4, TVA to RSC J3, monitor OSD data J2, monitor OSD data J1, sensor
to display el. unit to monitor signals to IMB
Fig. 4-18 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box (with RGB buffer GE3044G208)
RGB buffer
J2 J3 J4 J5 connectors, see
RGB IN RGB OUT RGB OUT RGB OUT Section 4.5.15
zt1r_082.jpg
J4, TVA to RSC J3, monitor OSD data J2, monitor OSD data J1, sensor
to display el. unit to monitor signals to RSC
Fig. 4-19 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box (with RGB buffer GE3044G222)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 77
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G206
TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function break = normally closed (n.c.)
Double End Ferry: The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN make = normally opened (n.o.)
15, 16 closed = AFT the IMB. See the IMB description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP
15, 16 opened = FWD technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN
Audio Alarm Ack.: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP TB7 Function TB12 Function
14 Alarm Ack. M 11 CAN0_A (IN)
13 Alarm Ack. P TB14 Function 10 CAN0_B (IN) 1 L1 out, spare 1 L1 = TB11
Chart Alarm: 6 GND, n.c. 9 CAN1_A (IN) 2 N out, spare 2 N = TB11
12 AL_out4 make 5 +5 VDC, n.c. 8 CAN1_B (IN) 3 PE out, spare 3 PE = TB11
11 AL_out4 center 4 GND, n.c. 7 CAN0_A (OUT)
10 AL_out4 break 3 +5 VDC, n.c. 6 CAN0_B (OUT)
TB6 Function TB5 Function
2 GND, n.c. 1 L1 to interf. expander 1 L1 spare
Target Alarm: 5 CAN_GND 2 N to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 +5 VDC, n.c. 4 CAN1_A (OUT) 2 N spare
3 PE to interf. expander 3 PE spare
9 AL_out3 make J7 Function 3 CAN1_B (OUT)
8 AL_out3 center 2 24V ON/OFF ONN
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 1 24V ON/OFF ONP
Dead Man Alarm Trig: 2 N IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus
6 AL_out2 make 3 PE are identical.
5 AL_out2 center
TB4 Function
1 L1 in
4 AL_out2 break 2 N in
Radar Alarm: F1
3 AL_out1 make J5 1 1 1 1 3 PE in
2 AL_out1 center J7
F2 TB9 Function
1 AL_out1 break TB14 1 L1 out spare
1 1
J5 CAUTION 1 2 N out spare
If the Analog Interface F3 3 PE out spare
is not connected, the
following jumpers must 1 TB10 Function
be set to enable TB3 for Mains filter, not assembled 1 L1 out, to monitor
the CAN Bus: 2 N out, to monitor
- J5 1/2
on current versions 1 3 PE out, to monitor
- J5 3/4
K1 1
- J5 5/6 TB11 Function
- J5 7/8 F4 1
1 L1 out, displ. El.
2 N out, displ. El.
TB1 Function Drillings for the
3 PE out, displ. El.
Ship’s sensors LAN-BNC adapter T1 TB13 Function
20 GND4 115 V 1 L1 in, switched
19 TXD4- 1 1 1 230 V by monitor
18 TXD4+ TB1 TB2 TB3 2 N in, monitor
17 RXD4- S1 3 PE in, monitor
16 RXD4+
15 GND3 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 LED Function
14 TXD3- Is lit when mains is switched
13 TXD3+ on at the monitor of this
12 RXD3- radar.
11 RXD3+ J6 F5
10 GND2 Fuses
9 TXD2- F1 System’s Mains
8 TXD2+ Drillings for the
bolts of the RGB Fuse
7 RXD2- F2 System’s
6 RXD2+ Buffer
Mains fuse
5 GND1 F3 Mains fuse monitor
4 TXD1- F4 Mains T1
3 TXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF Signal
2 RXD1- See also page 218.
1 RXD1+ J4 J3 J2 J1
TB17 Function
ztr1_059.jpg
1/2 TVA1 out
3/4 Screen
TB16 Function J4 Function J3 J1 Function
1/2 TVA2 in Function 22 AL_out2 center 44 VGND1
to El. Unit (RSC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (IMB)
1 TVA1 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
3/4 Screen 1 n.c. 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1-
TB15 Function 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 center 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
1/2 TVA1 in 4 COM1_DTR 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1
6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 center Ack. N
3/4 Screen 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2-
8 GND 8 TXD2+ 30 +5 V
8 COM1_CTS
J6 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- 31 TXD4+
See Section 4.5.14. 10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
11 J2 Function 11 RXD3+ 33 GND4
12 Serial interface to monitor 12 RXD3- 34 GND
13 1 LKAP (Beeper) 13 TXD3+ 35 LKAP (Beeper +)
14 2 RXD 14 TXD3- 36 LKAM (Beeper -)
15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
7 RTS 19 AL_out1 center 41 CAN_GND
8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
9 LKAM (Beeper) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
Fig. 4-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G206
78 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10.3 Interconnection Board GE3044G216
TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function SB = Solder Bridge break = normally closed (n.c.)
19 = TB3/5 The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN These solder bridges must be opened, make = normally opened (n.o.)
18 = TB3/5 the IMB. See the IMB description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
17 = TB3/5 technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
Double End Ferry: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
15, 16 closed = AFT TB18 Function 11 CAN0_A (IN) power supply cable GE3050G020 must
15, 16 opened = FWD For Remote Keyboard Electronics 10 CAN0_B (IN) be used (J9). See also TP11. TB5 Function
Audio Alarm Ack.: 6 CAN_KBC GND 9 CAN1_A (IN) 1 L1 spare
14 Alarm Ack. M 5 CAN_KBC GND 8 CAN1_B (IN) TB18, J100, J8, TP10 2 N spare
13 Alarm Ack. P 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 7 CAN0_A (OUT) These connectors and testpins are 3 PE spare
Chart Alarm: 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 6 CAN0_B (OUT) needed for the connection of a Remote
12 AL_out4 make 2 CAN_KBC B in <- 5 CAN_GND Keyboard Electronics. See the corre- TB6 Function
11 AL_out4 center 1 CAN_KBC A in <- 4 CAN1_A (OUT) sponding technical manual for further 1 L1 to interf. expander
10 AL_out4 break 3 CAN1_B (OUT) information. 2 N to interf. expander
Target Alarm: 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 3 PE to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 24V ON/OFF ONP Position of the RKE pcb,
9 AL_out3 make IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus mounting by means of 4 bolts. TB4 Function
8 AL_out3 center are identical. Ship’s mains
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 in
Dead Man Alarm Trig: J5 2 N in
TP10 1 3 PE in
6 AL_out2 make 1
5 AL_out2 center 1 J7 Function
4 AL_out2 break 1
1 Mains to Analog Interface
Radar Alarm: SB J8 SB SB 1 L1
3 AL_out1 make F2 1
2 AL_out1 center 1 2 N
1 AL_out1 break 1 3 PE
F1 TB10 Function
J5 CAUTION Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 1
If the Analog Interface 1 L1 out, to monitor
is not connected, the pcb 4 pcb 3 pcb 2 F3 2 N out, to monitor
following jumpers must DS1 1 3 PE out, to monitor
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN Bus: TB11 Function
- J5 1/2 J91 Plug-in pcb 1 DS2 1 L1 out, displ. el.
- J5 3/4 1 2 N out, displ. el.
K1
SB
- J5 5/6 3 PE out, displ. el.

- J5 7/8 F5 TB13 Function
TB1 Function 1 1 1 F4 1 L1 in, switched
Ship’s sensors RS422 TB1 TB2 TB3 Drillings for the by monitor
20 GND4 LAN-BNC adapter T1 230 V 2 N in, monitor
19 TXD4- 3 PE in, monitor
18 TXD4+ 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 J9 115 V
17 RXD4- TP11 1 J100 S1
16 RXD4+ 1 LED Function
1 DS1 is lit when mains is
15 GND3
14 TXD3- switched on at the monitor of
Drillings for the RGB Buffer this radar.
13 TXD3+
12 RXD3- DS2 is lit when the DC
11 RXD3+ voltage is available from the
10 GND2 transformer/rectifier.
9 TXD2- J6
8 TXD2+
Drillings for the Video Fuses
Selector SH3023G205 F1 System’s Mains
7 RXD2-
6 RXD2+ Fuse
5 GND1 F2 System’s
4 TXD1- J4 J3 J2 J1 Mains fuse
F3 Mains fuse monitor
ztr1_613.jpg
3 TXD1+
2 RXD1- F4 Mains T1
1 RXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF signal
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232, See also page 218.
RS485 see Section
4.5.10.4 on page 80.
J4 Function J3 Function J1 Function
TB17 Function to El. Unit (RSC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (IMB) 22 AL_out2 center 44 VGND1
1/2 TVA1 out 1 TVA1 1 n.c. 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1- 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
3/4 Screen 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 center 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 COM1_DTR 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
TB16 Function 5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
1/2 TVA2 in 6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 center Ack. N
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2- 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
3/4 Screen 30 +5 V
8 GND 8 COM1_CTS 8 TXD2+
31 TXD4+ TP11
TB15 Function 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- Jumper on 1/2 = default
10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
1/2 TVA1 in J2 Function 33 GND4 Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
11 11 RXD3+ if the power supply cable
3/4 Screen 35 LKAP (Beeper +) GE3050G020 is connected
13 1 LKAP (Beeper +) 13 TXD3+ (plug-in pcbs)
J9, J91 Function 15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
Supply input for plug-in 4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
pcbs 5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
1 Vcc J6 6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
2 GND Connector for the 7 RTS 19 AL_out1 center 41 CAN_GND
3 Vcc RGB Buffer, See 8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
4 PE Section 4.5.14. 9 LKAM (Beeper -) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 79
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10.4 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216
The ship’s sensors are connected to the terminals TB1 of the connection board GE3044G216. The plug-
in pcbs can be used together with the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 to convert the four serial inter-
faces to TTL, 20 mA current loop (TTY) and RS232 for the connection of ship’s sensors with interfaces
different from RS422. Usually it is not necessary to use the RS422 plug-in pcb. See page 48 for further
information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
The plug-in pcbs must be fixed by means of a bolt and a nut.
4.5.10.4.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1
TTY (20 mA current

Plug- RS422 TTL loop) RS232
in pcb
No. TB1 no plug-in pcb or GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214
GE3044G218
20 GND4 GND GND GND
19 TxD4 - GND TxD4 - GND
4 18 TxD4 + TxD4 TxD4 + TxD4
17 RxD4 - GND RxD4 - GND
16 RxD4 + RxD4 RxD4 + RxD4
15 GND3 GND GND GND
10 GND2 GND GND GND
5 GND1 GND GND GND
NOTE:
1. If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, the additional connector must be mounted by means of
the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198). See page 81.
2. If a plug-in adapter pcb is used, the five solder bridges on the Interconnection
Board below the plug-in adapter pcb must be opened by means of a sharp
knife.
80 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
3. Usually it is not necessary to use a plug-in adapter pcb for a ship’s sensor with RS422 interface. If
the impedance of the interface is too low, the plug-in pcb can be used to have the termination resis-
tors of the plug-in pcb available, which can be activated by means of TP3.
The pcbs are the same which must be used for the COM Expander. See the following Sections for a
description:
Section 4.5.12.2.1, T T L P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 1 on page 90.
Section 4.5.12.2.2, 2 0 m A C u r r e n t L o o p ( T T Y ) P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 2 on page 91.
Section 4.5.12.2.3, R S 2 3 2 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 4 on page 91.
Section 4.5.12.2.4, R S 4 2 2 / R S 4 8 5 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 8 on page 92.
4.5.10.4.2 Additional Power Supply Cable GE3050G020
If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, an additional power supply cable is necessary. Currently the
Electronics Unit is delivered with only one power supply connector at the rear (see Section 4.5.3.3 on
page 56). In this case, the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198, included in the standard
scope of delivery for new systems, if required) must be used:
The connector with cable (GE3044G052) must be mounted in the Display Electronics Unit. The cable
must be connected to an unused plug of the Power Supply Unit. If no suitable plug is available, the
adapter (976296-33) must be used. The cable GE3050G020 must be connected between the new
installed connector at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit and J9 of the Interconnection Board.
Furthermore, the jumper TP11 must be set to 2/3.
If a Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 is installed in the Interconnection Box (for a Remote Keyboard
Electronics), it is not necessary to install the Modification Kit. See the Technical Manual of the Remote
Keyboard Electronics for further information.
TP11
ztr1_640.jpg
ztr1_641.jpg
Fig. 4-22 Power supply cable GE3050G020
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 81
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11 Analog Interface GE3044G207
TB Function TB Function TP78 Termination

10 AIS RxD - (Input -) 40 Alarm out 1, make Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
11 AIS RxD + (Input +) 41 Alarm out 1, center No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
12 do not connect! 42 Alarm out 1, break
13 do not connect! 43 Alarm out 2, make TP99 Addresses
14 AIS TxD - (Output -) 44 Alarm out 2, center Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)
15 AIS TxD + (Output +) 45 Alarm out 2, break Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also an Inter-
16 AIS GND face Expander is installed or for a second Analog Interface)
(≥Rev 03 only) TB Function
30 ST1 status input for gyro
J1 RS422 Interface 32 ST2 status input for log
Connector for SH3014G203, 33 ST2 status input for log
RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)
TP5 TP1 TP74 TP75 TP90 TP70
TB52, PE
1 1 TB51, N F1
TB10 TB40 TB1 1 TB50, L1
TB11 TB41 TB2
TB12 1 1
TB42 TB3
TB13 TB43 TB4
TB14 TB44 TB5
TB15 TB45 TB6
1 1
TB16 TB7
TB30 TB8 1
TB31
TB25 TB32
TB24 TB33
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20 1
ztr1_080.jpg
1 7
TB Function TB Function J7 TP2

25 Common (stepper) 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts) DS34 DS35 DS7
24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common 2 Log BT (Bottom Track)
(synchro) 3 Log WT (Water Track) DS36 DS33 DS37
23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro) 4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
22 Gyro T 5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
21 Gyro S 6 Log VX (speed)
20 Gyro R 7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift)) break = normally closed (n.c.)
8 Log GND make = normally opened (n.o.)
Fig. 4-23 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03
82 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05

TP1 Function
1 1 = VCC, 2 = LM, 3 = SPA_LOG
Set jumper on 1/2 to supply log outputs (zero potential) with voltage.
2 Set jumper on 2/3 to supply log outputs with external voltage.
3
TP2 Function
1 VCC, jumper must be set (default ex works)
2
TP5 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = ST1 (status input 1) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = ST1 signal as zero potential contact
2
3
4
5 Jumper on 6/7 = ST2 (status input 2) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA
Jumper on 5/6 and 7/8 = ST2 signal as zero potential contact
6
7
8
TP70 Function
1 n.c.
2 n.c.
3 n.c.
4 GND for serial interface, for manufacturer’s use
5 TXD, manufacturer’s use
6 RXD, manufacturer’s use
7 Activate bootstrap loader, active low, for manufacturer’s use
8 GND for bootstrap loader, manufacturer’s use
TP90 Function
1 RESET IN
2 GND
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 83
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
J7 Function
1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
5 5/6 connected
6
7 7/8 connected
8
LEDs
Function
DS7 green C167 controller initialization finished
Flashing at 0.25 Hz = normal operation (only second Analog Interface)
DS7 red Flashing at 1 Hz = normal operation (active Analog Interface, if two Analog Interfaces installed)
Flashing at 5 Hz = at least one error is active (highest priority)
DS33 green Gyro signal: DS34 = R, DS35 = S, DS33 = T, the LEDs show the direction and the polarity of the
incoming signal. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave. 1-2 LEDs must be on. If no LEDs
DS33 red or all of them are on, the incoming signal is not correct. See Section 5.10.8 for the configuration
of the analog gyro system and Figure 4-24 on page 85 for the connection of a gyro and a log.
DS34 green
DS34 red
DS35 green
DS35 red
DS36 green Reference voltage for DC stepper with half wave. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS36 red
DS37 green Reference voltage for AC gyro. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS37 red
Fuse
Fuse
F1 For the fuses see page 218.
84 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
LOG ANALOG INTERFACE ANALOG INTERFACE

1-Axis Log connection 2-Axis Log connection
TB TB
8 GND (common) 8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed) 6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (water track)
2 BT (bottom track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
1.) DC Stepper System ANALOG INTERFACE 2.) DC Stepper System ANALOG INTERFACE
( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35
+ TB are flashing green - TB are flashing red
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
25 common 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”
( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red TB are flashing green
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
+ 25 common - 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”
In DC Stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semi- AC System 50 Hz ANALOG INTERFACE
conductors. See the following example: AC System 60 Hz TB
23 REF 1
DC Stepper System ANALOG INTERFACE 20 R
( common - high ) 21 S
TB 22 T
20 R 24 REF 2 (reference
21 S common)
22 T
25 common
+(-) Gyro (Synchro)
ztr1_124.eps
Gyro
Fig. 4-24 Connection of log and gyro
The interfaces have to be configured by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section
5.10.8 on page 140 for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 85
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Functional Description
The IMB is equipped with 4 serial interfaces for the connection of the ship’s navigation sensors. If no
sensors (gyro/log) with serial outputs are available, an interface extension as an analog interface or an
Interface Expander must be used. Two extension units (Analog Interface or Interface Expander) can be
connected for redundancy purposes. For the correct installation, see the description of the jumper
settings.
The AIS interface (TB10...16, J1) is available from Rev. 03 on.
The interfaces for an analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and a pulse log are described in Section 9.3,
E x t e r n a l I n t e r f a c e s on page 234.
If two Analog Interfaces are used in one system, they must be addressed by means of TP99.
4.5.11.1 Analog Gyro
By the detection of the inputs R,S and T, every change in the gyro state can be recognized. The detected
bit combination is coded in Gray Code. The direction of the turn can be calculated by means of a compar-
ison with the value measured before. The measured difference of bearing is added or subtracted to/from
a defined start value. The typical resolution (changeable by parameterization) is 1/6°.
The actual gyro value is written to the CAN Bus (Nav Bus) as a 16 bit item of datum. If the values does
not change, it is transmitted to the CAN Bus every 300 ms. New values are transmitted at least every
20 ms.
Gyro-sensors, whose R,S,T detection is synchronized by a reference signal have a reference timeout
control.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
4.5.11.2 Pulse Log
The ship’s speed can be processed from the pulse log signal. The Analog Interface measures the time
between two rising edges of the signal. By means of the formula v = s/t (t = measured time, s = distance
per pulse (parameter)) the speed can be calculated.
Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
Input Function
XPM X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
can be configured in the maintenance menus.
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
YPM can be configured in the maintenance menus.
Bottom track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
BT configured in the maintenance menus.
WT Water track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
configured in the maintenance menus.
External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
ST2 input by jumper settings.
86 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface
This assembly is used for signal matching (hardware) to input-signals complying with the RS422
standard. An integrated circuit is used which converts the input signal to TTL level. It can be inserted in
Analog Interfaces ≥Rev. 03.
This assembly processes signals in accordance with the RS422 standard for the connection of the
Primary Display Port of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 Electronics Unit.
S1 Output Signal
Position 1 With Handshake
Position 2 Without Handshake
In the normal case, set position 2 - without handshake. The inputs are terminated by R1, R2 with 270 Ω.
1 Pin 1, 2:
not connected
4 Pin 3, 4:
Default is no jumper on 3/4. Set a jumper on 3/
1 4, to connect the ground of the signal source
Standard = 2 and the ground of the Display Electronics Unit.
See Figure 4-26.
z_tr1_151.jpg
S1
Fig. 4-25 SH3014T203
A
TTL TTL
RS - 422
B GND
43
Output Input
+5V +5V
A A
Logic "1" Logic "0" 400 mV

2 V min
B B
0 0
z_si_013.eps
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop

Mark
Fig. 4-26 RS422 signals
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 87
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12 COM-Expander GE3044G210
TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22

Manufacturers use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers,
TB1...5 Function do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.
Sensor interface, TB7 Function
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
TP23 Termination
1 RxD + 2 Alarm out 1 center Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
2 RxD - 3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed) No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
3 TxD + 4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)
4 TxD - 5 Alarm out 2 center (not used) TB8 Mains supply
5 GND 6 Alarm out 2 break (not used) 1 PE
for all other plug-in pcbs see Section 4.5.12.1. The relays are switched on if the pcb is working! 2 N
3 L1
TP12 TP13
1 TP11 1 1
2 1 1
1 TB8 2
1 3
Plug-in pcb 4
2 2 TB7 3
4
TB3 3 TB4 3 5
4 4 6 F1
5 5 TP21 1
1 1 1 1
2 2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3 TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
TB2 3 TB5 3
4 4
5 5
1
2 1
TB1 3 2
TB6
4 3
5 4
ztr1_624.jpg
ON 8 S1
1 1 1
DS1 DS2 DS3 8 1
TB6 Function
1 Digital input 1 (+)
2 Digital input 1 (-)
3 Digital input 2 (+) S1 ON
DS4 DS5 DS6 S1 Function
1 OFF = COM Expander 1
TP41 Function ON = COM Expander 2
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current 2 manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
loop (optocoupler driver input) 3...7 no function (default = OFF)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) 8 manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
TP42 Function J7 Function

Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
loop (optocoupler driver input) 2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) 3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
DS1...6 Function 5/6 5 connected to 6
DS1 green: UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used 7/8 7 connected to 8
DS2 green: UART2 working, red: UART2 error, off: interface not used
DS6 red flashing at:
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 4-27 COM Expander pcb
88 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs
The interfaces TB1...TB5 can be converted in the same way as the interfaces of the IMB. The plug-in
adapter pcbs must be inserted and fixed by means of a nut on the COM Expander pcb.
Plug- RS422 TTL TTY (20 mA RS232 RS485

in pcb current loop)
No. TB GE3044G218 GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214 GE3044G218
1 RxD1 + RxD1 RxD1 + RxD1 RS485+ 1
2 RxD1 - GND RxD1 - GND RS485- 1
5 GND1 GND GND GND GND1
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 89
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion
4.5.12.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211
TTL TTL TTL

TP1
1
Output Input
5,0 V 5,0 V
Logic "1"
2,4 V 2,0 V
1
0,4 V 0,8 V
ztr1_614.jpg
Logic "0"
0 V 0 V
ztr1_615.eps
TP2
Mark
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Fig. 4-28 TTL plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
90 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212
+
TP1
1
20 mA
1 20 mA Logic "1"
ztr1_616.jpg
0 mA Logic "0"
ztr1_617.eps
TP2 Mark
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Fig. 4-29 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
4.5.12.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214
TTL RS - 232 TTL

TP1
1 Output Input
+ 15 V + 15 V
Logic "0"
Space
+5V
+3V
1 -3V
-5V
ztr1_618.jpg
1 Logic "1"
Mark
- 15 V - 15 V
ztr1_619.eps
TP2 TP3
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Mark
Fig. 4-30 RS232 plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = RxD inverted
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = default (RxD not inverted)
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = TxD inverted
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = default (TxD not inverted)
TP3 Manufacturers use
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 91
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218
The conversion of RS485 is available at the COM Expander but not at the Interconnection Board.
TP2 TP1 TP4
1 1
ztr1_620.jpg
TP3 A
TTL TTL
RS - 422
A
TTL TTL B
RS - 485
B
Output Input
Output Input +5V +5V
+5V +5V
A A
A A

2 V min
2 V min
B B
B B
0 0
ztr1_621.eps
ztr1_622.eps
0 0
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop

Mark Mark
Fig. 4-31 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input RS422:
inversion Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output RS422:
inversion Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
TP3, Jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = termination resistor, jumper 3, 4, 5, 6 must be set as described below
Termination No jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = no termination resistor
Jumper on 3/4 = termination with 1 kΩ
Jumper on 5/6 = termination with 150 Ω
Jumper on 3/4 and on 5/6 = termination with 120 Ω
See page 48 for further information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
TP4 Jumper on 1/2 = set to 1/2 if the pcb is used for the COM Expander (default setting)
Jumper on 2/3 = set to 2/3 if the pcb is used for the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
92 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.13 Operating Unit BD 3027

zt1r_18.jpg
Fig. 4-32 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing
The complete Operating Unit consists of four parts:

- Trackball BD 3028
- Radar Keyboard
- Trackpilot Keyboard
- Keyboard controller
The three parts can be mounted separately. All Operating Units are equipped with the trackball as
standard. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard can be mounted as add-ons or ordered ex
works.
The keyboard is mounted in the console housings or in the desktop housing or it can be delivered sepa-
rately for shipyard installation purposes.
The keyboards have only one common keyboard controller. Depending on the version, the Operating
Unit’s housing offers space for a 3.5" diskette drive. At present, the diskette drive is mounted in the Elec-
tronics Unit’s housing. The wiring for the diskette drive (data and power supply) is completely inde-
pendent of the Operating Unit’s wiring and runs directly into the Interconnection Box.
4.5.13.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics
It is possible to connect up to four slave Operating Units or to install the Operating Unit in a distance to
the Display Electronics Unit. For these purposes, the remote keyboard electronics is needed. See the
technical manual of the remote keyboard electronics for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 93
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.13.2 Trackball BD 3028
The trackball consists of a ball and three function

keys. The function keys correspond in their purpose to
the function keys of a PC-mouse.
The interface of the trackball unit is a PS/2 interface,
which is common for PCs.
zt1r_19.jpg
Trackball
The trackball is connected to the Display Electronics Unit by means of a cable of length 3 m with a
standard PS/2 connector. The Electronics Unit of the trackball cannot be serviced. The setting of the
jumpers must not be modified.
PS/2 connector pinning:
Pin Function
1 Data
2 -
3 GND
4 +5V
5 Clock
6 -
94 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.13.3 Radar Keyboard
The Radar Keyboard is connected to an elec-

tronics unit (keyboard controller) in the Operating
Unit’s housing. The Trackpilot Keyboard is
connected to the same electronics unit. The
keyboard electronics unit offers a PS/2 interface
for the connection to the Display Electronics Unit.
This interface combines the Radar Keyboard and
the Trackpilot Keyboard.
The keyboard requires a separate DC supply for
the back lighting. The back lighting is adjusted
together with the back lighting of the Trackpilot
Keyboard.
zt1r_20.jpg
Radar Keyboard
4.5.13.4 Trackpilot Keyboard
The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to an elec-

zt1r_021.jpg
tronics unit (keyboard controller) in the Operating

Unit’s housing. The Radar Keyboard is connected
to the same electronics unit. The keyboard elec-
tronics unit offers a PS/2 interface for the connec-
tion to the Display Electronics Unit. This interface
combines the Trackpilot Keyboard and the Radar
Keyboard.
The keyboard requires a separate DC supply for
the back lighting. The back lighting is adjusted
together with the back lighting of the Radar
Keyboard.
Trackpilot Keyboard
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 95
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.13.5 Keyboard Electronics
Connection Cable
Trackpilot Keyboard Socket for Controller Radar Keyboard

zt1r_086.jpg
Electronics Controller 0824/01 Electronics

Trackball
Fig. 4-33 Keyboard electronics with controller 0824/01
Figure 4-33 shows the back of an opened Operating Unit. It

PS/2
is equipped with the trackball and both keyboards. The connector
controller must be connected to the Radar Keyboard. Only if
no Radar Keyboard is installed, it must be connected to the
Trackpilot Keyboard.
The connection cable transfers the signals from one board to
the other.
zt1r_199.jpg
The keyboards are connected to the Display Electronics Unit

by means of a cable of length 3 m with a standard PS/2
connector. The keyboards’ illumination is supplied with power
via a separate cable. Fig. 4-34 Controller GE3048G200
From March 2002 on, the keyboard controller 0824/01 has been replaced by the GE3048G200. The
controller has the same functionality. The controller GE3048G200 must be used for remote or slave
installations. It is equipped with a PS/2 connector for the connection of an ASCII keyboard. The shield
cover has a hole for the connector.
PS/2 connector pinning:
Pin Function
1 Data
2 -
3 GND
4 +5 V
5 Clock
6 -
96 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.14 RGB Buffer GE3044G208 (optional)
For the installation of a J1

retrofit kit see Section 5.14. Supply
The RGB buffer supplies two
monitors with the incoming
signal of the graphics and
video processor (GVP).
The RGB buffer receives the
video signals (RGB) and the TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6
S1 S2
synchronization signals On On
(HSYNC, VSYNC) via the
interface J2. The monitors 1 8 1 8
must be connected to the
15-pin HD-Sub connectors
J3 and J4. The decoupling
and amplification of the DS1 DS2
signals are performed by
two circuits per video
channel with five outputs
each. The RGB buffer
circuits work with a constant
amplification of 2 (+6 dB)
ztr1_010.jpg
and are optimized for moni-

tors with internal termination.
The maximum cable length J2 J3 J4
between the RGB buffer and RGB Input RGB1 output RGB2 output
the monitor inputs is 50 m if Fig. 4-35 RGB buffer
an RGB coaxial cable is
used via an additional adapter. The length of the VGA cable must not exceed 3 m. The cable must be
terminated. Usually, the monitors have an input impedance of 75 Ω, which is suitable for the RGB buffer.
For other cases the DIP switches S1_1 and S2_1 offer a 75 Ω resistor for the termination.
The RGB buffer must be supplied with +/-12 V via the connector J1. The voltage regulators IC1 and IC2
generate an internal supply voltage of +/-5 V.
ztr1_012.eps
Fig. 4-36 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB buffer as an example
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 97
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Switches
S1 for Monitor 1 and S2 for Monitor 2
S1 S2 On 1) Off 2)
S1_1 S2_1 Red output terminated Red output not terminated
S1_2 S2_2 Green output terminated Green output not terminated
S1_3 S2_3 Blue output terminated Blue output not terminated
S1_4 S2_4 Horizontal sync. output terminated Horizontal sync. output not terminated
S1_5 S2_5 Vertical sync. output terminated Vertical sync. output not terminated
S1_6 S2_6 Inactive
S1_7 S2_7 Inactive
S1_8 S2_8 Inactive
1)
Termination = 75 Ω to AGND; select, if no monitor is connected
2) No termination; select, if monitor is connected
Connectors
J1, Power Supply J2, Video Input; J3, Output Monitor 1;
J4, Output Monitor 2
Pin Function
Pin Function Pin Function
1 -12 V
1 RED 9 n.c.
2 -12 V
2 GREEN 10 AGND
3 GND
3 BLUE 11 AGND
4 GND
4 AGND 12 n.c.
5 +12 V
5 AGND 13 Horizontal sync.
6 +12 V
6 AGND 14 Vertical sync.
7 GND
7 AGND 15 n.c.
8 GND
8 AGND
9 n.c.
10 n.c.
Testpins LEDs
Pin Function Signal On Off
TP1 VGND (In) 0V DS1 +5V VCC on +5V VCC off
TP2 VBB (Out) -5 V DS2 -5V VBB on -5V VBB off
TP3 V12M (In) -12 V
TP4 V12P (In) +12 V
TP5 VCC (Out) +5 V
TP6 AGND (Out) 0V
98 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.15 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)
For the installation of a RGB

ON
buffer retrofit kit see Section 1
5.14.2. J1
4 Supply
The RGB buffer supplies up DS2 DS1
to three monitors with the
incoming signal of the
graphics and video proc-
essor (GVP). S1
TP3 TP2 TP1
The RGB buffer receives the
video signals (RGB) and the
synchronization signals
(HSYNC, VSYNC) via the
interface J2. The monitors
S3 S2 S1
must be connected to the
15-pin HD-Sub connectors
J3, J4 and J5. Unused
outputs must be terminated
by means of the DIP-
ztr1_011.jpg
switches (output RGB1

cannot be terminated). The
J2 J3 J4 J5
decoupling and amplification RGB Input RGB1 output RGB2 output RGB3 output
of the signals are performed
by two circuits per video Fig. 4-37 RGB buffer
channel with five outputs
each. The RGB buffer circuits work with a constant amplification of 2 (+6 dB) and are optimized for moni-
tors with internal termination.
The maximum cable length between the RGB buffer and the monitor inputs is 50 m if an RGB coaxial
cable is used via an additional adapter. The length of the VGA cable must not exceed 3 m. The cable
must be terminated. Usually, the monitors have an input impedance of 75 Ω, which is suitable for the
RGB buffer.
The RGB buffer must be supplied with +/-12 V via the connector J1. The two voltage regulators generate
an internal supply voltage of +/-5 V.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 99
t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
75 Ohm Output of 75 Ohm

75 Ohm Cable Input of Buffer, 75 Ohm Buffer, Cable
J2_1 AV=2 J3_1
Red, 75 Ohm
output of Termination-
GVP Resistor of
Monitor1
75 Ohm
Output of 75 Ohm
75 Ohm Buffer, Cable
AV=2 J4_1
75 Ohm
75 Ohm Termination-
Resistor of
Monitor2
S3_1
ztr1_012.eps
Output of 75 Ohm
75 Ohm Buffer, Cable
AV=2 J5_1
75 Ohm
Termination-
75 Ohm
ztr1_009.eps
Resistor of
Monitor3
S1_4
Fig. 4-38 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB buffer as an example
100 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Switches
S1, S2, S3 Termination
On 1) Off 2)
S1_1 Inactive
S1_2 Output 3, J5, blue terminated Output 3, J5, blue not terminated
S1_3 Output 3, J5, green terminated Output 3, J5, green not terminated
S1_4 Output 3, J5, red terminated Output 3, J5, red not terminated
S2_1 Output 2, J4, red terminated Output 2, J4, red not terminated
S2_2 Output 2, J4, green terminated Output 2, J4, green not terminated
S2_3 Output 2, J4, blue terminated Output 2, J4, blue not terminated
S2_4 Inactive
S3_1 Output 2, J4, H-sync terminated Output 2, J4, H-sync not terminated
S3_2 Output 2, J4, V-sync terminated Output 2, J4, V-sync not terminated
S3_3 Output 3, J5, V-sync terminated Output 3, J5, V-sync not terminated
S3_4 Output 3, J5, H-sync terminated Output 3, J5, H-sync not terminated
1)
Termination = 75 Ω to AGND; select, if no monitor is connected
2)
No termination; select, if monitor is connected
Connectors
J1, Power Supply J2, Video Input; J3, Output Monitor 1;
J4, Output Monitor 2, J5 Output Monitor 3
Pin Function
Pin Function Pin Function
1 -12 V
1 RED 9 n.c.
2 -12 V
2 GREEN 10 AGND
3 GND
3 BLUE 11 AGND
4 GND
4 AGND 12 n.c.
5 +12 V
5 AGND 13 Horizontal sync.
6 +12 V
6 AGND 14 Vertical sync.
7 GND
7 AGND 15 n.c.
8 GND
8 AGND
9 n.c.
10 n.c.
Testpins LEDs
Pin Function Signal On Off
TP1 VCC (Out) +5 V DS1 -5V VBB on -5V VBB off
TP2 AGND (Out) 0V DS2 +5V VCC on +5V VCC off
TP3 VBB (Out) -5 V
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 101

t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
102 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e04.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration
Technical Manual 5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration
The BIOS of the system is configured ex works. A description of the settings is shown in Section 5.13.
The system configuration and most of the adjustments and settings can be performed by means of the
System Maintenance Manager. All adjustments which have to be performed by means of hardware
elements are described in Section 4, F u n c t i o n a l D e s c r i p t i o n . For a guide through the setting-to-work
process see Section 6.
WARNING
For the use of the different software versions, some prereq-
uisites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w
for further information.
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
From Rev. 04 of GE3044G020 on, the diskette drive is mounted inside the Display Electronics Unit. The
drive module consists of the diskette drive and two brackets. Depending on the fitting position of the
Display Electronics Unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing or at the bottom
of the housing. The Display Electronics Unit is delivered with the drive module mounted at one side of
the housing. This version is needed in the case of console mounting. The diskette drive can be operated
through an opening in the cover of the housing.
Suitable openings and threaded bolts for the module exist in the side and in the cover of the housing.
The opening which is not used must be closed by means of a dummy plate. Follow these steps to modify
the fitting position of the drive module:
1. Disconnect the Display Electronics Unit from the mains supply. Open the housing and disconnect
the grounding cable.
2. Carefully disconnect the data cable and the power supply cable from the diskette drive.
3. Remove the four screws of the drive unit.
4. Dismount the brackets and mount them as shown in Figure 5-1.
For mounting at the side of the For mounting at the bottom of

housing (the diskette drive is the housing (the diskette drive
operated through an opening in is operated through an opening
the cover) in the side of the housing)
ztr1_602.gif
ztr1_603.gif
Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 103

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration RADARPILOT 1000
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position Technical Manual
5. Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must be
used to close the first opening which has been used so far.
6. A plate with adhesive tape is fixed inside the cover. This plate has to be stuck on behind the
opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.
Dummy plate
Inside of the cover
ztr1_605.gif
Diskette drive in the cover Diskette drive in the side

ztr1_606.gif
ztr1_607.gif
Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive
7. Fix the drive module by means of the four screws.

8. Connect the data cable and the power supply cable to the diskette drive.
9. Connect the grounding cable and close the housing.
104 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.2 CHARTRADAR 1000 Licensing
5.2 CHARTRADAR 1000 Licensing
Beginning with the software version 2.4, every RADARPILOT 1000 can be upgraded to be a
CHARTRADAR 1000 or it is delivered as CHARTRADAR 1000 ex works. If the radar is delivered as
CHARTRADAR ex works, the CHART Function License Key is still stored in the radar and a sticker with
the CHART Function License Key is fixed on the radar housing (fan outlet)
To enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities of a standard radar, the license must be ordered. The
licensing procedure must be performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new license key must
be ordered, when hardware components of the CHARTRADAR have been exchanged.
1. The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.10.7.1 on
page 132).
2. The Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Center of SAM Electronics by
- EMail (shipservice@sam-electronics.de, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),
- fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or
- phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).
The following information must be added:
- Date of Commissioning
- Name of the Service Engineer
- Vessel / Yard / Build No.
- Shipping Company
- Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit
3. The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function License Key. This key must be
entered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
User Chart Objects

Even if the licensing is not performed, it is possible to display the User Chart Objects, which have been
defined on the connected CHARTPILOT 9320/30 or MULTIPILOT 1000. For this purpose, the CHART-
PILOT must be configured as chartserver (see the technical manuals of the CHARTPILOT for further
information).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 105

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration Technical Manual
5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
NOTE:
The radar and the AIS itself must be restarted after any change in the configuration for the AIS. Otherwise
these modifications may have no effect.
NACOS xx-3
If the radar is part of a NACOS xx-3, the radar must not be parameterized for the connection of a UAIS
DEBEG 3400 because the interfaces of the ship’s interface are used for the ship’s sensor data output.
The necessary configurations for the AIS must be performed at a CHARTPILOT 93xx.
For this case the setting-to-work and configuration for the use of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 is described in
the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT 93xx.
NACOS xx-4 and RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000 Systems

In radar systems or if the radar is part of a NACOS xx-4 system, the radar must be parameterized for the
connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400, because the interfaces of the radar are used for the ship’s sensor
data output. Follow the instructions in Section 5.3.1, 5.3.2 and 5.3.3.
5.3.1 Requirements
The following hard/software must exist for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400:
- Analog Interface GE3044G207 ≥Rev.03 for the connection of the AIS Primary Display Port.
- SH3014G203, RS422 interface adapter (plug-in pcb for the Analog Interface).
- Radar software version ≥2.6.
5.3.2 Installation and Cable Connections
1. Installation:
See the technical manual UAIS DEBEG 3400 for information regarding the installation of the
antennas and the electronics unit.
2. Power supply:
The power supply and the antennas must be connected as described in the technical manual UAIS
DEBEG 3400.
3. Sensor interfaces:
The sensor input channels of the AIS Electronics Unit (connector 3) must be connected to one of
the serial I/Os of the Indicator (Interconnection Board GE3044G206/GE3044G216, TB1).
Interconnection Board
(each of the 4 serial interfaces of the (each of the 3 serial interfaces S1,
Display Electronics Unit can be used. Ship's Sensor Data S2, S3 of the UAIS can be used.
This is only an example.) This is only an example.)
TB Connector 3
ztr1_609.eps
5 GND 7 GND
4 TxD 1 - 6 Channel 1 -
3 TxD 1 + 5 Channel 1 +
Fig. 5-3 Interfaces for ship sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400
106 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
4. Data link for display and operating data:

It is possible to connect the link via Ethernet LAN (software version ≥3.0 necessary) or the Primary
Display Port.
Primary Display Port:
The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to the serial
interface of the Analog Interface (TB10,11,14...16).
Important! See Section 3.2.3 on page 41 for systems with more than one Analog Interface.
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400
MULTIPILOT 1000
Analog Interface
TB Connector 2
ztr1_642.eps
10 AIS RxD, Input - 8 Output -

11 AIS RxD, Input + 7 Output +
14 AIS TxD, Output - 6 Input -
15 AIS TxD, Output + 5 Input +
16 GND 1 GND
Fig. 5-4 Connection of the Primary Display Port, UAIS DEBEG 3400
Ethernet LAN:
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 Electronics Unit must be connected to the Ethernet LAN of the radar/MULTI-
PILOT system. An Analog Interface is not necessary for the connection of the AIS in this case.
5. The following interfaces of the UAIS are not connected to the radar:
- Pilot Port (must be accessible for the pilot)
- Long Range Port (must be connected to a long range communication system)
- UAIS DEBEG internal position system (can be used as position sensor)
- UAIS DEBEG internal alarm relay (can be connected to an alarm system)
5.3.3 Configuration
The following parameters must be set:

1. System Layout
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > AIS
By means of the settings Not connected (default), Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to
LAN the AIS and its connection to the system must be defined.
2. Administration data:
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > Adminis-
tration
Parameters (These data are transmitted via VHF and must be filled in.):
- Vessel
- Call Sign
- MMSI Number
- IMO Number
- Type of Ship or Type of Ship Coded as Number
The setting of the Type of Ship parameter influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu. The
list of the Cargo or Ship Type menu in the Voyage Data menu is adapted to the Type of Ship
setting. If the type of ship is not available in the list box Type of Ship, it is possible to select
the corresponding number in the Type of Ship coded as Number datafield. This parameter
also influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 107

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration Technical Manual
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > System
Position and other Ship Dimensions
Parameters (see Figure 6-4 on page 183 for further information):
- Distance to Bow, Distance to Stern, Distance to SB, Distance to P
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Basic Radar
Parameter:
- AIS Lost Target without Alarm
Default setting is 16.0 NM. If an AIS target is lost outside this range, no alarm is generated.
3. Interface for the Ship’s Sensor Data:
The serial I/O to which the Sensor Input Channel of the AIS Electronics Unit is connected must be
parameterized as ship sensor data output.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Inter-
faces > Serial Interfaces 1...4 > Output
Parameter:
- Serial Output used as (select AIS Navigation Data)
By means of this parameter the repetition rate of 1 Hz is automatically set for the telegrams HDT,
ROT, VBW, GLL, VTG, DTM. It is not necessary to configure the Output > Transfer parameters.
4. Interface for the Primary Display Port (not necessary if the AIS is connected via LAN):
The serial interface of the Analog Interface must be configured as AIS interface.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >
Serial I/O 1
Parameters:
- Driver (set to AIS Automatic Ident System)
- Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)
5. AIS configuration
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > AIS
Parameters:
- AIS Channel (AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice)
- Distance of GPS Antenna Longitudinal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position, see Figure 5-5 on page 109)
- Distance of GPS Antenna Transversal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position, see Figure 5-5 on page 109)
- AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1...S3 (select IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud)
108 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
8m 8m
-4 m 4 m
LT = Log Transducer, defines the System Position

10 m
10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

LT
RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position
- Longitudinal +
-110 m
120 m
-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance

RS Longitudinal to System Position
RX P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance
P1
Longitudinal to System Position
P2
PAIS PAIS = AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m Distance
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 5-5 System position (example)
NOTE:
In addition, it is necessary to configure the AIS in the System Layout menu of a connected CHART-
PILOT 93xx to enable the AIS functions of the CHARTPILOT.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 109

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.4 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 Technical Manual
5.4 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300
1. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > VDR
Select Connected to VDR DEBEG 4300.
2. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > VDR
The following parameters define, from which Indicator the VDR is supplied with radar pictures.
Parameters:
Main Radar:
Select Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s. The radar picture is
stored on the final recording medium and on the hard-disk of the VDR.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s additionally. The radar
picture is sent with an offset of 7.5 s to the picture of the main radar. If a further Indicator is
selected (see parameter below) the picture of that Indicator is transmitted alternating with the
picture of this Indicator, so that the additional pictures are sent by each Indicator every 30 s.
The radar picture is stored on the hard-disk of the VDR only.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture additionally. The radar picture is
sent alternating with the first additional picture m.a., so that it is transmitted every 30 s. The
radar picture is stored on the hard-disk of the VDR only.
3. Interfaces of the radar must not be configured. The VDR is supplied with data via the Ethernet LAN.
For further information see the documentation of the VDR.
110 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.5 System Maintenance Manager
5.5 System Maintenance Manager
ATTENTION
The window of the System Maintenance Manager partly covers the PPI.
Therefore, the System Maintenance Manager may be started only if the
system is not being used for navigation.
Some of the system maintenance functions must not be used by unauthorized persons. The registers
concerned are locked by means of a password.
Register
For the use of

an additional Restart the
ASCII keyboard Radar
Exit the Mainte-
nance Manager
ztr1_104.gif
Fig. 5-6 System Maintenance Manager window
5.5.1 Trackball and Cursor
If you are already familiar with graphic man-machine interfaces, MORE keys for left-
you might be able to skip this section. Before doing so, you handed and right-
should have a look at the picture of the Trackball beside this text. handed people
Every operating step begins with the operator moving the cursor
by means of the trackball to a particular place on the window (to
a text item, a numerical value, a symbol on the PPI or any DO key
desired place on the PPI). The next step is always the pressing
of one of the trackball keys. In the following, this brief pressing of
the key is called clicking. What then happens depends on the
key used, the element on which clicking took place, and the oper-
ztr1_102.jpg
ating situation, and is the subject of these instructions.

The cursor has a resting position to which it goes 30 seconds
after the last operating process. This position is situated beside
the PPI, below the ACQ TGT area. This function is switched off in the service windows. If the cursor
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 111

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.5 System Maintenance Manager Technical Manual
is situated outside the PPI, it is shaped like a hand or an arrow. Inside the PPI, it is a cross. This
function is switched off if the System Maintenance Manager is opened, because its window can
partly cover the PPI.
DO Key
The most important key is the middle one. Almost all data areas react to this key, which performs
the functions that are needed the most frequently. In the following instructions, it is called the "DO
key". In the following, "clicking" always means clicking with the DO key unless stated otherwise.
MORE Keys
The two keys situated above the DO key are called "MORE keys". They have identical functions (for
ergonomical operation for left-handed people and right-handed people). Not all elements which can
be operated by means of the DO key react to the MORE key also, and if they do, then always with
functions other than those of the DO key. Furthermore, by pressing of the MORE key, open menus
or lists can generally be closed without any results, and inputs can be aborted.
- If an ASCII keyboard is connected, the check box ASCII Keyboard in the lower left-hand part of the
window "System Maintenance Manager" must be set (✓ appears).
- All windows and dialogue boxes can be left by clicking on the symbol in the top right-hand
corner of the window or dialogue box or by clicking on the Exit button.
- The windows and dialogue boxes can be moved. Place the cursor on the upper bar of the window
until the cursor changes from a single arrow to a quadruple arrow. Press the Do button and keep it
pressed while moving the window to the new position by means of the trackball. Release Do to fix
the window or dialogue box at the new position.
- If figures or letters have to be entered, a small window with a
keyboard appears. If an ASCII keyboard is connected
(suggested for convenient parameterizing), all entries can be
performed by means of it. All entries are shown in the stylized
display in the keyboard window. If no ASCII keyboard is
connected, the entries must be performed via the trackball and the Do button. Place the cursor on
a button (figure or letter) of the keyboard window and click with Do on this button. The selected
figure or letter appears in the stylized display of the keyboard. To complete an entry, click on the
Enter button of the keyboard.
112 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.5 System Maintenance Manager
5.5.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager
To enter the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Menu button. The message "CAUTION - System
will leave normal operation mode" appears. Click on Yes to enter the Maintenance Manager. The window
"System Maintenance Manager" is opened, where six different registers can be selected with the track-
ball.
If the one of the registers is selected, a dialogue box for the password is displayed
(not for Selfcheck, Telemonitoring Data and Tools).
ztr1_130.gif
To enter the password, click into the data field and type the password by means of an
additional ASCII keyboard or by means of the virtual keyboard by using the trackball
and the Do key. Confirm with Enter. If the service switch on the IMB is activated, the
input can be passed by clicking on OK without entering the password.
Each time the registers Service or
Configure have been selected, the techni-
cian is asked to fill in a service report. It is
highly advisable to state all modifications,
repairs and maintenance work in this report.
The request can be suppressed by activating
the checkbox Do not show again. The
checkbox is deactivated automatically by
leaving the System Maintenance Manager.
ztr1_133.gif
Service Report
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 113

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.6 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager Technical Manual
5.6 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager
Menu Tools Date & Time

Utilities... See page 115 Diskette
Map Transfer/Delete
Maintenance
Track Transfer
System Maintenance Manager /Delete 4)
These three menus are also available for
See page 111 operators, see also the Operating Instructions. Selfcheck Keyboard
See page 118 Buzzer
Config. File Info See page 126 Map Storage Test
Configure
RSC Test Pictures
See page 125 System Layout See page 127 ARPA
System/Ship Parameters Ship Data Telemonitoring Data Versions
See page 128 Basic Radar See page 122 Faults
Startup Sensor Selec. Fault History
Radar Indicator Indicator 1...5
Administration
See page 132
Transceiver Transceiver 1...5 Serial Interfaces
Serial I/O 1...4
Sensor Interfaces Sensor Interface 1 ... 2
Gyro
See page 140
Pulse Log
AIS See page 106 Serial I/O 1...8 2)
NACOS 3) TRACKPILOT
See page 151 SPEEDPILOT
ENGINE INTERFACE
Planning System 3) See page 151
Conning 5) See page 152
ECDIS 6) Chart Database

See page 154
VDR See page 154
Service Indicator Monitor Adjust

See page 155 See page 156 Check RSC Adjust
Check IMB Alarm I/O
Serial I/O Monitor
Software Update
RKE Software Update
ARPA Adjust
RKE Settings
Transceiver Setting to Work Headmarker
See page 159 Advanced Settings Magnetron Trigger Delay
Magnetron Hours 1) Tuning Offset 1) STC Delay
Antenna Information 1) STC Compensation 1) Video MBS 1)
PMA Display 1)
Interswitch Input Adjust
PM Adjust 1)
See page 164
1)
NACOS 3) TRACKPILOT Only for 1000 series systems
2) Only for Interface Expander
See page 165 SPEEDPILOT 3) Appears depending on the system layout
ENGINE INTERFACE 4)
Only if no CHARTPILOT is connected
Commissioning Data Config Transfer 5)
For CHARTRADAR or MULTIPILOT
6)
See page 166 Service Report For MULTIPILOT
Fig. 5-7 Menu structure
114 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.7 Tools Menu
5.7 Tools Menu
5.7.1 Date & Time
By means of the menu Date &

Time the date and time of the
computer (motherboard) can be
set. The upper data field shows
the existing date and time. To Increase
modify the date and/or time, click Decrease
into one of the three data fields
of Set Time or Set Date and
enter a new value by means of
an optional ASCII keyboard or
with the aid of the up and down Data fields
buttons to the left of the data
fields. If the button Apply &
Save is clicked, the values are
saved, but the radar must be
ztr1_134.gif
restarted to activate the new

date and time. The date and time
of the computer are different
from the system date and time. Tools / Date & Time
The system date and time is
detemined by the GPS data. The date and time of the computer are used for file operations (e.g. date
and time of the R10K.sam file) and in can be used if the system time from the GPS data is not available.
From Software version 3.1 on, it is possible to set the system date and time with the computer date and
time by means of the Set to Computer Time button.
5.7.2 .Map Transfer
By means of the function Map Transfer, the

maps which have been edited on the Indi-
cator can be saved to a diskette or to another
Indicator connected to the system. The maps
can also be read from a diskette or from
another Indicator and saved onto the local
Indicator.
To transmit maps to another Indicator or
diskette, the Transmit button must activated.
The destination for the transfer must be
selected from the Destination listbox. The
files to be transferred must be selected in the
Files in Source window. By clicking on
Add>> the files are copied with their directory
ztr1_156.gif
structure to the Files to Transfer window.

The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
Tools / Map Transfer, Transmit
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 115

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.7 Tools Menu Technical Manual
To receive maps from another Indicator or to

restore them from a diskette, the Receive
button must be activated.
The source of the maps must be selected
from the Source listbox. The files to be trans-
ferred have to be selected in the Files in
Source window on the left. By clicking on
Add>> the files are copied with their directory
structure to the Files to Transfer window.
The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
By means of the Clear button the selected
files can be deleted from the Files for
Transfer window on the right. As long as files
ztr1_131.gif
are shown in this window, it is not possible to

change from Transmit to Receive or vice
versa.
Tools / Map Transfer, Receive
Existing files are overwritten with both func-
tions. A warning message appears in this case and the transfer must be confirmed.
It is not possible to transfer maps from or to RADAR 9xxx Indicators.
5.7.3 Map Delete
If the memory of the IMB is not sufficient for

the map files or if maps are not needed any
longer, they can be deleted.
At first the source must be selected from the
Delete in listbox. The files to be deleted have
to be selected in the Files in ... window on
the left. By clicking on Add>> the files are
copied with their directory structure to the
Files to Delete window on the right. To start
the deletion, the button Delete... must be
clicked. The appearing warning message
must be confirmed.
By means of the Clear button the selected
files can be deleted from the Files to Delete
ztr1_008.gif
window.
NOTE:
The diskette can contain maps, tracks and Tools / Map Delete
the configuration files. The free space on the
diskette can be checked by means of the Diskette function.
116 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.7 Tools Menu
5.7.4 Track Transfer
If a planning system like the CHARTPILOT is

connected, the button Track Transfer is not
visible. The tracks must be handled by
means of the planning system in this case.
With Track Transfer, the tracks which have
been edited on the Indicator can be saved to
a diskette or to another Indicator connected
to the system.
Tracks can also be read from a diskette, from
another Indicator or and stored in the local
Indicator.
The operation of the Track Transfer function
is the same as for the Map Transfer function.
ztr1_195.gif
Tools / Track Transfer
5.7.5 Diskette
The Floppy tools provide the following func-

tions:
Info...: Shows the capacity, the used space
and the free space of the diskette in the
diskette drive.
Erase...: Deletes all files on the diskette in
the diskette drive. Caution: All files on the
diskette will be lost.
Format...: Formats the diskette in the diskette
drive. Caution: All files on the diskette will be
lost.
ztr1_157.gif
Tools / Floppy
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 117

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.8 Selfcheck Menu Technical Manual
5.8 Selfcheck Menu
Click on the register Selfcheck in the

System Maintenance Manager. Select
the unit that has to be tested from the
list and start the test with the Start Test
button. An additional window especially
for the selected selfcheck appears. To
close the window and stop the test, click
on the symbol in the top right
corner of the additional window. The
test pictures can be stopped by clicking
on the Stop button in the additional
window.
If errors occur during a test, a corre-
sponding message is shown in the field
Selfcheck Messages.
ztr1_140.gif
Selfcheck menu
5.8.1 Keyboard
The keyboard selfcheck tests the trackball unit and the (optional) keyboard(s). After the start, a schematic
picture of the operating elements appears.
When the keys are operated, the corresponding key of the schematic picture is virtually pressed down
which means that this key is functioning properly.
If the boxes situated at the rotary knob symbols fill up in red in accordance with the operation of the rotary
knobs, this means that the rotary knobs are functioning properly.
5.8.2 Buzzer
After the start, a list of various acoustic alarm signals appears. If, when one of the buttons in the list has
been clicked, the relevant acoustic signal is sounded, this means that the acoustic alarm is OK.
5.8.3 Map Storage Test
The IMB Map Storage Test generates test maps, stores them to the IMB memory and deletes them after-
wards. Click on Start to begin the test. If the test has been passed successfully the message "IMB Map
Storage Test : passed" appears in the display field. If the IMB failed the test, error messages appear and
the IMB must be exchanged.
118 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.8 Selfcheck Menu
5.8.4 RSC Test Pictures
After the start, a list of the various test pictures that can be displayed appears. By means of these test
pictures, you can determine whether the radar scan converter (RSC) is working properly.
In the case of pictures 1 to 3, only the brilliance adjustment function is acting; in the case of pictures 4
to 6, the adjustment functions for gain and range are acting also.
Picture 1
In each row of blue to yellow squares, the
yellow intensity must increase from left to
right.
The squares move slowly downwards.
Each square must be uniformly coloured.
ztr1_105.gif
Picture 2
In the middle square, 16 colours are displayed
cyclically one after another.
ztr1_106.gif
Picture 3
Each of the four sectors has eight intensities.
They are moved round in the clockwise direc-
tion.
ztr1_107.gif
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 119

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.8 Selfcheck Menu Technical Manual
Picture 4
The illustration shows the test picture in the
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: Normal setting
ztr1_108.gif
Picture 5
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: Maximum
If the gain is reduced, the intensity of the rings
decreases, beginning with the inner rings of
the sets of six.
The signal for this picture is fed into the RSC
behind the input potentiometer. If the test
picture is displayed as described, the analog
and the digital part of the RSC are working
ztr1_109.gif
properly.
Picture 6
following case:
- Range: 24 NM
- Gain: Maximum
Each of the broad rings consists of rings
arranged inside each other without gaps. If the
gain is reduced, the intensity of these rings
decreases, beginning with the inner ring.
The signal for this picture is fed into the RSC
behind the A/D converter. If the test picture is
displayed as described, the digital part of the
ztr1_110.gif
RSC is working properly.
120 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.8 Selfcheck Menu
5.8.5 ARPA
By means of the ARPA function test, the

overall performance of the ARPA can be
assessed. This should be done periodically.
Select the 6 NM range and select ARPA from
the list. After the start, the RSC test picture 4
appears. The individual echoes displayed are
synthetic targets:
- It must be possible to acquire them
manually.
- When the acquisition / guard zone is
placed over one or more targets, auto-
matic acquisition must take place,
together with the associated symbols and
ztr1_127.gif
alarms. The targets must be tracked

automatically.
- All targets travel along with own ship.
Therefore, their true courses and true speeds must be the same as own ship's course and speed.
The ARPA test picture is not available if the system is not equipped with an ARPA unit.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 121

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.9 Telemonitoring Data Menu Technical Manual
5.9 Telemonitoring Data Menu
All information which has been listed stays in the list. It is possible to scroll through this list by means of
a scrollbar. The list must be deleted manually by means of the Clear button.
5.9.1 Listing the System Faults
Existing system faults (which generate the alarm indication SYSTEM FAULT xxxxx) can be listed. This
function is also accessible to the operator, because in the event of a fault, a service visit can be better
prepared or omitted altogether if the service station can be informed of the fault code list beforehand.
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list. New informa-
tion is added to the list, so that it is possible to scroll through this list. The list can be deleted by clicking
on the Clear button.
Present Faults
List of present
system faults
Generates a list of the

system faults that exist
Deletes the
display of data
Refresh switched on: The fault
list is continually updated
Generates an indication of the soft-

ware version, see Section 5.9.2.
ztr1_111.gif
Fig. 5-8 System fault list (present faults)
To list the present system faults, click on Faults. All system faults that exist at the time are listed. New
faults are not added to the list.
If the Refresh function is switched on, new faults are added to the list and the error detection of the radar
is more sensitive. A small square lights up in the Faults button, if this function is activated. To disable
the function click on the Faults button again.
For further information about the system faults see Section 8.4.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 212 and
Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 237.
122 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.9 Telemonitoring Data Menu
Fault History, System Integrity Faults
History of the
system faults
Generates a history of the

system faults and deletes
the fault history (More key) Deletes the
display of data
Saves the errors

Generates an indication of the soft- and the version
ware version, see Section 5.9.2. data on a diskette
ztr1_600.gif
Fig. 5-9 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults)
To show the history of system faults, click on Fault History. All system faults that appeared so far are
listed. The column Count shows, how often the error appeared in the past. The date and the time corre-
sponds to the date and time when the error appeared first time.
For further information about the system faults see Section 8.4.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 212 and Section
10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 237.
Below the fault history, the system integrity faults list shows the processes which have caused a system
crash.
Deletion of the Fault History

With he Clear button, the display is cleared, but not the history. To delete the error history, click on Fault
History by means of the More key.
Saving the Versions and Faults on a Diskette

By means of the Save to Disk button, the ship data, the software version list, the error history and the
system integrity fault list are saved as an ASCII file on a diskette. This ASCII file is also shown in the
Telemonitoring Data window (except of the ship data). The error history is deleted automatically.
Existing files on the diskette are overwritten.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 123

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.9 Telemonitoring Data Menu Technical Manual
5.9.2 Determining the Software Versions
To display the software versions, click on Versions. The software version of the radar version and some
of its main components are indicated on the display.
List of software versions Software Version

of the Radar
Software version of the IMB
Scrollbar
This deletes the

display of data
ztr1_142.gif
Fig. 5-10 List of software versions
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list. New informa-
tion is added to the list, so that it possible to scroll through this list. The list can be deleted by clicking on
the Clear button.
Remote Keyboard Electronics

For master/slave or remote installations at least two Remote Keyboard Electronics are needed. These
components are listed as follows (example for one master with three slaves):
RKE*/aMST 1 GE3048G200 = Master with address 1, "*" = connected to this electronics unit
RKE /aSLV 5 GE3048G200 = Slave with address 5
The software version of the pcbs is shown, as well.
The mode (master/slave) and the numbers of the remote keyboard electronics are set by means of DIP
switches on the remote keyboard electronics pcb. For further information see the corresponding technical
manual.
124 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.10 Configure Menu
5.10 Configure Menu
By means of the Configure menu, the system parameters can be entered. It is organized in the
submenus System Layout, Radar (with the settings for the Indicator and the Transceiver), Sensor Inter-
faces (for the settings of the optional Analog Interface or Interface Expander), Ship Data and Parameter,
NACOS (only if NACOS components have been defined in the system layout) and Planning System
(only if a planning system has been defined in the system layout).
The size of the tree in the left-hand window depends on the settings which have been made in the
System Layout menu. Only components which have been defined in the system layout appear in the
tree.
5.10.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons
Defaults Button
The button Defaults sets all parameters of the opened window/menu and of the submenus to the default
values. Menus in parallel or menus of higher levels are not set to the default values.
Save Button
To save modified parameters in the IMB and in the component which has been selected for configuration,
click on Save.
Leaving without Modifications

If parameter settings have been changed, the operator is asked about saving the modifications when he
is leaving the menu. To save the settings, click on Save & Exit. To drop the modifications and keep the
old settings, click on Cancel.
Saving Parameters in the Analog Interface/Interface Expander

The parameters are saved on-line in the IMB and in the component. The parameters are transmitted to
the Analog Interface automatically each time while booting the system.
Saving Parameters in the TRACKPILOT

The parameters are saved by means of the Save button in the IMB and in the TRACKPILOT. When the
TRACKPILOT is selected, the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT are compared with the IMB ones.
5.10.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters
By clicking Save, the parameters of the selected Transceiver are stored in the IMB and in
the TCU. Some of the parameters work immediately after clicking Save (for example the
parameter Azimuth Pulses per Revolution).
Some of the parameters only take effect after a restart (for example the parameter Speed
Capability). When such a parameter has been modified and saved, a warning appears when the System
Maintenance Manager is going to be left, which requests restarting of the system. If the restart is not
performed, the parameter has no effect.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 125

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10 Configure Menu Technical Manual
5.10.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure
On the left-hand side of the configure screen the menu tree is displayed. This tree can be expanded by
clicking on the + symbols. Then the next level of the branch behind the symbol + is shown and the +
becomes a -. To hide the twig structure, click on the - symbol. Use the button Expand above the tree to
show the complete tree structure. Return to the simplified display with Compress.
View with compressed tree and reduced list.
Shows the Shows all items (all

complete tree Browse buttons
structure disappear)
Shows all items of
this menu item (this
Browse button
disappears)
Shows the following

branch
ztr1_143.gif
View with expanded tree and expanded list.
Hides the complete Reduces the list (all

tree structure Browse buttons
appear)
Click to open the
drop-down list box
with all available
settings
Hides the Scrollbars
following branch
Click Exit to
leave the config-
ztr1_144.gif
urator.
Fig. 5-11 Configure menus
See Figure 5-11 for the operation of the Configure menus.
5.10.4 Configuration File Info
The data fields of the Configuration File Info shows the date and the time of the last modification in the
configuration file and the number of the Indicator where the modification has been performed.
126 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.5 System Layout
By means of this menu it is defined which components exist in the system.
System Layout
Configure > System Layout
Local Indicator Number (this one) Shows the Indicator number of the operated Indicator. The indicator
number must be set by means of S1 of the IMB pcb (see Section
4.5.7 from page 69 onwards).
Indicator
> Indicator 1... 5 Select Not Connected (default)/RADARPILOT 1000 or MULTIPILOT
1000
Defines the type of Indicator. If one MULTIPILOT 1000 is defined in
the system, the ECDIS menu is available.
Transceiver
> Transceiver 1 ... 5 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Interswitch (PCI) Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
If more than two Indicators or Transceivers are connected in a
system, the Interswitch is needed to switch the TVA signals.
Sensor Interface
> Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Sensor interfaces are the
- Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface) for the connection of an
analog gyro, an analog log and an AIS and the
- Interface Expander for the connection of an analog gyro and an
analog log and 8 serial interfaces.
NOTE:
If "Not Connected" has been selected, it is not permissible to
connect an Analog Interface. This can cause problems on the
CAN Bus.
NACOS (not for standard radar systems)
> TRACKPILOT Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a TRACKPILOT is connected to the system.
NOTE: Up to three Indicators can operate a TRACKPILOT by
means of a Trackpilot Keyboard. Depending on the configuration of
the TRACKPILOT this must be the Indicators 1, 2, 3 or 3, 4, 5.
> ENGINE INTERFACE Select Connected, Connected with SPEEDPILOT or Not
(SPEEDPILOT) Connected (default).
Defines whether an ENGINE INTERFACE is connected to the
system.
This is the NACOS Backup System 2 Select No (default) or Yes
In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems. This parameter should be set
to Yes only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Ethernet LAN Select One Net (default) or Two Sub-nets
In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems or alternatively, the Ethernet
LAN can be divided in two sub-nets. This parameter should be set
to Two Sub-nets only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Planning System
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 127

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System Layout (cont. )

Configure > System Layout
> Connected Planning System Select No/1/2/3 or more than 3
Select No for standard radar systems.
Defines whether one or more CHARTPILOT 9320/30 or MULTIP-
ILOT 1000 are connected as a planning system. From SW version
2.4 on, User Chart Objects which have been defined at a CHART-
PILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed in the radar PPI or the
radar can be licensed as a CHARTRADAR.
AIS Select Not Connected (default)/Connected to Sensor Interface or

Connected to LAN
Defines whether an AIS is connected to the system and if it is
connected via LAN or to a sensor interface.
VDR Select Not Connected or Connected to VDR DEBEG 4300
Defines whether a VDR DEBEG 4300 is supplied with radar
pictures.
5.10.6 System / Ship Parameters
By means of this menu the basic data of the ship and of the system can be entered.
System / Ship Parameters
Configure > System / Ship Parameters
Ship Data
> Administration Common ship data. Enter comments and names for:
- Vessel (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Shipping Company
- Flag
- Call Sign (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Phone
- Fax
Ship Data for AIS: (values must be set!)
- MMSI Number
Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number for the Automatic
Identification System (AIS) (default = 0)
- IMO Number
IMO Number used for the Automatic Identification System (AIS)
(default = 0)
- Type of Ship
Select Not defined/Passenger Ship/Cargo Ship/Tanker/
High Speed Craft/Pilot Vessel/SAR Vessel/Tug/Port Tender/
Anti-Pollution Vessel/Law Enforcement Vessel/
Medical Transports/Fishing Vessel/Towing Vessel/
Sailing Vessel/Pleasure Craft/WIG or Only Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship which is transmitted by the AIS.
- Type of Ship Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship coded as a number for the AIS
The parameters Type of Ship and Type of Ship coded as
Number are coupled with each other. If a type of ship has been
selected, the corresponding number is set automatically.
> System Position and other Ship The system position defines a coordinate origin for the position
Dimensions calculation (normally location of the DOLOG transducer). These
values are also very important if an AIS is connected.
> Distance to Bow Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to Stern Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to SB Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to P Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
128 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

> Length at Waterline Set a value in 0.1 m steps
The parameter specifies the ship’s length between the perpendicu-
lars for squat calculation.
> Nominal Speed Set a value in 0.1 kt steps (default = 20.0 kt).
Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Acceleration Set a value in 0.005 ms-2 steps (default is 0.020 ms-2).
Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Maximum ROT Alarm Limit Set a value in 1 °/min steps (default is 0 °/min = no check).
The ROT sensor (gyro) is checked against this limit.
> Position Quality Check Select Off (default) / Standard Quality / Medium Quality or Low
Quality.
The position sensor is checked against not expected differences
between the position values.
> Minimum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 0.03 NM...1.00 NM
(default is 0.25 NM).
Specifying the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Maximum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 1.00 NM...3.00 NM
(default is 2.00 NM).
Specifying the smallest largest with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Gyro Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Gyro Monitoring functions
which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).
> On/Off The following menu items appear only if On is selected.
> Gyro against Magnetic Compass Set a value in 1 ° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Gyro monitoring against the magnetic compass (HDG/MAG).
> Gyro against COG of Main Set a value in 1 ° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Position Sensor Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the main posi-
tion sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course
over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/
COG).
> Gyro against COG of Redundant Set a value in 1 ° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Position Sensor Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the redundant
position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the
course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a
drift (HDG/COG).
> Ignore Gyro against COG above Set a value in 1°/min steps (default = 0°/min = Off).
ROT of: Ignore the difference between gyro and COG above a rate of turn
of this value. If the ROT value is large, the COG of the position
sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro which causes an
increase in the difference. This parameter has an effect on the
parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor.
Factor 1=actual ROT for the example
Heading/
COG 2=Value of parameter Ignore Gyro
1.0 against COG above ROT of
1 2 ROT
Example: ROT 1 = 30°/min, ROT 2 = 120°/min,
Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°
- ROT 30°/min: Factor = 0.75 -> 10.0°x0.75 = 7.5, alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below
Speed of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor
of that parameter.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 129

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont. )

> Ignore Gyro against COG below Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Speed of Ignore the difference between gyro and COG below a speed of this
value. If the speed is reduced, an increasing difference between the
gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a drift.
This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against
COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redun-
dant Position Sensor
Factor 1=Value of parameter
Heading/ Ignore Gyro against
COG COG below Speed of
1.0
2=Value of parameter Full
Sensitivity Gyro against
COG above Speed of
1 2 Speed
Below the speed "1", the difference between gyro and COG is
ignored. For speed values between "1" and "2" a factor is calcu-
lated. The difference between gyro and COG is multiplied by this
factor.
Example: Speed 1 = 5 kt, Speed 2 = 20 kt (Nominal Speed)
Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°
- Speed 20 kt: Factor = 1.0 -> 10.0°x1.0 = 10.0, alarm triggered
- Speed 5 kt: Factor = 0.25 -> 10.0°x0.25 = 2.5, no alarm triggered
- Speed 4 kt: Factor = 0 -> 10.0°x0.0 = 0, no alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT
of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that
parameter.
> Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG This parameter is the value "speed 2" which is shown in the
above speed of diagram above. Usually the nominal speed of the ship should be
set.
> Speed Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Speed Monitoring functions
> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the
manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu
items appear only if On is selected.
> Speed against Redundant Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Speed Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed of the redundant speed sensor
(SPD/...LOGx).
> Speed against SOG of Main Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Position Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
main position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Speed against SOG of Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Redundant Position Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
redundant position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Position Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Position Monitoring functions
> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the
manufacturer’s development or service division. The following menu
items appear only if On is selected. The following menu item
appears only if On is selected.
> Position against Redundant Set a value in 1 m steps (default = 0 m = Off).
Position Sensor Position monitoring against the position measured by the redundant
position sensor (POS).
> Additional Alarms Setup Menu Select No or Yes (default = No)
Enables the operators menu Alarms > Settings. By means of this
menu the alarms POSITION STATUS CHANGED, LOG STATUS
CHANGED and BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM can be deactivated.
130 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

Basic Radar
> Video Anti Clutter Sea Select On or Off (default = On).
This parameter is valid for all radars in the configuration. It is not
permitted to set the parameter to "On" if a Radar 9xxx is connected
to the system.
> ARPA Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...20.0 NM (default =
19.5 NM)
If an ARPA target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
> AIS Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...99.0 NM (default =
16.0 NM)
If an AIS target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select None (default) or Turn Headmarker by 180 deg
Turns the Headmarker by 180° caused by an external contact on
TB2/15, 16 on the Interconnection Board (used for double end
ferries).
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select Not connected (default) / Double End Ferry, HM Turn
For double end ferries, an external contact at TB2/15,16 deter-
mines whether the AFT or FWD bridge is activated.
The following parameters are visible only, when Double End Ferry,
HM Turn has been set.
FWD Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,
when the FWD bridge has been activated.
AFT Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,
when the AFT bridge has been activated.
Startup Sensor Selection Defines, with which sensors the system works with after a startup.
> Heading Select Manual Heading or Heading Sensor 1 (default).
The use of manual heading is not permissible. This setting may
only be used for special purposes such as exhibitions.
> Speed Select Manual Speed / Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 /
Log 1 (default) or Log 2
> Position Select Estimated Position / Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Position
Sensor 6.
> Time Select Time from Internal Clock / Time from Position Sensor 1
(default) /.../ Time from Position Sensor 6 / Time Sensor 1 or Time
Sensor 2.
The ZDA message of the NMEA definitions is used to transfer the
data.
> Time from Selected Position Select Yes (default) or No.
Sensor The setting "Yes" overwrites the setting of the parameter Time from
Internal Clock. The time of the currently selected position sensor
is used if "Yes" is selected.
From Selected Heading Sensor is the only available choice.
> Differentiated Heading ROT calculated by differentiation of the heading.
> Default Depth Select Manual Depth / Depth Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Wind Select Manual Wind / Wind Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Weather Select Manual Weather / Weather Sensor 1 (default).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 131

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.7 Radar
Via the Radar menus, the Transceivers and the Display Electronics Units can be configured.
NOTE:
To avoid mistakes, caused by different parameter settings from different Display Electronics Units, the
entire system must be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit.
All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of a diskette (SW
version ≤2.0) afterwards to the other radars.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
NOTE:
In the menus the CHARTRADAR 1000 is not mentioned explicitly. The settings are the same as for the
RADARPILOT 1000, except of the menus which are intended especially for the CHARTRADAR 1000.
5.10.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration)
Admini stration
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration
Installed Type of Tracking Facility Select ARPA or EPA (default).
EPA = Electronic Plotting Aid
ARPA = Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
If no ARPA hardware is installed and the parameter is set to
"ARPA", the systems works as an EPA system.
Connected Monitor Select Other Types (default) / or the type of monitor that is
connected to the Electronics Unit.
Keyboard Select Trackball only (default) / RADAR Keyboard or RADAR +
TRACKPILOT Keyboard.
Name Name of Indicator; enter by virtual keyboard or by ASCII keyboard.
Alarm Relays Activation Delay Enter a value in 1 s steps (default = 30 s), range = 1 s...120 s
Sets the delay for the activation of the alarm relays.
System Fault Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if any system
fault occurs.
Dangerous Target Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if a dangerous
target has been detected, i.e. if the CPA value and the TCPA value
are less than the set values.
Lost Target Alarm Select Disabled (default) / Enabled.
Specifies that the external alarm has to be triggered when a
tracked target is lost.
Guard Zone Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that an external alarm must be triggered when a target
has been detected in the guard zone.
132 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Admi nistrati on (cont .)

Allowed to be Sensor Master Select Yes or No (default).
An Indicator can become Sensor Master if the sensors
- Gyro
- Log
- Position
are connected to the IMB of this Indicator, the Analog Interface
(GE3044G207) the Interface Expander (GE3041) or COM
Expander.
If these three sensors are connected in redundancy to a second

Indicator, this second Indicator has to be parameterized as sensor
master, too. When such a system is started, the Indicator which
becomes operable first is determined to be sensor master.
In the case of a defect of the sensor master, the second Indicator

becomes the sensor master automatically. If there is a RADAR 9xxx
in the system, it is not permissible to parameterize the Indicator as
sensor master, because gyro, log and position sensor must be
connected to the Ship’s Interface (NG3013G209) of the RADAR
9xxx.
The Ship’s Interface calculates the sensor data and distributes the
data via the CAN Bus to the system.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Function Select Available or Not Available (default).
For a RADARPILOT 1000 this parameter defines whether the radar
can be operated as a CHARTRADAR 1000 with a display of elec-
tronic seacharts in the PPI. The User Chart Objects of a connected
CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed without activating
the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
For a MULTIPILOT 1000 this parameter must be set to activate the

full ECDIS functionality.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identifica- Displays the unique identification Code of this CHARTRADAR 1000
tion Code or MULTIPILOT 1000 unit. Modifications of this number cannot be
saved. The number is used to generate the CHART Function
License Key. See Section 5.2 for further information about the
procedure.
CHART Function License Key If the correct license key has been entered here, the chart/ECDIS
functionalities can be used at this Indicator. If no valid key is avail-
able, the access to the chart/ECDIS database is locked. See
Section 5.2 for further information about the procedure.
Conning Select Available or Not Available (default).
This parameter defines whether the Conning Display is available or
not. This parameter is available at CHARTRADARs or MULTIPI-
LOTS only. If the CHART Function License Key is not valid, the
Conning functions are not available.
Based on Specification Select IEC 60936-1 (default) or IEC 60936-3.

The approval is based on the IEC specification. If IEC 60936-3 is
selected, the chart cannot be displayed in Head Up mode and the
chart areas are always filled.
Radar PPI Radius Select Use Default (default) / Standard or Maximize.
Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s
development or service division.
"Maximize" enlarges the size of the PPI display to fulfil the 16"
radar type approval requirements with the Monitor AZ 3063.
"Standard" shows the PPI in the standard size (which is smaller
than 16" with the Monitor AZ 3063). When "Use Default" is
selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corre-
sponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. If a TFT
Monitor which requires the maximized display is used together with
CRT Monitors, it is possible to configure these CRT Monitors with
"Maximize" to get the same display as on the TFT Monitor.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 133

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Admini stration (cont.)

Monitor Aspect Ratio Select Use Default / 4/3 or 5/4.
Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s
development or service division.
Monitor resolutions of 1600x1200 or 1024x768 have an aspect ratio

of 4/3. A resolution of 1280x1024 has an aspect ratio of 5/4. CRT
Monitors can display resolutions with both aspect ratios although
the CRT’s own aspect ratio is usually 4/3. Consequently, if a CRT
Monitor is driven with the resolution of 1280x1024, not the
complete size of the CRT is used and a blank band appears. This
can be corrected by a tuning of the screen size settings. As a result
of this "compression" from 5/4 to 4/3, circular objects on the screen
appear slightly oval.
TFT Monitors must be driven with their own 4/3 aspect ratio. When
"Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automati-
cally, corresponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. In
case of the Monitor AZ 3063, the resolution which must be selected
with 1280x1024 by means of the DIP switches on the IMB is auto-
matically processed to a resolution of 1280x960 which corresponds
to an aspect ratio of 4/3.
Head-Up PPI Orientation Select Bow-up (standard) or Stern-up.
Bow-up is the default setting.
The stern-up PPI orientation should be used if the radar monitor is
installed contrary, so that the operator is watching in the direction
of a stern window.
Monitor Control Interface Select Indicator (COM 1) (default) or RKE (J2).
When a remote keyboard electronics is used, the serial interface of
the monitor can be connected to the RKE or to COM 1 of the Indi-
cator. The interface which is used must be selected.
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to Select Yes or No (default).
CHARTPILOT Defines whether ARPA alarms are displayed at connected CHART-
PILOTs. The alarms cannot be acknowledged at a CHARTPILOT.
Central Dimming Adjustment Select No (default)/Yes/User Controlled
No: Dimming must be set at every single Indicator.
Yes: Modifications of the dimming settings at one Indicator are
transferred to all other Indicators and they are set if the central
dimming function is enabled at these Indicators.
User Controlled: In the Brilliance menus an additional button is
displayed. By means of this button the Operator can enable or
disable the central dimming function for the Indicator.
Double End Ferry Select No (default)/Yes, FWD Bridge Indicator/Yes, AFT Bridge Indi-
cator/Yes, only one Bridge (at Center)
Defines to which bridge the Indicator belongs (on double end
ferries).
134 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces)
Serial Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4

Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4
Driver Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) / C. Plath
(serial Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro).
Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the
driver which has been chosen.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2):
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.
Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.
> Serial Gyro
> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is
connected.
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Display Selected Gyro Select Yes or No (default)
Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch over unit)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
> Position
> Position Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL,
GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.
The following items appear only, if Position has been defined with
Connected.
> Channel Select 1 /.../ 6 (default = 1).
Channel (multiplexer) identification.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position sensor antenna, position distance (longitudinal) in m rela-
tive to the system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position sensor antenna, position distance (transversal) in m rela-
tive to the system position.
> Sensor Number Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).
Specifying whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor
must be supplemented by a serial number, and if so, which number.
The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is

derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred
from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of
the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator
must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection
and in the status display. With the aid of the sensor number function
it can be arranged, for example, that one GPS system is consist-
ently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".
> GLL, GGA Selection Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA
message.
Specifying whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the
GLL message.
> Use Speed from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as speed
sensor. Set to No for BSH or DNV-W1.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 135

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I nterfaces > Serial I /O 1. ..4 (cont. )

> Use Time from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as time
sensor.
> Speed
> Speed Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW,
VHW is connected.
The following items appear only if Speed has been defined with
Connected.
> Channel Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.
Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (longitudinal) rela-
tive to system position.
Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (transversal) rela-
tive to system position.
> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter X Constant.
> Transversal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter Y Constant.
> Time
> Time Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is
connected.
The following item appears only if Time has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.
> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output
messages.
> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output TTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output RSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
136 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Seri al Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4 (cont.)

> Output RTE/WPL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> RTE Mode Select: Working Route (default) or Complete Route
Working Route: the last waypoint and the following 4 waypoints are
transmitted.
Complete Route: the complete route with all waypoints is trans-
mitted.
> WPL Remark Select: No Remark (default) or Append Remark
No Remark: the remarks of a waypoint are not transmitted
Append Remark: the remarks of the waypoint are transmitted.
> RTE Message Route Select: With Track Number (default) or Track Number 0000
Identifier With Track Number: the original number of the system track is
transmitted.
Track Number 0000: the system track is transmitted with the
number 0000 always.
> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-
1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
> Depth Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
The following items appear only if Depth has been defined with
Connected:
> Depth Sensor 1 Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Depth Value Select Below Transducer (default) or Below Keel
Below Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT
or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.
> Wind Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
> Channel Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Weather Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
> Channel Weather Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Route Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via
NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not connected if a
CHARTPILOT is connected to the system.
The following items appear only if Route has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4
> Catalog In this input field the catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor
must be entered. The name will be used by the operator. It is advis-
able to enter the name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.
> TRACKPILOT Track Mode Select Disable or Enable
If it is sure, that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satis-
factory, it can be admitted for the use as a track for the TRACK-
PILOT.
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz:
are connected to the radar system.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 137

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers (1000 Series, 9xxx Series)
When a Transceiver has been selected, it may happen that it takes a few seconds until the TCU param-
eters have been loaded. A message appears which shows the progress of loading data. If the Indicator
does not make contact with the TCU of the selected Transceiver, a warning appears. In this case, the
parameters shown in the menu do not correspond to the parameters which are actually set in the TCU.
Transceiver > Transceiver 1.. .5

Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5
Type of Generation Select RADAR 1000 S-Band / RADAR 1000 X-Band 12.5 kW /
RADAR 1000 X-Band 25 kW / RADAR 9600 S-Band or RADAR
9600 X-Band
Sets the type of radar (1000 or 9xxx series, default = RADAR 1000
S-Band). The following parameters depend on the selected trans-
ceiver generation.
For 1000 Series Transceiver:
> Additional Information Click into the data field and enter any comments.
> Frequency Deviation Enter a value for the constant PRF deviation in the range -5% to
5% (default = 0).
This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence
(interference) between several radars on the ship.
> Sector Blanking (See form sheet on page 361)
> Number of Blanking Sectors Select None / 1 /.../4.
The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking
Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and
Stop Angle. Not allowed for the main navigation radar.
> Blanking Sector X Start Angle Starting angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Blanking Sector X Stop Angle Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Antenna
> Speed Capability Select None / Single (Low Speed) / Dual (default) or Single (High
Speed).
Set to Single (High Speed) on HSC.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation location of the Radar Scanner
and the system position along the ship’s longitudinal axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation position of the Radar Scanner
and the system position along the ship’s transverse axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system
position.
> Height above Sea Level Enter the height of the antenna above the sea level in metres in
0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m)
> Beam Width Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2°,
S-Band = 1.8°.
3 dB points:
5 ft X-Band Scanner:1.5°
8 ft X-Band Scanner:1.0°
14 ft S-Band Scanner:1.8°
138 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Transcei ver > Transceiver 1. .. 5 (cont .)

> Azimuth Pulses per Revolution X-Band
1. Pulser HEDS-5605 at the intermediate shaft = 1920.0,
2. Modification Kit GR3017G027 with slotted wheel at the interme-
diate shaft = 540.0
3. Combined Azimuth / Headmarker Pulse Generator with slotted
wheel at the hollow shaft = 72.0
S-Band
1. Old pulser (34 teeth chopper wheel) = 830.0
2. New pulser (17 teeth chopper wheel) = 415
See the description of the different azimuth pulse generators in the

technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for further informa-
tion.
> Antenna Motor Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz (default).
> Last Modification Date Displays the date of the last modification of the transceiver adjust-
ments.
For Radar 9xxx Transceiver:
> Additional Information Click into the data field and enter any comments.
> Antenna
> Distance Longitudinal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation location of the Radar Scanner
and the system position along the ship’s longitudinal axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation position of the Radar Scanner
and the system position along the ship’s transverse axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system
position
> Beam Width Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2°,
S-Band = 1.8°.
3 dB points:
5 ft X-Band Scanner: 1.5°
8 ft X-Band Scanner: 1.0°
14 ft S-Band Scanner: 1.8°
> Frequency Deviation Enter a value for the constant deviation in the range -5% to 5%
(default = 0).
This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence
(interference) between several radars on the ship.
> Trigger Delay Enter a value in the range 0...150. Default is 50.
The Trigger Delay is the correction of the range error caused by the
wave travelling time in the waveguide. The correction is performed
by adjusting the delay of the reception trigger relative to the trans-
mission trigger.
> Headmarker Adjust Enter a value in the range -10° ... +10° in 0.1° steps (default = 0).
This parameter adjusts the display of the headmarker on the radar
picture.
> STC-Curve Select one of 12 STC curves.
This parameter selects the shape of the STC curve for the adapta-
tion to the antenna installation circumstances. Each curve has a
different characteristic (default = 2).
> Magnetron Current
> Magnetron Current Short Sets the Magnetron Current for short pulses. Default is 160.
> Magnetron Current Medium Sets the Magnetron Current for medium pulses. Default is 144.
> Magnetron Current Long Sets the Magnetron Current for long pulses. Default is 128.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 139

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Transceiver > Transceiver 1.. .5 (cont.)

> STC Delay
> STC Delay Short Pulse Starting instant of the STC function Short Pulse.
Default is 128 for S-Band, 139 for X-Band.
> STC Delay Medium Pulse Starting instant of the STC function Medium Pulse.
> STC Delay Long Pulse Starting instant of the STC function Long Pulse.
> Sector Blanking (See form sheet on page 361)
> Number of Blanking Sectors Select None / 1 /.../4
The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking
Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and
Stop Angle.
> Blanking Sector X Start Starting angle of the Blanking Sector X.
Angle
> Blanking Sector X Stop Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.
Angle
> Last Modification Date Displays the date of the last modification of the transceiver adjust-
ments.
5.10.8 Sensor Interfaces (Analog Interface, Interface Expander, COM Expander))
By means of the Sensor Interface menu the optional Analog Interface or the Interface Expander can be
configured. The interfaces can only be parameterized if they have been configured in the system layout.
Sensor Int erfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2
Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2
Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 Click on Sensor Interface 1 or Sensor Interface 2 to configure the
sensor interface as Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface), Interface
Expander or COM Expander.
If the system is equipped with an Interface Expander and an

Analog Interface, the Interface Expander must become the
Sensor Interface 1 (the Interface Expander must be the master,
because it offers additional serial interfaces).
The following menu items Gyro and Pulse Log are available for the
Analog Interface and the Interface Expander only.
140 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of Analog Interface and Interface Expander
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2

Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of Analog Interface and Interface Expander
Gyro
> Heading Sensor Channel Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Analog Gyro System Select No Analog Gyro Connected (default) / DC Stepper Positive /
DC Stepper Negative / DC Positive Halfwave / DC Negative
Halfwave / AC Gyro.
DC Stepper:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal voltage is a smoothed DC voltage.
See Figure 4-24 on page 85 and the description of the LEDs DS
33, 34, 35 in Section 4.5.11.
Halfwave:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal is an unfiltered DC voltage, generated from the 50 Hz or
60 Hz supply voltage.
AC Gyro:
Input indicating that the signal is transferred by means of a synchro.
> Increment Select 1/6 deg Step (default) / 1/3 deg Step / 1/48 deg Step / 2/3
deg Step (not type-approved).
Matching the gyro interface of the Analog Interface to the transmis-
sion ratio (resolution):
1/6 degree Step:

- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/6 degree course change.
- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 1
degree course change.
1/3 degree Step:
degree course change.
1/48 degree Step:
2/3 degree Step (not approved):
degree course change (90:1).
Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degrada-

tion of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore, this
setting should not be used where:
- the radar installation is intended to meet the IMO/IEC Radar
Performance Standards
- type approval certification is required
- the ARPA option is fitted.
> Reference Select Not Connected (default) / 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
Not Connected must be selected if REF1 and REF2 are not
connected to the Analog Interface.
> Gyro Input Voltage Select Low (default) or High
Sets the gyro input voltage (exciter voltage of the stepper or
maximum stator voltage of the synchro signal). Always select the
"Low" setting. Set to "High" only, if it is not possible to get rid of
appearing phase errors. After setting to high, the gyro must be
tested properly while turning.
> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the error input definition.
Pulse Log
> Speed Sensor Channel Select Log1 (default) or Log2.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 141

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Distance Longitudinal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position distance (of speed log transducer) (longitudinal) relative to
system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position distance (of speed log transducer) (transversal) relative to
system position.
> Sensor Interface Identifier Select Log (default) / Log 1 / Log 2.
Name of the sensor which is being displayed on the screen.
> Log Type Select No Pulse Log Connected (default) / One Axis Log / Two Axis
Log.
Sets the log type
One Axis Log:
Speed in the longitudinal direction only is transferred (e.g.
DOLOG 21).
Two Axis Log:
Speed in longitudinal and transverse direction is transferred
(e.g. DOLOG 22 or DOLOG 23).
> Increment Select 125 Pulses/NM / 200 Pulses/NM (default).
Resolution in Pulses/NM.
> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the error input definition.
> Bottom Track (BT) Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the Bottom Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The BT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The BT status input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
be interpreted as bottom track signals.
- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as bottom track signals.
- the open contact means, that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
142 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Water Track Input (WT) Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the Water Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The WT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The WT status input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be
interpreted as water track signals.
not be interpreted as water track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as water track signals.
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as water track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
> XPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the XPM Input definition. Specifying whether a sign signal is
transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Speed ahead corresponds to open contact.
> YPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the YPM Input definition. Specifying whether a sign signal is
transferred for the transverse speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Drift to starboard corresponds to open contact.
> VX Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the VX Input definition, longitudinal speed.
> VY Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the VY Input definition, transverse speed.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).
Sets the VX Filter constant. Specifying whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the longitudinal speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the analog interface (low pass filter
of the 1st order).
> Transversal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).
Sets the VY Filter constant. Specifying whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the transverse speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the analog interface (low pass filter
of the 1st order).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 143

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

Serial Interface of the Analog Interface
Serial I/O 1 (for Analog Interface)
The following interface types can be parameterized:
Driver Select None (default)/AIS Automatic Ident System or NMEA 0183
(IEC 61162-1/2)
Settings for AIS
> AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice
> Type of AIS Select DEBEG 3400 (default) or Other
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2)
> Baud rate Select 4800 (default) or 38400
> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not connected (default)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
144 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...8 of the Interface Expander
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2

Serial Interfaces 1...8 of the Interface Expander
Serial I/O 1...8 (for Interface Expander only)
Driver Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) / C. Plath (serial
Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro) / ATLAS DOLOG / Lambrecht
(Wind Sensor) / Thies (Wind Sensor) / Bridge Alarm System BAS
40P / Radio Direction Finder / Camera
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1)
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default)
Sets the baud rate for the UART. No other choice available.
> Serial Gyro
> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is
connected.
This parameter has no effect on the gyro display (for the Interface
Expander or Analog Interface).
> Position
The following items appear only if Position has been defined with
Connected.
> Channel Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position
Sensor 1).
Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in
m relative to the system position.
Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in
message.
GLL message.
sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 145

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05

sensor.
> Speed
VHW is connected.
Connected.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps. (default = 0.0 m).
Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps. (default = 0.0 m).
Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.
> Time
connected.
Connected:
> Depth
The following item appears only if Depth has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Depth Value Select Below Transducer (default) or Below Keel
Below Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT
or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.
> Wind
> Wind Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
The following item appears only if Wind has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Wind Sensor 1 (default), no other choice available.
> Weather
> Weather Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
The following item appears only if Weather has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Weather Sensor 1 (default), no other choice available.
> Route
146 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05

> Route Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via
NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not Connected if a
CHARTPILOT is connected to the system.
The following items appear only if Route has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4
> Catalog At this input field the catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor
must be entered. The name will be used by the operator. It is advis-
able to enter the name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.
> TRACKPILOT Track Mode Select Disable or Enable
If it is sure, that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satis-
factory, it can be admitted for the use as a track for the TRACK-
PILOT.
Settings for C.Plath (serial gyro) (not available for Analog Interface)
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 (default), no other choice available
Settings for Anschuetz (serial gyro) (not available for Analog Interface)
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 (default), no other choice available
Settings for DOLOG:
Defines whether an DOLOG 2x is connected. If the parameter is
set to Connected, the following parameters must be defined:
> Channel Select Log1 (default) or Log2.
Sensor position distance (longitudinal) in m relative to the system
position.
Sensor position distance (transversal) in m relative to the system
position.
> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log or 2 Axis Log.
The following items appear only if Depth has been defined with
Connected:
> Channel Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Settings for Lambrecht (Wind Sensor):
> Channel Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Settings for Thies (Wind Sensor):
> Channel Wind sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 147

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05

> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) Select Connected or Not Connected
The following item appears only, if Bridge Alarm System 1 has been
defined with Connected.
> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier Select a number from 1...31
The identifier usually corresponds to the number of Bridge Alarm
System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20 Alarm
inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes. The
Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs each.
Settings for Radio Direction Finder
> Radio Direction Finder RDF 1 is the only available choice.
Channel of this Radio Direction Finder.
> Type of Radio Direction Finder Select Unknown or Plath ARCUS M (default)
Settings for Camera
> Camera 1 is the only available choice
> Type of Camera Select Unknown or Zeiss (default, the NMEA messages RSD and
OSD are used)
5.10.8.4 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM-Expander

Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM-Expander
Serial I/O 1...5
Driver Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) /AIS Automatic
Identification System / Bridge Alarm System BAS 40P
The serial I/O 5 can be used as NMEA interface only.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1)
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.
Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.
> Position
The following items appear only if Position has been defined with
Connected.
> Channel Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position
Sensor 1).
Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in
Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in
148 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05

message.
GLL message.
sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.
sensor.
> Speed
VHW is connected.
Connected.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps. (default = 0.0 m).
Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps. (default = 0.0 m).
Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.
> Time
connected.
Connected:
> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output
messages.
> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output TTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 149

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05

> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-
1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:
> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) Select Connected or Not Connected
The following item appears only, if Bridge Alarm System 1 has been
defined with Connected.
> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier Select a number from 1...31
The identifier usually corresponds to the number of Bridge Alarm
System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20 Alarm
inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes. The
Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs each.
5.10.9 AIS
See section Section 5.3 from page 106 on for the connection and configuration of an AIS.
150 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10.10 NACOS
(Not available for standard radar systems)

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/SPEEDPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACK-
PILOT Electronics Unit and in the IMB. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the param-
eters from the TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit automatically and compares them with the parameters
which are stored in the IMB. If the parameters are different, a dialogue box appears and it must be
decided, whether the set of parameters from the IMB is to be loaded into the TRACKPILOT or vice versa.
ztr1_188.gif
Fig. 5-12 TRACKPILOT configuration manager
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the
Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. While setting-to-work the settings should be performed
in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menus and
every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT immedi-
ately, and so the Service menus should be used during trials.
For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/SPEEDPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE) see the
service manual of the TRACKPILOT.
5.10.11 Planning System

> Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets
Select the Indicator from which the CHARTPILOT should get the ARPA targets.
> Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT
Select True or False (default)
Defines, whether the sensor information is transferred to the CHARTPILOT via Ethernet.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 151

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> C-Map Identifier

Displays the C-Map Identifier of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.
> ARCS User Permit Number
Displays the ARCS User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-
PILOT.
> ENC User Permit No.
Displays the ENC User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-
PILOT.
> Security Unique Identifier (UID)
Displays the status information for the UID (UID existing, date and time of storage).
5.10.12 Conning
The Conning functions are available at a CHARTRADAR 1000 or MULTIPILOT 1000.

By means of these parameters the display of the conning data is configured. To use the Conning func-
tionalities, some settings are necessary at the CHARTPILOT. See the technical manual of the CHART-
PILOT (NACOS xx-4) for further information. The parameters are available only if the parameter
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration > Conning has been set to Available. If
no correct CHARTRADAR Function License Key has been entered, the Conning Display does not work.
Conni ng
Configure > Conning
Azimuth Thruster Parameters
> Number of Azimuth Thrusters Select None/1 Azimuth Thruster Stern/1 Azimuth Thruster Bow/2
Azimuth Thrusters/3 Azimuth Thrusters/4 Azimuth Thrusters.
The following items appear depending on the setting of the param-

eter Number of Azimuth Thruster. If Number of Azimuth
Thruster has been set to None, no parameter is available.
> Add a Label (Number) to the Select No (default) or Yes.
Thruster Display The number is added automatically and cannot be edited.
> Add a Propeller to the Thruster Select No (default) / Pushing Propeller or Pulling Propeller.
Display Defines what kind of symbol for a propeller is added to the thruster
display.
> Thruster Angle Display Mode Select 0 to 360° (default) or ±180°.
Defines whether the thruster angle is displayed in a range of
0...360° or ±180°.
> Thruster Angle Display Color Select No (default)/Red if Angle & RPM are positive/Green if Angle
& RPM are positive
Defines whether the thruster angle values are displayed colored
and the display color for positive values of Angle and RPM.
> Colored Angle Display Limit Enter a value in 1° steps (default = 1°).
Input of the thruster angle at which the colour changes from white
to red/green if the parameter Thruster Angle Display Coloured is
set to Yes.
> Scale RPM Bar Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM).
The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable
maximum value.
> Scale Orientation Select 0° up (default) or 180° up.
Defines the orientation o the azimuth thruster scale.
> Maximum Thruster Power Enter a value between 0.10 and 100.00 MW
Defines the maximum value of the scale.
152 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Conning (cont. )
Configure > Conning
Shaft Parameters
> Number of Shafts Select None (default)/1 Shaft/2 Shafts
The following items appear only if the parameter Number of Shafts
has not been defined with None.
> Scale RPM Bar Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM)
The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable
maximum value.
> Scale Rudder Display Select 25° (default)/50°/75°
The scaling of the "Rudder Display" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
> Number of Clutches Select None (default)/1 Clutch....6 Clutches
Defines the number of clutches.
> Clutch Label Select Yes or No
Defines whether the clutch symbols are shown with a label or not.
> Display Power Bar Select Yes or No
Defines whether the power bar is displayed or not.
> Display Pitch Bar Select Yes or No
Defines whether the pitch bar is displayed or not.
Scale Off Course Bar Select Auto (default)/5°/15°/30°/50°
The scaling of the display "Off Course Deviation Bar" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Off Track Bar Select Auto (default)/50 m/100 m/250 m/500 m/1000 m
The scaling of the "Off Track Deviation Bar (XTD)" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar Select 10 kt/15 kt/20 kt/25 kt (default)/30 kt/35 kt/40 kt
The scaling of the "Longitudinal Scale Bar" (longitudinal speed) is
defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.
Display Power Bar Select MW Scale (default) or % Scale
Scaling of the "Power Bar" with % or MW.
Scale Shaft Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/
30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Shaft Power Bar" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
Generator Parameters
Number of Generators Select None/1 Generator...6Generators
The following item appears depending on the setting of the param-

eter Number of Generators. If Number of Generators has been
set to None, no parameter is available.
> Scale Generator Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/
30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Generator Power Bar" is defined by selection of
the suitable maximum value.
Availability of Additional Displays
> Display Weather Select On or Off
Defines, if an additional, individual weather display is available
> Display Draught Select On or Off
Defines, if an additional, individual draught display is available
> Display Consumption Select On or Off
Defines, if an additional, individual consumption display is available
> Display Generator Power 1 Select On or Off
Defines, if an additional, individual generator power display is avail-
able (Norcontrol interface)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 153

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Conni ng ( cont. )
Configure > Conning
able (analog and ISL interface)
> Remaining Power Displayed Select Yes or No (default)
as Used Power Defines, if the analog input for the remaining power is interpreted
as input for the used power.
able (NMEA interface)
Displacement Table The displacement table should be used only, if the values for the
displacement have been calculated by the yard. If no values are
available, the table should not be filled in.
> Draught 1...10 Set the draught values in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m)
> Displacement 1...10 Set the displacement value to the corresponding draught value in
1 t steps (default = 0 t)
Squat Coefficient The squat coefficient should be filled in only, if the value has been
calculated by the yard. If no value is available, the default value 1.5
must be used.
5.10.13 ECDIS
The ECDIS menu is available only if at least one MULTIPILOT 1000 has been defined in the System
Layout menus.
ECDI S
Configure > ECDIS > Chart Database
ENC Database
> ENC Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the ENC database is available
ARCS Database
> ARCS Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the ARCS database is available
C-Map CM93/2 Database
> C-Map CM93/2 Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the C-Map database is available
C-Map CM93/3 Database
> C-Map CM93/3 Database Select Yes (default) or No
Direct ENC Database
> Direct ENC Database Select Yes (default) or No
Own Database
> Own Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the Own database is available
5.10.14 VDR
See section Section 5.4 from page 110 on for the connection and configuration of a VDR.
154 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.11 Service Menu
5.11 Service Menu
The Service register offers the possi-

bility of making adjustments while the
radar is in operation. The settings which
can be made by means of the
Configure register are the basic
settings. Tree
For the first-time setting-to-work it is
necessary to keep to a particular
order when making the adjustments.
The order is shown in Section 6 on
page 177.
The tree shows all available submenus.
By clicking on a + symbol the tree is
expanded and the + becomes a -. By
ztr1_135.gif
clicking on -, the tree is compressed

again.
Service menu
To make the complete PPI visible for measurements and

adjustments, the main window of the System Maintenance
Manager is closed if a submenu has been selected. A dialogue
box is opened on the right-hand side of the screen. This
dialogue box contains an input field for the parameter value(s)
and a display field which shows important existing settings and
measurement values. By means of the list box the parameter Display field
must be selected which is to be adjusted.
To return to the System Maintenance Manager, this dialogue
box must be closed. Input fields
Parameter
selection
ztr1_136.gif
Dialogue box for transceiver adjustments

(example MBS)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 155

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11 Service Menu Technical Manual
5.11.1 Indicator
Monitor Adjust
Depending on the version, the monitor can be adjusted by means of
an on-screen display. The size of the monitor is displayed. With the
buttons Up and Down, first the OSD menu of the monitor is opened,
then the parameter can be selected. With + and - the values can be
set. Depending on the radar version, the monitors and the handling of
their OSD menus are different. Some types are equipped with a switch
"OSM / RS232". If it is necessary to operate the monitor with its own
buttons or to adjust "Brilliance", the switch must be set to "OSM". To
be able to operate the on-screen menus by means of the radar service
menus, the switch must be set to "RS232".
The monitor AZ 3040 cannot be operated by means of an OSD menu.
The monitor AZ 3058 cannot be operated by means of the Monitor
Adjust menus. The operating elements of the monitor itself must be
used.
ztr1_137.gif
Monitor Adjust dialogue box
Check RSC Adjust

The RSC adjust by means of the Check RSC Adjust menu is explained in Section 4.5.4.1 on page 62.
Check Alarm IO
To check the function of the alarm relay, click on the buttons. The colour of the
activated buttons changes and the selected relay is activated.
The correct operation of the relays can be measured at the terminals of the
Interconnection Board.
The Indicators Ack Buzzer (In 1) and External Input (In 2) show, whether an
alarm signal is active at the alarm inputs of the IMB.
ztr1_187.gif
156 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O Monitor

By means of the Serial I/O monitor the data
communication between the 4 serial inter-
faces of the IMB or the 5 serial interfaces of
the COM Expander and the connected ship’s
sensors can be monitored and saved on a
diskette. To monitor the serial interfaces of
the COM Expander, the Indicator to which
the COM Expander is connected must be the
sensor master. The interface driver must
have been configured beforehand (Section
5.10.7.2). The interface must be selected by
means of the listbox. By means of the
buttons Rx and Tx it must be selected
whether the outgoing or the incoming signals
ztr1_077.gif
are monitored. If the button Start is clicked

the data is read and displayed in the display
field. If the button Clear is clicked, the display Serial I/O Monitor
field is cleared. The protocol can be saved to
a diskette by clicking on Save to Disk. Existing protocol files on the diskettes will be overwritten.
Software Update
The system’s software is updated by means of a diskette drive. Five
diskettes are needed:
- Flash Update Facility Boot Disk
- Flash Update Distribution Disk 1 of 4
To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry
out the instructions on the screen. After the boot diskette has been
inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The
boot sequence is modified automatically for a diskette boot (no DIP
switches need to be set for the boot sequence). All other diskettes are
requested by messages on the screen.
ztr1_138.gif
If the radar is equipped with a monitor AZ3040, the monitor displays

noise for a few seconds after the restart, until it is (automatically)
switched into the graphics mode and the next disk is requested.
After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to normal operation and the radar
must be switched off and then on again to reboot.NOTE:
- The TCU and the Analog Interface must not be updated at the same time from different Indicators.
This could cause problems on the CAN Bus and the TCU could be set into an undefined status (must
be exchanged in this case).
- See Section 8.5 on page 215 for important information about the software update and the RSC
≥Rev. 04.
- In a NACOS, the software versions of all components must belong to one NACOS software version.
See the product notes for further information about SW-upgrade kits.
ARPA Adjust
The ARPA adjust by means of the ARPA Adjust menu is explained in Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 157

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
RKE Software Update

by means of this function, it is possible to update the software of the Remote Keyboard Electronics (KBC
pcb GE3048G200 with software version A or newer. For the determination of the software version see
Section 5.9.2). The instructions on the screen must be followed.
Insert the update diskette and click on OK to start the update or click on Cancel to leave the update
routine. If the update is started, every connected remote keyboard electronics is checked for the current
software version. An update is performed only, if necessary.
NOTE:
The update lasts about 8 minutes for the Master Remote Keyboard Electronics. After the master has
been updated, the slaves are updated automatically. The update for each slave takes about 35 s. It is
definitely advisable not to use any Operating Unit in the system during the update. If the system is oper-
ated by means of the Operating Units during the update it may happen, that the update of the remote
keyboard electronics currently being updated is restarted.
In case of any failure during the update the message Software Update failed at RKE=x will be displayed
and the update must be repeated.
The Display Electronics Unit must be restarted after the successful software update. The correct software
update can be checked by means of the Telemonitoring Data menu.
RKE Settings
By means of the RKE (remote keyboard electronics) Settings the type of monitor connected can be
defined. This is necessary for the monitor driver settings (important for ECDIS) and the OSD monitor
adjustments (function Monitor Adjust) which can be performed also at the slave Operating Unit.
All RKEs of the system can be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit. The RKE to be parame-
terized must be selected from the Selected RKE listbox. The RKE which is connected directly to the
operated Electronics Unit, usually the master, is marked by means of a "*".
The display window below the listbox shows the number and the status of the selected RKE.
The type of monitor can be selected by means of the Monitor Type (Control Protocol) listbox. If the
parameter Other types (Use RKE DIP Switch) is selected, the settings of the DIP switch on the RKE
pcb are valid. Any other setting (including the setting None) of the listbox overwrites the setting of the
DIP switch. For further information on the DIP switch see the technical manual of the remote keyboard
electronics.
NOTE:
In master/slave installations the RKE of the master must be configured with None and the DIP switch
must be set to "no monitor", because the serial interface of the monitor is usually connected to the Display
Electronics Unit and not to the RKE. See also the parameter Monitor Control Interface.
Start Program from Diskette

Starts maintenance/service programs from a diskette if available.
158 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.2 Transceiver
The Transceiver Adjust settings replace many adjustments which can also be performed by means of
the potentiometers on the Modulator or TCU boards. Some of these adjustments can only be performed
for the 1000 series and not for the RADAR 9xxx series.
5.11.2.1 Setting-to-Work
> Headmarker
Display field: Antenna Speed
Input field: Headmarker correction angle ±180° (1000 series) or ±10°
(9xxx series) in 0.1° steps.
The headmarker of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted in 0.1° steps by means of the
↑↓ buttons. To store the values, click Save. The headmarker cannot be adjusted mechanically. It
can be adjusted in the complete range (±180°) by software.
Adjust the headmarker by modifying the value in the input field. A target at a distance of 2...4 NM
must appear on the PPI with the same azimuth as detected visually. The headmarker adjustment
must be performed with the Scanner in both speeds if available (dual speed Antenna Unit is
optional).
> Trigger Delay
Display field: No information available
Input field: Value for the Trigger Delay 0...150
The trigger delay of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted by means of the ↑↓ buttons.
To store the values, click Save. The trigger delay performs the correction of the range error. Adjust
the trigger delay by modifying the value in the input field. Targets at a known distance must be
displayed with the correct distance on the PPI. If no targets are available, straight lines near the ship
must be displayed correctly.
> STC Delay
Display field: Range, Status
Input field: STC Delay
The STC delay adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. The radar must be switched on and the SEA Indicator must be set to 0%. Adjust the STC
delay so that the main bang largely disappears but the video starts immediately after the main bang.
If the main bang is too large, the antenna matching and the RF installation must be checked, and
corrected if necessary.
> Video MBS (1000 series only)
Display field: Range, Status
Input fields: MBS Amplitude, MBS Delay
Before the Video MBS adjustment is started, the trigger delay and STC delay adjustments must have
been performed. The main bang should be mostly suppressed by the STC adjustment. If the main
bang is still visible, it can be suppressed with the Video MBS adjust.
The video MBS adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. Set SEA to 100% and adjust the center area without loss of targets.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 159

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> PMA Display (1000 series only)

Display field: No information available
Input fields: PMA Display Start and PMA Display End
Defines the sector for the measurement of the Performance Monitor Amplitude. The default values
are 270°...90°. These values depend on the alignment of the Gearbox. The sector should be defined
as 180° wide. It must start with the azimuth value 90° before the azimuth of the beam when it lies
at right angles over the plastic window in the outer surface of the Gearbox. The window covers the
microwave detector diode. The sector must end 90° behind the beam azimuth.
ztr1_172.eps
Fig. 5-13 PMA Display
160 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> PM Adjust (1000 series only)

Before the PM settings are made, it is necessary to adjust the performance monitor oscillator. For
TCUs ≤Rev. 04 this must be performed by means of a potentiometer as described in the description
of the TCU in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. Newer TCUs allow the adjust-
ment by means of the input field PM Tuning as described below.
Display field No information available
Input field: PM Tuning (only TCU ≥Rev. 05), buttons for PMV Adj and PMA Adj
Description for a TCU ≥Rev. 05
The function PM Tuning is available only if the TCU is of a type ≥Rev. 05.
1. Performance Monitor Oscillator
- Select the 24 NM range.
- Switch AFC OFF!
- Tune the video display to the maximum.
- Switch the performance monitor on.
- Generate a strong noise by means of GAIN.
- Adjust the PM signal by means of alternating adjustment of PM Tuning and reduction of
GAIN (reduce the brightness of the inner circle by means of GAIN until it is only faintly
visible and tune it to maximum brightness by means of PM Tuning; repeat as long as the
circle can be made visible by means of PM Tuning).
2. Start the measurement of the performance monitor video level by clicking on PMV Adj.
3. Performance Monitor Amplitude:
- If possible, switch off all other radars.
- Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.
Description for a TCU with a Revision status ≤Rev. 04
1. Perform the performance monitor oscillator tuning as described in the tables of the description
of the TCU in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
2. Switch performance monitor on.
3. Performance Monitor Video Level:
- The PM Video must be visible. Adjust with GAIN.
- Adjust pm video to maximum by means of TUNE (the inner circle must have the maximum
diameter).
- The noise must be clearly visible. Adjust with GAIN.
- Adjust with TUNE to maximum performance monitor video brightness.
- Reduce GAIN until the PM video is only faintly visible (the inner circle seems to consist of
noise and the edge starts to disappear).
- Adjust the inner circle with TUNE voltage to maximum brightness (the circle will not reach
a bright yellow).
- Start the measurement by clicking on PMV Adj.
4. Performance Monitor Amplitude:
- If possible, switch off all other radars.
- Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.
PMA (16 NM)
PMV (6 NM)
ztr1_025.eps
Fig. 5-14 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 161

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation)
> Magnetron
Note:
If the Modulator has been changed, a
temporary setting for the magnetron
current must be performed as soon as
the radar is switched on again. Follow
the instructions for the exchange of
the Modulator in the technical manual
of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
Note:
Before an adjustment or a check of the
magnetron current, the Transceiver
should have been working for about
20 min in the 12 NM range.
Software Version
Note: ≥ 3.1 only
The values of heater and bias are
displayed only with software version
≥2.0 and TCU ≥Rev. 05 and Transceiver
power supply ≥Rev. 03 and Modulator
NG 3028 G 203 ≥Rev. 01 or Modulator
ztr1_653.gif
NG 3028 G 206 ≥Rev. 02.
Software Version 2.6.7 and ≥3.0.5:

The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected,
the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start the
adjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is
shown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button.
Usually it is not necessary and definitely not advisable to modify the values of Imag1, Imag2
and Pulse Length Control manually when the automatic adjustment has been performed. All
ranges should be checked. Only when in ranges ≤1.5 NM the value of Actual Current is below
5 A and/or the display of the targets is not satisfactory, the pulse length can be increased care-
fully step by step. If the value of Actual Current is higher than 11 A in the 0.75 NM and 1.5 NM
range, the pulse length can be decreased. Manual modifications must be saved.
Software version ≥2.6 and TCU software version G or newer:
The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected,
the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start the
adjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is
shown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button.
Software Version ≤2.4.x:
The adjustment of the magnetron current must be performed in the ranges 12 NM, 6 NM, 3 NM
and 1.5 NM. For the Modulator NG3028G205 ≥Rev. 03 the value for the 1.5 NM range must be
filled in manually with the values that have been measured for the 12 NM range. Do not start
the measurement with the Start button in this case.
162 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
The values for the ranges below 1.5 NM are automatically determined and stored during the
adjustments for the ranges mentioned above. Start with the largest range and keep to the given
sequence. After the range has been set, click on Start to start the adjustment. The result of the
adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is shown. Follow the instructions of
the comment. If the values are correct, click on Save and continue with the next range.
Note:
For short pulse lengths (ranges ≤1.5 NM) a deviation of ±30% between actual and nominal magne-
tron current is tolerable. For Modulators NG3026G206 Rev. 04 or newer a deviation of -60%...+30%
is tolerable in ranges of ≤3.0 NM.
CAUTION
Check the magnetron current (Actual) while modifying Imag1 manually.
The "Actual" value should not exceed the "Nominal" value.
The values of the heating voltage and the bias are shown for information only. The displayed heating
voltage is different from the voltage which can be measured at the Modulator. See the description of the
Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for information in detail.
For RADAR 9xxx Transmitters:
Display fields: Pulse, Preset, Indict.
Input field: Actual
For the RADAR 9xxx Transceivers, the value Actual in the display field must be adapted to the value
Preset.
> Tuning Offset (1000 series only)
Display field No information available
Input field: Tuning Offset
To adjust the tuning offset, switch the radar on and
select the 12 NM range. Set the operator’s Tuning
indicator on the display to 50%. ztr1_165.cdr
By modifying the tuning offset value in the input field,

the tuning indication bar must be adjusted to maximum length.
Tuning Indication Gain
If modifications of the tuning adjustment causes only small deflections of the tuning indicator, it might
be difficult to find the maximum adjustment. In this case it is possible to increase the deflections by
means of a higher gain.
The following values proved to be practical:
Range 0.75 NM = 3, range 1.5 NM = 1.5, ranges 3, 6, 12 NM = 1.0
Default value is 1.0.
> STC Compensation (1000 series with software version ≥2.0 only)
Input fields: Amplitude, Length
Note:
The item STC Compensation is displayed only if a software version ≥2.0
is installed and the TCU is of a type ≥Rev. 05.
To adjust the STC Compensation, select the 12 NM range. Set SEA to maximum and adjust GAIN
in a way that the noise is clearly visible.
The default settings are:
Amplitude: 30
Length (X-Band): 60
Length (S-Band): 40
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 163

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Check that, at the end of the STC-effected area, neither a noise ring nor a dark ring appears. If
necessary, correct by means of Length.
5.11.2.3 Magnetron Hours (1000 series only)
The function Magnetron hours shows the working hours of the magnetron. The counter can be reset by
means of the Reset button.
5.11.2.4 Antenna Information (1000 series only)
The function Antenna Info shows information about the rotary frequency of the Scanner. It displays the
status of the radar, the existing speed and pulse count of the Scanner, and the minimum and maximum
pulse counts.
5.11.3 Interswitch
By means of the button Input Adjust On/Off

the Interswitch (PCI) can be switched to the
service mode for the adjustment of the TVA
inputs. This function can be used only if an
Interswitch has been configured in the
system layout. If no Interswitch is available,
the message Not configured appears in the
data field.
If the Interswitch has been switched to the
service mode, a corresponding warning
message appears on all Indicators. For the
adjustments of the Interswitch, see the Inter-
switch service manual.
ztr1_145.gif
Interswitch menu
164 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.4 NACOS

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/SPEEDPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACK-
PILOT Electronics Unit and in the IMB. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the param-
eters from the TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit automatically and a small dialogue box is opened next to
the PPI.
For the TRACKILOT the parameters are split up into the groups User
Parameters, System Parameters and Special Parameters. By means of
the check box Trial Run, a trial program is started which helps to determine
the controller coefficients.
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT, SPEEDPILOT and ENGINE INTER-
FACE can be performed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service
menus. During setting-to-work the settings should be performed in the
Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not
hidden by any menus and every modification of the parameters performed in
the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT immediately and so these menus
ztr1_189.cdr
should be used during trials.

For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/SPEEDPILOT/
ENGINE INTERFACE) see the service manual of the TRACKPILOT. TRACKPILOT service menu
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 165

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12 Commissioning Data Menu Technical Manual
5.12 Commissioning Data Menu
NOTE:
It is advisable to parameterize the entire system always at one and the same Display Electronics Unit
and to transfer the parameters to the other Display Electronics Units subsequently. In this way it can be
prevented, that an incomplete set of parameters is transferred to a Display Electronics Unit with an
complete set of parameters which is overwritten then.
Config Transfer
Beginning with the software version 2.2 it is possible to store parameters which have been entered on
one Indicator to a second Indicator (or to all Indicators) without use of diskettes. In this way it is possible
to parameterize all radars (except of Radar 9xxx Indicators) of a system at one Indicator. By means of
the function Transmit the parameters can be transferred to the selected Indicator via CAN Bus (or stored
on a diskette). By means of the function Receive it is possible to load the parameters from a selected
Indicator (or to load them from a diskette).
The function Transmit writes the files
R10k.sam (configuration file),
R10kcom.rep (commissioning report),
version.txt (list of versions; only if a
backup onto a floppy disk is
performed) and errorhist.txt (list of
errors; only if a backup onto a floppy
disk is performed, only with software
version ≥2.2.3) onto a diskette or
stores it to the selected Indicator. By
clicking on Transfer the backup of the
files starts.
If the files version.txt and/or
errorhist.txt have not been generated
so far, this is performed automatically
when the transfer is started.
ztr1_146.gif
Existing files on a diskette are over-

written (a warning will appear). When
changes in the configuration have Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Transfer
been performed the parameters should
be saved on the "Configuration Backup" diskettes.
NOTE:
If the configuration file R10k.sam has been sent to another Indicator,
ztr1_141.gif it does not automatically replace the existing configuration of the
Indicator. A warning appears at that Indicator. This warning cannot
be acknowledged. The Indicator must be restarted to take over the new configuration and to acknowledge
the warning.
166 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.12 Commissioning Data Menu
The function Receive loads the config-

uration files from the selected Indicator
or from the diskette to the operated
Indicator. It must be made sure that
these parameters are valid. Click on
Transfer to start the restorage of the
files.
The parameters are not taken over
automatically. The warning New Indi-
cator Config File appears. This
warning cannot be acknowledged. To
take over the parameters and to
acknowledge the warning the Indicator
must be restarted.
ztr1_148.gif
Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Receive
Service Report
It is important to note which work has
been done at which time. The service
report has to be filled in after each item
of repair or maintenance work. Click on
Service Report to view the service
reports which have been filled in so far.
ztr1_147.gif
Commissioning Data menu
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 167

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.13 Motherboard BIOS Settings Technical Manual
5.13 Motherboard BIOS Settings
The following instructions are valid for the motherboards Tekram S3ZX-A, DFI CA61, DFI CB61 and
DFI CA64. If different motherboards are used, this section will be extended.
NOTE:
The BIOS menus are not visible if a monitor AZ 3040 is used. In this case any standard PC monitor must
be connected to perform the BIOS settings. To perform the BIOS settings a PC keyboard with a PS/2
connector must be connected at the Display Electronics Unit instead of the Radar Keyboard.
5.13.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu
It is necessary to connect a PC keyboard with

a PS/2 connector to the motherboard. Other-
wise it is not possible to operate the BIOS
Setup menu.
The keyboard must be connected by means of
the PS/2 connector in the same way as the
Radar Keyboard (see Section 4.5.3 on page 53
ztr1_100.jpg
or Section 4.5.10 on page 76).

PWR (JP9), Tekram S3ZX-A
If the radar is equipped with a Radar Keyboard,
this must be disconnected beforehand.
1. Connect the keyboard as described
above.
2. The motherboard has a soft power switch.
This switch is enabled in the BIOS settings
ztr1_173.jpg
of a new board or a board which is config-

ured with the default settings (e.g. after ATX-SW, DFI CA61/CB61
battery exchange). In this case, close Fig. 5-15 Soft power switch of the motherboards
PWR (Tekram S3ZX-A) or ATX-SW (DFI
CA61/CB61/CA64) with the aid of a
jumper, switch on the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor power switch and remove
the jumper. With the BIOS settings described below, the soft power switch will be disabled and from
then on, the system can be started without the jumper. If the system starts without the use of the
jumper, the BIOS is not configured with the default settings.
3. While the system is starting up, press Del until the BIOS Setup menu appears.
NOTE:
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started by means of the monitor power switch. If the
BIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start when the monitor is switched on.
5.13.2 Procedure
To set the correct parameters, first load the default settings and then modify only the parameters which
are different from the default settings.
In the following description only the parameters which have to be modified are mentioned. All other
parameters must not be modified from their default values.
168 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.13 Motherboard BIOS Settings
5.13.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus
The operation of the BIOS Setup menus is described by means of the help function of the software and/
or help texts which are displayed on the screen dependent on the selected submenu or parameter. The
operation of the BIOS Setup menus might be different for the various Motherboards.
For the navigation in the menus the keys PgUp, PgDn, the cursor keys and the Enter key must be used.
Some entries must be confirmed by means of the Y key. If the keyboard which is used for the parame-
terization is not a US-version, it might be possible, that the Y key is not at the correct position. In this
case, the button has to be used which is at the position of the Y key on a standard US-PC-keyboard.
After the values have been modified, the modifications must be saved before the BIOS Setup menus are
left. The system is then rebooted automatically.
5.13.4 Parameters
5.13.4.1 Motherboard Tekram S3ZX-A
Loading the Default Settings

Select LOAD SETUP DEFAULTS with the cursor keys, press ENTER and confirm.
All parameters are now set to the default values. The parameters which have to be set differently from
the default values are described in the following tables.
Parameters which have to be set differently from the Default Settings

First set the actual time and date (UTC). Then modify the following parameters in the submenus:
BIOS Settings for TEKRAM S3ZX-A
Submenu Parameter Setting
Standard CMOS Setup
HARD DISKS TYPE - Primary Master Auto
HARD DISKS MODE - Primary Master Auto
HARD DISKS TYPE - Primary Slave None
HARD DISKS TYPE - Secondary Master Auto
HARD DISKS MODE - Secondary Master Auto
HARD DISKS TYPE - Secondary Slave None
Drive A 1.44M, 3.25 in
Halt On All, But Disk/Key
BIOS FEATURES SETUP
Boot Virus Detection Disabled
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled
Boot Sequence A, C
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP
ACPI function Disabled
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 169

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
BIOS Settings for TEKRAM S3ZX-A

PCI/PNP CONFIGURATION
Onboard Sound Chip Disabled
Assign IRQ For USB Disabled
INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS
PWRON After PWR-Fail On
5.13.4.2 Motherboard DFI CA61/CB61

Select LOAD OPTIMAL SETTINGS with the cursor keys and confirm.

BIOS Settings for DFI CA61/CB61
Standard CMOS Setup
HARD DISKS TYPE - Primary Master Auto
HARD DISKS MODE - Primary Master Auto
HARD DISKS TYPE - Primary Slave Auto
HARD DISKS MODE - Primary Slave Auto
HARD DISKS TYPE - Secondary Master Auto
HARD DISKS TYPE - Secondary Slave Auto
BIOS FEATURES SETUP
Boot Virus Warning Disabled
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled
Boot Sequence A, C, SCSI
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled
ACPI function Disabled
PWR Lost Resume State Turn On
USB Controller Disabled
170 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.13 Motherboard BIOS Settings
BIOS Update for the Motherboard DFI CA61

The BIOS of the motherboard DFI CA61 has been updated to the appropriate software release by the
manufacturer. If the update has not been performed, the Display Electronics Unit will not start. The
update should be performed only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s development or
service division.
Determination of the Actual BIOS Version

1. Connect an ASCII keyboard to the Display Electronics Unit.
2. Switch on the Display Electronics Unit and keep the Break key pressed until the copyright message
occurs on the screen (see Section 5.13.1 on page 168).
3. The last line of the screen shows the version of the motherboard and of the BIOS, e.g.:
05/30/2000-693-596A-DD-2A6LGD4FC-00
The date is the date of the BIOS and indicates its version.
The DFI CA61 BIOS Update Disk

The diskette must be used as the boot diskette. It contains the operating system files and a number of
additional files for the update. It is labelled with the imprint:
DFI CA61
BIOS UPDATE
2A6LGD4F
"Date"
Release Version <XXX>
Update Procedure
1. Put the diskette into the diskette driver.
2. Switch off the Display Electronics Unit and set the DIP switch S1-5 of the IMB to OFF to activate the
diskette boot mode.
3. Switch on the Display Electronics Unit. The system will boot from the diskette and the flash program
will be started.
4. A menu appears on the screen and the update procedure is started automatically.
5. When the programming has finished, the screen looks as shown in Figure 5-16.
FLASH MEMORY WRITER V7.61

(C) Award Software 2000 All Rights Reserved
For 693-596A-DD-2A6LGD4FC-0 DATE: 05/30/2000

Flash Type – SST 39SF020 /5V
File Name to Program: 2A6LGD4F.BIN
Verifying Flash Memory – 3FFFF OK
Write OK No Update Write Fail

ztr1_174.cdr
F1 Reset F10 Exit
Fig. 5-16 BIOS update software
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 171

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
6. Press the keys F1 and then Del to restart the BIOS and to call the setup menu.
7. Perform the settings as described in Section 5.13.4.2 on page 170.
8. Switch off the Display Electronics Unit and set the DIP switch S1-5 of the IMB to ON. The BIOS
update is finished and the system can be started.
5.13.4.3 Motherboard DFI CA64

Select LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS with the cursor keys and confirm.

BIOS Settings for DFI CA64
Standard CMOS Features
ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES
Virus Warning Disabled 1)
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled 1)
First Boot Device SCSI
Second Boot Device Floppy
Third Boot Device HDD-0
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled 1)
ADVANCED CHIPSET
FEATURES
OnChip USB Disabled
OnChip Sound 2) Disable
Onboard Legacy Audio 2) Disable
Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3
PWR Lost Resume State Turn On
PnP/PCI Configuration
Resources controlled by Auto (ESCD)
Assign IRQ for USB Disabled
1)
Is default setting, please check
2)
For motherboards with sound option only
172 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.14 Upgrade Kits
5.14 Upgrade Kits
Switch off the power supply to the system before starting the installation process!
5.14.1 Analog Interface Kit
The Analog Interface kit consists of the following components:

- Analog Interface pcb (HS10-SIR10T)
- Mains cable to the Interconnection Board
- Data cable to the Interconnection Board
- 4 screws M3x6
To install the Analog Interface, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. be sure, that the gyro is switched
off! The gyro power supply is independent of the radar power supply. The pcb must be installed in the
Interconnection Box.
The installation steps are as follows:
1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.6 on page 216 for information on how to open the
2. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided; for the position, see Figure on page 76.
3. Connect the power supply cable to J7 of the Interconnection Box and to TB50 (N), TB51 (L1) and
TB52 (PE) of the Analog Interface pcb. See Section 4.5.11 for a description of the Analog Interface
and its terminals.
4. Remove the four jumpers from J5 of the Interconnection Board and connect the data cable to J5 of
the Interconnection Board and to J7 of the Analog Interface.
5. Connect the gyro or log.
6. Close the housing.
7. Start the system and set the parameters for the Analog Interface by means of the System Mainte-
nance Manager. See Section 5.5 from page 111 on for information about the System Maintenance
Manager.
5.14.2 RGB Buffer Kit
The RGB buffer kit consists of the following components:

- RGB buffer pcb (VIBR10T)
- Flat cable to the Interconnection Board
- Monitor cable to the graphics and video processor (GVP) in the Display Electronics Unit
- 4 screws M3x30
- 4 threaded bolts
To install the RGB buffer, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Inter-
connection Box.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 173

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.14 Upgrade Kits Technical Manual

1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.6 on page 216 for information on how to open the
2. Insert the threaded bolts to replace the four screws from the holes shown in Figure 4-20 on page 78.
3. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided, as shown in Figure on page 76.
4. Connect the flat cable to J6 of the interconnection unit and to J1 of the RGB buffer pcb. See Section
4.5.14 for a description of the RGB buffer and its terminals.
5. Connect the monitor cable to J2 of the RGB buffer and to the VGA connector of the GVP unit in the
Display Electronics Unit.
7. Connect the monitor to J3 and the slave monitor to J4 of the RGB buffer.
8. Check the DIP switches for correct 75 Ω termination (usually a termination is not necessary, because
the monitor itself is terminated).
9. Start the system. Further software settings are not necessary.
If more than two monitors are needed, the Video buffer SH3023 must be used.
5.14.3 ARPA Kit
The ARPA kit consists of the following components:

- ARPA pcb
- Data cable to the RSC pcb
To install the ARPA pcb, switch off the radar. The pcb must be installed in the Display Electronics Unit.
1. Open the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 8.6 on page 216 for information on how to open the
housing.
2. The ARPA pcb must be plugged into one of the PCI slots. For the sequence of the pcbs in the PCI
slots see Section 4.5.3.2 on page 55. The sequence depends on the version of the motherboard.
3. Remove the cover of the slot. It is fixed with one screw.
4. Plug the ARPA pcb into the slot and fix it with the screw of the removed slot cover.
5. Connect the flat cable to J2 of the ARPA pcb (see Figure 4-13 on page 64) and to J3 of the RSC
pcb (see Section 4.5.4 on page 58).
6. Start the system and set the new parameters by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See
Section 5.5 from page 111 on for information about the System Maintenance Manager.
7. Perform the necessary hardware adjustments as described in Section 4.5.5 on page 64.
5.14.4 Ethernet Module Kit
The Ethernet module kit consists of the following components:

- LAN network adapter pcb
- BNC termination resistor
- 2 coaxial cables RG58C/U
- 8 screws M2.5x6
- 3 screws M3x8
- Bracket
- BNC T-plug
174 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.14 Upgrade Kits
To install the pcb, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Display Elec-
tronics Unit. Be sure, that a possibly connected gyro is switched off! The gyro power supply is inde-
pendent of the radar power supply.
The installation in steps:
1. Open the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 8.6 on page 216 for information on how to open the
housing.
2. The pcb must be plugged into one of the PCI slots. For the sequence of the pcbs in the PCI slots
see Section 4.5.3.2 on page 55. The sequence depends on the version of the motherboard.
3. Remove the slot cover of the slot. It is fixed with one screw.
4. Plug the pcb into the slot and fix it with the screw of the removed slot cover.
6. The bracket must be installed in the Interconnection Box. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section
8.6 on page 216 for information on how to open the Interconnection Box.
7. Mount the bracket by means of the three screws M3x8 as shown in Figure 5-17. Suitable threaded
bolts are provided in the housing and holes are provided in the Interconnection Board.
Interconnection Unit
ztr1_160.gif
Bracket
Fig. 5-17 Bracket for RG58 / RG213 adaptation
8. The flanges of the BNC cables’ couplings must be fixed to the bracket by means of the M2.5x6
screws.The RG213U cables can now be connected to the couplings.
9. Connect the connectors of the RG58C/U cables to the T-plug of the Ethernet Module. If the Display
Electronics Unit is the last unit at this LAN connection, only one of the RG58C/U coaxial cables is
needed. The BNC termination resistor must be connected to one side of the T-plug.
10. See Section 4.5.9 on page 74 for examples of the LAN cabling.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 175

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.14 Upgrade Kits Technical Manual
176 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e05.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 6 Setting-To-Work Guide
Technical Manual 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow
6 Setting-To-Work Guide
The following instructions will guide you through the first setting-to-work of a RADARPILOT/CHART-
RADAR 1000. The workflow description below does not contain all necessary information for the setting-
to-work but it shows the correct sequence of all settings and adjustments and it gives cross references
to the relevant sections in this manual where you can find information in detail. Settings and adjustments
which must be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software are described by
means of help texts which appear after a few seconds when the cursor is placed over a button or which
can be called by means of the button.
Section 6.2, E x a m p l e o f t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a D u a l I n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a C H A R T P I L O T , shows the most
important configuration parameter settings of a dual installation in detail.
6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow
1. Cabling and Installation

The mechanical installation and the cabling of a radar system must be planned by means of the manu-
facturer’s outline drawings and cabling documents. It is not possible to carry out the installation in a
reasonable way without such preparations. The cabling documents describe most of the possible
versions of the system installation. It is advisable to read the general remarks and the remarks printed
on the plans. The outline drawings also contain drawings of components which may not be included in
the delivery of your system. The installation and cabling work must be performed by competent persons.
2. Preparations
The following checks and settings must be performed before the mains supply to the system is switched
on:
- Check if the mains selector switches are set correctly (Interconnection Board, mains input
unit of the Transceiver).
- Check if the power supply for the Antenna Unit has been connected correctly.
- Set the transceiver No. on the TCU pcb by means of the DIP switch 1. See DIP switch 1
description in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. For a single installation
set the transceiver No. to "1".
- Set the indicator No. on the IMB pcb by means of the DIP switch. See the DIP switch
description on page 69. For a single installation, set the indicator No. to "1". The indicator
No. and transceiver No. of one and the same radar must be identical.
- The correct jumper settings for the X-/S-Band version and the transmitter power should be
set ex works.
3. CAN Bus Termination
For further information, see Section 4.3 on page 46. The radar may work without termination but it
is highly advisable to install the termination to guarantee undisturbed functioning in all environ-
mental conditions.
4. Ethernet Network Termination
If the system has an Ethernet network, the cabling must be performed in accordance with the advice
in Section 4.5.9 on page 74.
Now switch on the power to the system.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 177

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6 Setting-To-Work Guide RADARPILOT 1000
6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow Technical Manual
5. System Layout and Configuration of Subsystems

The system layout of the entire system must be defined by means of the System Maintenance
Manager. The parameterization and subsequent modifications should be performed always at one
and the same Indicator. See Section 5.10 on page 125 for general hints about menu handling procedure,
and see Section 5.10.5 on page 127 for further information about entering the system layout.
If the system layout has been entered, only the relevant subsystems remain in the menu tree and have
to be configured:
- Indicator
Configure each available Radar Indicator/MULTIPILOT 1000 Indicator (e.g. type of
Monitor/Keyboard) by means of the Administration menus. See the hints in Section 5.10.6.
- Transceiver
Configure each Transceiver by loading the factory-defined parameters from the available
TCU’s. This is the precondition for the transceiver adjustment (see 6, T r a n s c e i v e r A d j u s t -
m e n t s ). Do not press the Save button! Otherwise the invalid default parameters of the IMB
will overwrite the parameters of the TCU which have been preset ex works.
Only the following parameters have to be set in the transceiver configuration menu:
- Antenna Position
- Frequency Deviation (if necessary)
- Blanking Sector (if requested)
- Speed Capability single/double
- Antenna Motor Frequency
- Configure the system’s interfaces for the ship’s sensors. Depending on the interface type,
use the menu item Serial Interfaces of the relevant Indicator, and/or Sensor Interfaces.
For further information see Section 5.10.8 on page 140.
- Configure all ship-specific data, especially the system position in the menu Ship Data and
Parameters.
6. Transceiver Adjustments
Use the Service menu to perform the transceiver adjustments. See Section 5.11.2 from page 159
on for further information. All adjustments of the Setting to Work menu have to be performed.
Every adjustment must be stored by means of the Save button. The parameters are stored in the
IMB and in the TCU. Before the performance monitor adjustments can be performed, the RSC pcb
must be adjusted.
7. Indicator Adjustments
The following indicator adjustments have to be performed:
a) RSC pcb Adjustments
- TVA1 Video Amplitude for single and dual installations.
IMPORTANT! For multiple installations the TVA1 video amplitude must be adjusted
at the Interswitch (see the Service Manual Interswitch).
For information, see Section 4.5.4.1 on page 61.
- IMPORTANT! The TVA2 Video Amplitude for dual installations must be adjusted.
- Video Offset
b) ARPA Pcb Adjustments (the ARPA pcb is optional)
- Video Offset
178 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow
- TVA Gain

8. Backup
The parameter settings must be stored on diskettes in duplicate. One copy should stay on the ship
(it can be stored in the technical manual) and one copy must be sent to the manufacturer.
Use the Commissioning Data menu (Config Transfer) to generate the backup. For further infor-
mation see Section 5.12 from page 166 onwards.
9. Dual or Multiple Installations
All Indicators and Transceivers must be configured at one Indicator. From Software Version 2.2 on it is
possible to load and store the parameters directly from one Indicator to another via CAN-Bus (without use
of a backup diskette). This can be performed by means of the function Commissioning Data>Config
Transfer of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.12 on page 166 for further information.
With older software versions it is necessary to configure all other Indicators of the system at one
Indicator as described above and to use one of the backup diskettes which have been generated
in step 8 for data transfer. The backup diskette must be restored at every Indicator of the system.
NOTE:
To avoid mistakes, caused by different parameter settings from different Display Electronics Units, the
entire system must be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit.
All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of a diskette (SW
version ≤2.0) afterwards to the other radars.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 179

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT Technical Manual
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

This example contains the most important parameters for a typical dual installation.
6.2.1 System Diagram
SAM SAM
GEARBOX with GEARBOX with

TRANSCEIVER 1 TRANSCEIVER 2
(S-Band) (X-Band, 8 ft)
CHARTPILOT
WP 1
WP 2
WP 3
LAN
Indicator 1 Indicator 2
Display Display
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit
Radar Scan Converter Radar Scan Converter

AIS
ARPA Electronics Electronics Unit ARPA Electronics
Ethernet Module Ethernet Ethernet Module

Sensor Input
Interface and S1 Interface and
Memory Board S2 Memory Board
TVA1 out
Box TVA1 out Box
LAN
Ethernet Interconnection Ethernet Interconnection
CAN 0, Radar bus
CAN Bus CAN Bus
Interconnection CAN 1, Nav bus Interconnection
1 1
Serial Interface 2 2 Serial Interface
Interconnection 3 3 Interconnection
4 4
Analog Interface Analog Interface
(Sensor Interface 1) Gyro Gyro (Sensor Interface 2)
Log Log
SHIP'S SENSORS
Sensor Interface
Position 2 Sensors with

Position 1 serial RS 422
Log Interface
ztr1_190.eps
Wind
Echograph 9205
Gyro Analog Stepper
Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example)
180 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT
6.2.2 System Layout Menu

Configure System Layout
Indicator Indicator 1 Connected

Indicator 2 Connected
Indicator 3 Not Connected
Transceiver Transceiver 1 Connected

Transceiver 2 Connected
Transceiver 3 Not Connected
Interswitch Not Connected
Sensor Interfaces Sensor Interface 1 Connected

Sensor Interface 2 Connected
NACOS TRACKPILOT Not Connected

ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDP.) Not Connected
This is the NACOS Backup Sys. 2 No
Ethernet LAN One Net
Planning System Connected Planning System 1
AIS Connected to LAN

VDR Not Connected
Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 181

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters)

Configure System / Ship Parameters
Ship Data
Administration
Vessel MS Test
Shipping Company Mustermann
Flag German
Call Sign DACF
Phone 0087X1120079
Fax 0087X1120080
MMSI Number 1) XXX XXX XXX
On/Off Off
IMO Number XXXX XXX
Gyro against Magnetic
Type of Ship Passenger Vessel Compass
Type of Ship coded as No. 69 Gyro against COG of Main
Position Sensor
System Position 2)
Gyro against COG of Redun-
Distance to Bow 10 dant Position Sensor
Distance to Stern 120 Ignore Gyro against COG
Distance to SB 8 above ROT of:
Distance to P 8 Ignore Gyro against COG
below Speed of:
Nominal Speed 20.0 Full sensitivity Gyro against
Acceleration 0.020 COG above speed of:
Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 200°/min
On/Off Off
Position Quality Check Off
Speed against Redundant
Minimum Radius 0.4 NM Speed Sensor
Maximum Radius 3.0 NM Speed against SOG of Main
Gyro Monitoring Position Sensor
Speed Monitoring Speed against SOG of
Redundant Position Sensor
Position Monitoring
On/Off Off
Basic Radar
Position against Redundant
Video Anti Clutter Sea on Position Sensor
ARPA Lost Target w.o. Al. 19.5 NM
AIS Lost Target w.o. Al. 16.0 NM
TB2 Term. 15,16, HM turn Not Connected
Startup Sensor Selection Heading Heading Sensor 1

Speed Log 1 3)
Position Position Sensor 1
Time Position Sensor 1
Time from selected Position Sensor Yes
Differentiated Heading Selected Heading Sensor
Default Depth Depth Sensor 1 1)
Must be entered for AIS!
2) See Figure 6-4 on page 183.
Default Wind Wind Sensor 1 3)BSH does not allow GPS as
Default Weather Manual Weather speed sensor.
Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation
182 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
8m 8m
-4 m 4 m
LT = Log Transducer, defines the System Position

10 m
10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

LT
RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position
- Longitudinal +
-110 m
120 m
-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance

RS Longitudinal to System Position
RX P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance
P1
P2
PAIS PAIS = AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m Distance
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 6-4 System Position
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 183

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator)

Configure Radar Indicator
Indicator 1
Administration Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1000 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3054)
Keyboard RADAR Keyboard
Name Indicator 1
Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec
System Fault Alarm Disable
Dangerous Target Alarm Disable
Lost Target Alarm Disable
Guard Zone Alarm Disable
Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes
CHARTRADAR/MP Function Not Available
CHARTRADAR/MP Identif. Code XXXXXXXXX
CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX
Conning Not Available
Based on Specification IEC 60936-1
Radar PPI Radius Use Default
Monitor Aspect Ratio Use Default
Head-Up PPI Orientation Bow-up (standard)
Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alams to CP Yes
Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled
Double End Ferry No
Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1
184 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial Interfaces
Serial I/O 1
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
Baud Rate 4800
Serial Gyro Not Connected
Position Connected Channel Position Sensor 1
Speed Not Connected Distance Longitudinal - 85
Time Not Connected Distance Transversal -4
Output Sensor Number 1
Depth Not Connected GLL, GGA Selection Pos. from GLL Message
Wind Not Connected Use Speed from Position Sensor No
Weather Not Connected Use Time from Position Senor Yes
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Output OSD OFF
Output MWV OFF
Output ZDA OFF
Output RSD OFF
Output DBT OFF
Output ROT OFF
Output MWD OFF
Output VBW OFF
Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Serial Output used as AIS Navigation Data
Output MTW OFF
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 185

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 2
Baud Rate 4800
Position Not Connected
Speed Connected Channel Log 1
Time Not Connected Distance Longitudinal 0
Output Distance Transversal 0
Depth Not Connected Log Type 1 Axis Log
Wind Not Connected Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant 1
Weather Not Connected Transversal Speed Constant 1
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Output OSD OFF
Output MWV OFF
Output ZDA OFF
Output RSD OFF
Output DBT OFF
Output ROT OFF
Output MWD OFF
Output VBW OFF
Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Serial Output used as Not Defined
Output MTW OFF
186 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Serial I/O 3 Output HDT OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Output TTM OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Output OSD OFF
Serial Gyro Not Connected Output MWV OFF
Position Not Connected Output ZDA OFF
Speed Not Connected Output RSD OFF
Time Not Connected Output DBT OFF
Output Output ROT OFF
Depth Not Connected Output MWD OFF
Wind Connected Output VBW OFF
Weather Not Connected Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Output MTW OFF
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Serial I/O 4 Output VTG OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Output HDT OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Output TTM OFF
Serial Gyro Not Connected Output OSD OFF
Position Not Connected Output MWV OFF
Speed Not Connected Output ZDA OFF
Time Not Connected Output RSD OFF
Output Output DBT OFF
Depth Connected Output ROT OFF
Wind Not Connected Output MWD OFF
Weather Not Connected Output VBW OFF
Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Output MTW OFF
Depth Value Depth Below Transducer
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 187

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Indicator 2 Administration Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1000 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3054)
Keyboard RADAR Keyboard
Name Indicator 2
Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec
System Fault Alarm Disable
Dangerous Target Alarm Disable
Lost Target Alarm Disable
Guard Zone Alarm Disable
Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes
CHARTRADAR Function Not Available
CHARTRADAR Identification Code XXXXXXXXX
Serial Interfaces CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX
Conning Not Available
Based on Specification IEC 60936-1
Radar PPI Radius Use Default
Monitor Aspect Ratio Use Default
Head-Up Display Orientation Bow-up (standard)
Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alams to CP Yes
Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled
Double End Ferry No
188 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 1
Baud Rate 4800
Position Connected Channel Position Sensor 2
Speed Not Connected Distance Longitudinal - 85
Time Not Connected Distance Transversal +4
Output Sensor Number 2
Depth Not Connected GLL, GGA Selection Pos from GLL message
Wind Not Connected Use Speed from Position Sensor No
Weather Not Connected Use Time from Position Senor Yes
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Output OSD OFF
Output MWV OFF
Output ZDA OFF
Output RSD OFF
Output DBT OFF
Output ROT OFF
Output MWD OFF
Output VBW OFF
Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Serial Output used as AIS Navigation Data
Output MTW OFF
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 189

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 2
Baud Rate 4800
Position Not Connected
Speed Connected Channel Log 1
Time Not Connected Distance Longitudinal 0
Output Distance Transversal 0
Depth Not Connected Log Type 1 Axis Log
Wind Not Connected Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant 1
Weather Not Connected Transversal Speed Constant 1
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Output OSD OFF
Output MWV OFF
Output ZDA OFF
Output RSD OFF
Output DBT OFF
Output ROT OFF
Output MWD OFF
Output VBW OFF
Output MHU OFF
Output MMB OFF
Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Output MTW OFF
190 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Output OSD OFF
Serial I/O 3 Output MWV OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Output ZDA OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Output RSD OFF
Serial Gyro Not Connected Output DBT OFF
Position Not Connected Output ROT OFF
Speed Not Connected Output MWD OFF
Time Not Connected Output VBW OFF
Output Output MHU OFF
Depth Not Connected Output MMB OFF
Wind Connected Output MTA OFF
Weather Not Connected Output RTE/WPL OFF
Output MTW OFF
Output GLL OFF

Output DTM OFF
Output VTG OFF
Output HDT OFF
Output TTM OFF
Serial I/O 4 Output OSD OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Output MWV OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Output ZDA OFF
Serial Gyro Not Connected Output RSD OFF
Position Not Connected Output DBT OFF
Speed Not Connected Output ROT OFF
Time Not Connected Output MWD OFF
Output Output VBW OFF
Depth Connected Output MHU OFF
Wind Not Connected Output MMB OFF
Weather Not Connected Output MTA OFF
Output RTE/WPL OFF
Output MTW OFF
Depth Value Depth Below Transducer
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 191

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver)

Configure Radar Transceiver
Transceiver 1 Type of Generation RADAR 1000 S-Band

Additional Information Main Mast
Frequency Deviation 0
Sector Blanking Number of Blanking Sectors None
Antenna Speed Capability Single (Low Speed)
Distance Longitudinal - 80
Distance Transversal 0
Height above Sea Level 28
Beam Width 1.8
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution 415
Antenna Motor Frequency 60 Hz
Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX
Transceiver 2 Type of Generation RADAR 1000 X-Band 12.5 kW

Additional Information Main Mast
Frequency Deviation 0
Sector Blanking Number of Blanking Sectors 1None
Antenna Speed Capability Single (Low Speed)
Distance Longitudinal - 82
Distance Transversal 0
Beam Width 1.0 (8 ft Antenna)
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution 1920
Antenna Motor Frequency 60 Hz
Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX
Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation
192 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.6 Configure (Sensor Interfaces)

Configure Sensor Interfaces
Sensor Interface 1 Analog Interface

Gyro
Heading Sensor Channel 1
Analog Gyro System DC Stepper Positive
Increment 1/6 deg Step
Reference Not Connected
Gyro Input Voltage Low
Error Input Not Connected
Pulse Log
Speed Sensor Channel Log 2
Distance Longitudinal 0.0 All settings for this Log are not relevant, because
Distance Transversal 0.0 "No Pulse Log Connected" has been set.
Sensor Interface Identifier Log
Log Type No Pulse Log Connected
Increment 200 Pulses/NM
Bottom Track (BT) Input Not Connected
Water Track Input (WT) Not Connected
XPM Input Not Connected
YPM Input Not Connected
VX Input Not Connected
VY Input Not Connected
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant 1
Transversal Speed Filter Constant 1
Serial I/O 1
Driver None
Fig. 6-14 Sensor Interface 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 193

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interface 2 Analog Interface

Gyro
Heading Sensor Channel 1
Analog Gyro System DC Stepper Positive
Increment 1/6 deg Step
Reference Not Connected
Gyro Input Voltage Low
Pulse Log
Speed Sensor Channel Log 2
Distance Longitudinal 0.0 All settings for this Log are not relevant, because
Distance Transversal 0.0 "No Pulse Log Connected" has been set.
Sensor Interface Identifier Log
Log Type No Pulse Log Connected
Increment 200 Pulses/NM
Bottom Track (BT) Input Not Connected
Water Track Input (WT) Not Connected
XPM Input Not Connected
YPM Input Not Connected
VX Input Not Connected
VY Input Not Connected
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant 1
Transversal Speed Filter Constant 1
Serial I/O 1
Driver None
Fig. 6-15 Sensor Interface 2 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation
6.2.7 Configure (AIS)
Configure AIS
AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1
Distance of GPS Antenna Longi- -110 m
tudinal (see Figure 6-4)
Distance of GPS Antenna Trans- - 2 m
versal (see Figure 6-4)
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud
Interface S1
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud
Interface S2
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor not connected
Interface S3
Fig. 6-16 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation
194 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.8 Configure (Planning System)

Configure Planning System

Select Radar Indicator for Indicator 1
CHARTPILOT ARPA Targets
Sensor Information via Ethernet True
to CHARTPILOT
Fig. 6-17 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 195

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3 Important Hardware Components Technical Manual
6.3 Important Hardware Components

6.3.1 Radar Scan Converter (RSC) GE3044G201

1 Input signal TVA1 or TVA2 Adjustment of TVA1 video signal ampli-
2 Video/azimuth signal without trigger m e n t s on page 61.
3 n.c.
4 n.c. R202 Function
5 Auto FTC video Adjustment of TVA2 video signal ampli-
6 AZIMUTHSTART active low m e n t s on page 61.
7 AZIMUTHDATA active low
8 Transmitter trigger R203 Function
9 Test TVA signal, internal test generator Adjustment of the TVA signal offset. See
Video Section 4.5.4.1, R S C A d j u s t m e n t s on page
10 Analog GND Offset 61.
LEDs
Function
DS1 green On = video overflow (video offset

adjustment)
DS5 DS6
TP11 R201 R202 J3 DS1 DS2 S1 TP71 TP92 TP112 DS4 DS7 TP141 R203 TP171
DS3 DS8
1
1
ON 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
TP41 TP42 TP72 TP103 TP113/

ztr1_079.jpg
114
Fig. 6-18 RSC pcb
196 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.3 Important Hardware Components
6.3.2 ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T) GE3044G202


1 Jumper on 1/2 = 50 Ω input TVA TVA Gain, see Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66.
No jumper on 1/2 = 75 Ω input, default
2
R102 Function
TVA signal test point. Trigger=+2 V,
Video=-2 V, AZIMUTHSTART=-4 V, Video Adjust according to the description in Section
3 AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, adjustable with R101, Offset 4.5.5.1 on page 66.
see Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66 and Figure
4-11 on page 61.
4 Test-TVA signal, internal test generator
LEDs
Function
DS4 green Flashing = DSP Interrupt
Video Offset Adjustment, see Section
DS4 red 4.5.5.1.
DS1 DS3
TP11 R101 J2 DS2 DS4 TP61 R102 TP71 DS5
1
1 1
1
1
1 1 ON
TP22 TP21 TP42 TP41 TP62 TP131 S1

ztr1_063.jpg
Fig. 6-19 ARPA pcb
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 197

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3.3 Interface and Memory Board (IMB) GE3044G205

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi- Switch No. DIP Function

cator Number Switch
On=closed=0; off=open=1 4 3 2 1 S1/5...8 ON OFF
Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On Software Version ≥2.0
(Settings for Software Version 1.3: see page 83)
Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off
Boot from diskette drive
Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On Boot from IMB flash (the software update
5
memory (default) routine is started while
Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off booting).
Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On Monitor resolution Monitor resolution
6
All other settings are not admissible 1024x768 1280x1024
ON S1 Monitor frequency
7 72 Hz Monitor frequency 60 Hz
1 8 8 Normal operation Service Mode On 1)

(default)
1) See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e I M B on page 71.
Settings for the different Monitor Types

(valid for Software Version ≥2.0)
Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7
AZ3040G0xx Off Off AZ3058G0xx" 1) Off On AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off
AZ3054G0xx On Off AZ3063G041/50 Off Off AZ3065G040 Off Off
AZ3053G0xx" 1) Off On AZ3056G04x Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off
AZ3069G040 Off Off
1) Recommended settings. These Monitors are "multisync" types and can be operated with all other settings, too.
CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2 TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1
Jumper on 1/2 = CAN Bus terminated
TP162 1/2 No jumper on 1/2 = CAN Bus not terminated
TP11 TP71 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 S1 TP151 TP161 TP162 TP63
ON
1 1
1 1 8
TP152
1
1
ztr1_091.jpg
Fig. 6-20 IMB pcb
198 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3.4 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207

TB Function TB Function TP78 Termination

10 AIS RxD, Input - 40 Alarm out 1, make Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
11 AIS RxD, Input + 41 Alarm out 1, center No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
12 do not connect! 42 Alarm out 1, break
13 do not connect! 43 Alarm out 2, make
14 AIS TxD, Output - 44 Alarm out 2, center TP99 Addresses
15 AIS TxD Output + 45 Alarm out 2, break Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)
16 AIS GND Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also an Inter-
(≥Rev 03 only) TB Function face Expander is installed or for a second Analog Interface)
J1 RS422 Interface 32 ST2 status input for log
Connector for SH3014G203, 33 ST2 status input for log
RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)
TP5 TP1 TP74 TP75 TP90 TP70
TB52, PE
1 1 TB51, N F1
TB10 TB40 TB1 1 TB50, L1
TB11 TB41 TB2
TB12 1 1
TB42 TB3
TB13 TB43 TB4
TB14 TB44 TB5
TB15 TB45 TB6
1 1
TB16 TB7
TB30 TB8 1
TB31
TB25 TB32
TB24 TB33
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20 1
ztr1_080.jpg
1 7
TB Function TB Function J7 TP2

25 Common (stepper) 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts) DS34 DS35 DS7
24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common 2 Log BT (Bottom Track)
(synchro) 3 Log WT (Water Track) DS36 DS33 DS37
23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro) 4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
22 Gyro T 5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
21 Gyro S 6 Log VX (speed)
20 Gyro R 7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift)) break = normally closed (n.c.)
8 Log GND make = normally opened (n.o.)
Fig. 6-21 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03
The AIS interface (TB10...16, J1) is available from Rev. 03 on.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 199

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Connection of Log and Gyro

LOG ANALOG INTERFACE ANALOG INTERFACE

1-Axis Log connection 2-Axis Log connection
TB TB
8 GND (common) 8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed) 6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (water track)
2 BT (bottom track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35
+ TB are flashing green - TB are flashing red
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
25 common 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”
( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red TB are flashing green
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
+ 25 common - 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”
In DC Stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semi- AC System 50 Hz ANALOG INTERFACE
conductors. See the following example: AC System 60 Hz TB
23 REF 1
DC Stepper System ANALOG INTERFACE 20 R
( common - high ) 21 S
TB 22 T
20 R 24 REF 2 (reference
21 S common)
22 T
25 common
ztr1_124.eps
+(-) Gyro (Synchro)
Gyro
Fig. 6-22 Connection of log and gyro
200 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3.5 COM-Expander GE3044G210

TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22

Manufacturers use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers,
TB1...5 Function do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.
Sensor interface, TB7 Function
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
TP23 Termination
1 RxD + 2 Alarm out 1 center Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
2 RxD - 3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed) No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
3 TxD + 4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)
4 TxD - 5 Alarm out 2 center (not used) TB8 Mains supply
5 GND 6 Alarm out 2 break (not used) 1 PE
for all other plug-in pcbs see Section 4.5.12.1. The relays are switched on if the pcb is working! 2 N
3 L1
TP12 TP13
1 TP11 1 1
2 1 1
1 TB8 2
1 3
Plug-in pcb 4
2 2 TB7 3
4
TB3 3 TB4 3 5
4 4 6 F1
5 5 TP21 1
1 1 1
2 1
2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3 TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
TB2 3 TB5 3
4 4
5 5
1
2 1
TB1 3 2
TB6
4 3
5 4
ztr1_624.jpg
ON 8 S1
1 1 1
DS1 DS2 DS3 8 1
TB6 Function
1 Digital input 1 (+)
3 Digital input 2 (+) S1 ON
DS4 DS5 DS6 S1 Function
1 OFF = COM Expander 1
TP41 Function ON = COM Expander 2
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current 2 manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
loop (optocoupler driver input) 3...7 no function (default = OFF)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) 8 manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
TP42 Function J7 Function

Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
loop (optocoupler driver input) 2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) 3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
DS1...6 Function 5/6 5 connected to 6
DS1 green: UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used 7/8 7 connected to 8
DS6 red flashing at:
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 6-23 COM Expander pcb
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 201

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3.6 Interconnection Board

TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function break = normally closed (n.c.)
Double End Ferry: The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN make = normally opened (n.o.)
15, 16 closed = AFT the IMB. See the IMB description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP
15, 16 opened = FWD technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN
Audio Alarm Ack.: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP TB7 Function TB12 Function
14 Alarm Ack. M 11 CAN0_A (IN)
13 Alarm Ack. P TB14 Function 10 CAN0_B (IN) 1 L1 out, spare 1 L1 = TB11
Chart Alarm: 6 GND, n.c. 9 CAN1_A (IN) 2 N out, spare 2 N = TB11
12 AL_out4 make 5 +5 VDC, n.c. 8 CAN1_B (IN) 3 PE out, spare 3 PE = TB11
11 AL_out4 center 4 GND, n.c. 7 CAN0_A (OUT)
10 AL_out4 break 3 +5 VDC, n.c. 6 CAN0_B (OUT)
TB6 Function TB5 Function
2 GND, n.c. 1 L1 to interf. expander 1 L1 spare
Target Alarm: 5 CAN_GND 2 N to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 +5 VDC, n.c. 4 CAN1_A (OUT) 2 N spare
3 PE to interf. expander 3 PE spare
9 AL_out3 make J7 Function 3 CAN1_B (OUT)
8 AL_out3 center 2 24V ON/OFF ONN
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 1 24V ON/OFF ONP
Dead Man Alarm Trig: 2 N IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus
6 AL_out2 make 3 PE are identical.
5 AL_out2 center
TB4 Function
1 L1 in
4 AL_out2 break 2 N in
Radar Alarm: F1
3 AL_out1 make J5 1 1 1 1 3 PE in
2 AL_out1 center J7
F2 TB9 Function
1 AL_out1 break TB14 1 L1 out spare
1 1
J5 CAUTION 1 2 N out spare
If the Analog Interface F3 3 PE out spare
is not connected, the
following jumpers must 1 TB10 Function
be set to enable TB3 for Mains filter, not assembled 1 L1 out, to monitor
the CAN Bus: 2 N out, to monitor
- J5 1/2
on current versions 1 3 PE out, to monitor
- J5 3/4
K1 1
- J5 5/6 TB11 Function
- J5 7/8 F4 1
1 L1 out, displ. El.
2 N out, displ. El.
TB1 Function Drillings for the
3 PE out, displ. El.
Ship’s sensors LAN-BNC adapter T1 TB13 Function
20 GND4 115 V 1 L1 in, switched
19 TXD4- 1 1 1 230 V by monitor
18 TXD4+ TB1 TB2 TB3 2 N in, monitor
17 RXD4- S1 3 PE in, monitor
16 RXD4+
15 GND3 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 LED Function
14 TXD3- Is lit when mains is switched
13 TXD3+ on at the monitor of this
12 RXD3- radar.
11 RXD3+ J6 F5
10 GND2 Fuses
9 TXD2- F1 System’s Mains
8 TXD2+ Drillings for the
bolts of the RGB Fuse
7 RXD2- F2 System’s
6 RXD2+ Buffer
Mains fuse
5 GND1 F3 Mains fuse monitor
4 TXD1- F4 Mains T1
3 TXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF Signal
2 RXD1- See also page 218.
1 RXD1+ J4 J3 J2 J1
TB17 Function
ztr1_059.jpg
1/2 TVA1 out
3/4 Screen
TB16 Function J4 Function J3 J1 Function
1/2 TVA2 in Function 22 AL_out2 center 44 VGND1
to El. Unit (RSC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (IMB)
1 TVA1 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
3/4 Screen 1 n.c. 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1-
TB15 Function 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 center 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
1/2 TVA1 in 4 COM1_DTR 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1
6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 center Ack. N
3/4 Screen 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2-
8 GND 8 TXD2+ 30 +5 V
8 COM1_CTS
J6 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- 31 TXD4+
See Section 4.5.14. 10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
11 J2 Function 11 RXD3+ 33 GND4
13 1 LKAP (Beeper) 13 TXD3+ 35 LKAP (Beeper +)
15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
7 RTS 19 AL_out1 center 41 CAN_GND
8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
9 LKAM (Beeper) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
202 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function SB = Solder Bridge break = normally closed (n.c.)
19 = TB3/5 The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN These solder bridges must be opened, make = normally opened (n.o.)
18 = TB3/5 the IMB. See the IMB description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
17 = TB3/5 technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
Double End Ferry: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
15, 16 closed = AFT TB18 Function 11 CAN0_A (IN) power supply cable GE3050G020 must
15, 16 opened = FWD For Remote Keyboard Electronics 10 CAN0_B (IN) be used (J9). See also TP11. TB5 Function
Audio Alarm Ack.: 6 CAN_KBC GND 9 CAN1_A (IN) 1 L1 spare
14 Alarm Ack. M 5 CAN_KBC GND 8 CAN1_B (IN) TB18, J100, J8, TP10 2 N spare
13 Alarm Ack. P 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 7 CAN0_A (OUT) These connectors and testpins are 3 PE spare
Chart Alarm: 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 6 CAN0_B (OUT) needed for the connection of a Remote
12 AL_out4 make 2 CAN_KBC B in <- 5 CAN_GND Keyboard Electronics. See the corre- TB6 Function
11 AL_out4 center 1 CAN_KBC A in <- 4 CAN1_A (OUT) sponding technical manual for further 1 L1 to interf. expander
10 AL_out4 break 3 CAN1_B (OUT) information. 2 N to interf. expander
Target Alarm: 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 3 PE to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 24V ON/OFF ONP Position of the RKE pcb,
9 AL_out3 make IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus mounting by means of 4 bolts. TB4 Function
8 AL_out3 center are identical. Ship’s mains
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 in
Dead Man Alarm Trig: J5 2 N in
TP10 1 3 PE in
6 AL_out2 make 1
5 AL_out2 center 1 J7 Function
4 AL_out2 break 1
1 Mains to Analog Interface
Radar Alarm: SB J8 SB SB 1 L1
3 AL_out1 make F2 1
2 AL_out1 center 1 2 N
1 AL_out1 break 1 3 PE
F1 TB10 Function
J5 CAUTION Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 1
If the Analog Interface 1 L1 out, to monitor
is not connected, the pcb 4 pcb 3 pcb 2 F3 2 N out, to monitor
following jumpers must DS1 1 3 PE out, to monitor
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN Bus: TB11 Function
- J5 1/2 J91 Plug-in pcb 1 DS2 1 L1 out, displ. el.
- J5 3/4 1 2 N out, displ. el.
K1
SB
- J5 5/6 3 PE out, displ. el.

- J5 7/8 F5 TB13 Function
TB1 Function 1 1 1 F4 1 L1 in, switched
Ship’s sensors RS422 TB1 TB2 TB3 Drillings for the by monitor
20 GND4 LAN-BNC adapter T1 230 V 2 N in, monitor
19 TXD4- 3 PE in, monitor
18 TXD4+ 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 J9 115 V
17 RXD4- TP11 1 J100 S1
16 RXD4+ 1 LED Function
1 DS1 is lit when mains is
15 GND3
14 TXD3- switched on at the monitor of
Drillings for the RGB Buffer this radar.
13 TXD3+
12 RXD3- DS2 is lit when the DC
11 RXD3+ voltage is available from the
10 GND2 transformer/rectifier.
9 TXD2- J6
8 TXD2+
Drillings for the Video Fuses
Selector SH3023G205 F1 System’s Mains
7 RXD2-
6 RXD2+ Fuse
5 GND1 F2 System’s
4 TXD1- J4 J3 J2 J1 Mains fuse
F3 Mains fuse monitor
ztr1_613.jpg
3 TXD1+
2 RXD1- F4 Mains T1
1 RXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF signal
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232, See also page 218.
RS485 see Section
4.5.10.4 on page 80.
J4 Function J3 Function J1 Function
TB17 Function to El. Unit (RSC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (IMB) 22 AL_out2 center 44 VGND1
1/2 TVA1 out 1 TVA1 1 n.c. 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1- 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
3/4 Screen 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 center 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 COM1_DTR 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
TB16 Function 5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
1/2 TVA2 in 6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 center Ack. N
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2- 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
3/4 Screen 30 +5 V
8 GND 8 COM1_CTS 8 TXD2+
31 TXD4+ TP11
TB15 Function 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- Jumper on 1/2 = default
10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
1/2 TVA1 in J2 Function 33 GND4 Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
11 11 RXD3+ if the power supply cable
3/4 Screen 35 LKAP (Beeper +) GE3050G020 is connected
13 1 LKAP (Beeper +) 13 TXD3+ (plug-in pcbs)
J9, J91 Function 15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
Supply input for plug-in 4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
pcbs 5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
1 Vcc J6 6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
2 GND Connector for the 7 RTS 19 AL_out1 center 41 CAN_GND
3 Vcc RGB Buffer, See 8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
4 PE Section 4.5.14. 9 LKAM (Beeper -) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 203

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
204 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e06.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 7 Revision Overview
Technical Manual
7 Revision Overview
7 Revision Overview
This table shows the differences in the functionality and the necessary prerequisites for the use of the
different revisions of hardware or software components. For a description in detail see the corresponding
sections in the Technical Manual. The following table is only an overview. If an item has to be exchanged,
the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Component Extended / different

(Hardware / Soft- functionalities Prerequisites Remarks
ware)
Gearbox New toothed belts, See the spare part lists for the
GR3017O000, new pulleys order No.
Rev. 03 (X-Band)
GR3018O000,
Rev. 04 (S-Band)
Start Unit 2 - TCU NG3028G201 ≥Rev. 05
- Power supply NG3028G202
≥Rev. 03
- Connection board Transceiver
GR3017G200 ≥Rev. 01
- Cable NG3028G028
(between TCU and connec-
tion board) with 11 wires,
standard since 2000-08.
Start Unit 2 Different versions for 230 V versions with 10 Ω
230 V and 400 V resistors, 400 V versions with
mains supply 22 Ω resistors.
Connection Board Q1 must not be The connectors on the pcb are
GR3017G200 unsoldered and J4 different from the connectors
≥Rev. 01 must not be set of Rev. -. The spare part kit
depending on the contains suitable connectors.
use. The pcb Rev. 01 is longer and
The azimuth pulse must be mounted by means of
generator of the S- a longer top hat rail which is
Band Gearbox must also contained in the spare
be connected to J5. part kit.
Azimuth Pulse - Chopper wheel (pulser disk) The distance between pulser
Generator order with 34 teeth. disk and pulser end face must
No. 5240513, be adjusted to 0.5 mm.
S-Band Gearbox
Azimuth Pulse - Chopper wheel (pulser disk) The distance between pulser
Generator order with 17 teeth. disk and pulser end face must
No. 3000004129, be adjusted to 1.0 mm.
S-Band Gearbox
Combined Replaces the old Software 3.1.0 For spare parts, see the Tech-
Azimuth and azimuth pulse gener- notes and the Technical
Headmarker ator. Manual of the Gearbox/Trans-
Pulse Generator ceivers.
X-Band Gearbox
Modulator The bias current and - TCU NG3028G201 ≥Rev. 05 The Modulator ≥Rev. 01 can
NG3028G203 the heating voltage - Power supply NG3028G202 also be used if the prerequi-
≥Rev. 01 can be displayed at ≥Rev. 03 sites are not fulfilled. In this
the Indicator - Software version ≥ 2.0 case the new functionalities
(Service Menus) are not available.
Modulator The bias current and - TCU NG3028G201 ≥Rev. 05 The Modulator ≥Rev. 02 can
NG3028G206 the heating voltage - Power supply NG3028G202 also be used if the prerequi-
≥Rev. 02 can be displayed at ≥Rev. 03 sites are not fulfilled. In this
the Indicator - Software version ≥ 2.0 case the new functionalities
(Service Menus) are not available.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 205

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
7 Revision Overview RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
Component
(Hardware / Soft- Extended / different Prerequisites Remarks
functionalities
7 Revision Overview
ware)
Modulator Improved durability If Modulators ≤Rev. 01 have
NG3028G206 been updated to Rev. 03, the
≥Rev. 03 extended functionalities of
Rev. 02 are still not available.
See the description of the
Modulator in the technical
manual of the Gearboxes/
Transceivers.
TCU Adjustments by - Software version ≥ 2.0 The TCU NG3028G201
NG3028G201 means of the ≥Rev. 05 can only be used
≥Rev. 05 Service Menus: with a Software Version ≥ 2.0!
- STC Compensa-
tion
- Performance
monitor tuning
Display in the - Power Supply The TCU NG3028G201
Service Menus: NG3028G202 ≥Rev. 03 ≥Rev. 05 can only be used
- Bias Current - Modulator NG3028G203 with a software version ≥ 2.0!
- Heating Voltage ≥Rev. 01 or
- Modulator NG3028G206
≥Rev. 02
IF Amplifier - Radar software 2.6.4 or newer In case of an exchange, the IF
NG3028G080 - TCU software version H Amplifier must be replaced by
- TCU ≥Rev. 06 or an amplifier of the same type
- TCU Rev. 5 modified as or a spare part kit must be
described in the technical used to replace NG3028G022
manual of the Gearboxes/trans- by NG3028G080, which
ceivers ("Exchange of TCU") contains also new cables and
a TCU.
Power Supply The ≥Rev. 03 is needed as
Unit (Transceiver) prerequisite for new function-
NG3028G202 alities of other components or
≥Rev. 03 for the usage of new compo-
nents as the start unit 2
Motherboard Buzzer control - IMB GE3044G205 ≥Rev. 04 If an IMB with a Rev. 01...03 is
Display Elec- used, the buzzer will not work
tronics Unit, all reliable.
Versions except of
the TEKRAM moth-
erboard
IMB Buzzer control Rev. 01...04 can be used with
GE3044G205 the TEKRAM motherboard
≥Rev. 04 only; otherwise the buzzer will
not work reliable.
206 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Component
functionalities
7 Revision Overview
ware)
RSC - Software upload - Radar software version ≥ 2.2 An update of the RSC soft-
GE3044G201 ware is performed automati-
≥Rev. 04 cally during an update of the
system software (≥ version
2.2). The Rev. 04 is recog-
nized automatically. Former
versions of the RSC can be
used but they cannot be
updated during the system
software update. See Section
8.5.
- TP 171/3 not Reasons of safety. At former
connected versions danger of short
circuits during adjustment
works.
Video Anti Clutter - RSC PROM GE3044G800 Versions A and B must be
Sea = On with radar must be Version D or newer updated, with version C the
software ≥2.2 - Radar software ≥2.2 must be parameter Video Anti Clutter
installed Sea must be set to "Off"
Graphics and Software version ≥2.4 GE3044G213 is marked by
Video Processor means of a label. The former
(GVP) version GE3044G203 is not
GE3044G213 marked.
Analog Interface Additional socket for - Radar software version ≥ 2.6 Can replace previous revi-
GE3044G207 RS 422 interface (only if an AIS is connected) sions without a software
≥Rev. 03 card SH 3014 G 203 update of the radar, if no AIS
for AIS connection is connected.
Power Supply Can be used in all revisions of
Unit (Display Elec- the electronics unit housing
tronics Unit)
FSP-235-60 GT
Power Supply - Display Electronics Unit Can be used with a Display
Unit (Display Elec- GE3044G020 ≥Rev. 02 Electronics Unit ≥Rev. 02 only,
tronics Unit) because of a different posi-
FSP-300-60 GT tion/size of the mains power
switch.
Interconnection Ship’s sensors with Plug-in pcbs for the conversion: No parameter settings in the
Board 20 mA current loop GE3044G211 (TTL) Maintenance Manager neces-
GE3044G216 (TTY)/TTL/RS422/ GE3044G212 (20 mA current sary. If one or more plug-in
RS232/RS485 inter- loop) pcbs are used, the additional
faces can be GE3044G214 (RS232) power supply cable
connected. GE3044G218 (RS422/485) GE3050G020 must be
connected.
COM-Expander 5 additional serial Software 3.1
GE3044G210 interfaces
RGB Buffer 3 outputs The housing of the interface
GE3044G222 box must be suitable (addi-
tional cutouts), VS3034G030
Display Elec- The diskette drive is It is possible to mount the
tronics Unit mounted inside the diskette drive in two different
GE 3044 G 020 housing. positions, depending on the
≥Rev. 04 fitting position of the Display
Electronics Unit.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 207

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Component
functionalities
7 Revision Overview
ware)
Software 2.0 - RSC PROM Prerequisites for TRACK-
(New features of ≥GE3044G800 C PILOT/SPEEDPILOT/ENGINE
the operational part - TRACKPILOT PROMs INTERFACE/CHARTPILOT/
of the software are ≥GE3016G820/821 J Interface Expander only, if
not mentioned) - ENGINE INTERFACE/ these components are part of
SPEEDPILOT PROMs the system.
≥GE3016G710/711 H
- CHARTPILOT 9320/9330
Update CD ≥5.0 ß 148
- Interface Expander PROMs
≥GE3044G830/831 -
Monitor Selection The Monitor can be selected
by means of S1 on the IMB.
Adjustments by See descriptions of TCU, power
means of the supply Transceiver, Modulator.
Service Menu and
display of measure-
ment values.
NACOS functionali- TRACKPILOT/SPEEDPILOT/
ties. ENGINE INTERFACE can be
configured.
CHARTPILOT A CHARTPILOT can be
connected via Ethernet LAN.
Software 2.2 Extended transfer Track-, Map, Configuration
(New features of (back-up) possibili- transfer to all Transceivers and
the operational part ties Display Electronics Units and
of the software are to diskettes.
not mentioned)
Monitoring functions The communication of the
for the serial inter- interfaces can be recorded
faces of the IMB and saved to a diskette.
Video Anti Clutter RSC PROM GE3044G800 must Versions A and B must be
Sea = On be version D or newer updated, with version C the
parameter Video Anti Clutter
Sea must be set to "Off"
Software 2.4 CHARTRADAR, - At least one CHARTPILOT The User Chart Objects can
(New features of Conning Display. 9320/9330 must be be displayed even without
the operational part connected. licensing the CHARTRADAR
of the software are - The licensing must have been functionality (but a CHART-
not mentioned) performed. PILOT must be connected).
- Monitor resolution 1280x1024
- Ethernet module
new settings for Radar software version ≥2.4.5.
aspect ratios (TFT
Monitors).
Easier adjustment of Radar software version ≥2.4.6
magnetron currents
after exchange of
Magnetron or Modu-
lator.
Remote/Slave Instal- Radar software version ≥2.4.6
lations or Remote
Operation by means
of the Remote
Keyboard Elec-
tronics.
208 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Component
functionalities
7 Revision Overview
ware)
Software 2.6 UAIS DEBEG 3400 - Analog Interface UAIS DEBEG 3400 Elec-
(New features of can be connected. GE 3044 G 207, ≥Rev. 03 tronics Unit
the operational part
of the software are Software update of - Keyboard controller KBC
not mentioned) remote keyboard GE3048G200 Rev. ≥01
electronics is
possible
Sensor Monitoring Availability of monitoring func-
tions depends on installed
sensors.
Radio Direction For special projects only.
Finder, Camera
Simplification of TCU SW-Version G or newer Adjustment must be
magnetron current performed in h 12 NM range
adjustment only
Software 3.0 The configuration of All radars must have the software The licensing for the MULTIP-
a MULTIPILOT 1000 version 3.0 or newer, CHARTPI- ILOT must have been
in the system is LOTs in the system must hare performed if a MULTIPILOT
possible. software version 5.2 1000 is in the system.
New RKE settings; Monitors of slave Operating Units
monitors of slave must be of the same type as the
Operating Units are monitor of the master unit.
controlled by the
master (brightness,
contrast)
Software 3.0.1 Extended configura-
tion menus, RKE
settings (monitor
interface, central
dimming adjustment)
Software 3.1 VDR DEBEG 4300 The VDR is supplied with radar
can be connected, pictures via Ethernet LAN, so that
COM-Expander the Indicator which provides the
GE3044G210 can radar pictures must be connected
be connected to the network.
Extended functionali-
ties for the magne-
tron current adjust-
ment
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 209

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
7 Revision Overview
210 ED3038G542ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e07.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 8 Repair/Maintenance
Technical Manual 8.1 Diskette Drive for Service Purposes
8 Repair/Maintenance
GENERAL:
The jumper settings and switch settings on a replacement pcb must be

the same as on the defective pcb. The wire connections must be made
in exactly the same way. Exceptions are explained in this manual.
8.1 Diskette Drive for Service Purposes
For service purposes a 3.5" diskette drive is often needed, e.g. for software updates. If the radar is not
equipped with a diskette drive, the diskette drive kit AZ 3053 G 001 (order No. 2776186) must be used.
It is delivered with two cables (3 m) for the power supply and the data connection at the rear of the
Display Electronics Unit (same connectors as for the built-in diskette drive).
8.2 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes
For the BIOS configuration it is necessary to use a PC keyboard with PS/2 connector. For the handling
of the System Maintenance Manager it is also more convenient to work with an additional keyboard. It
may be helpful to connect a buzzer to the motherboard of the Display Electronics Unit to recognize the
signals described in Section 8.4.5.
8.3 Service at Systems with the Monitor Type AZ 3040
If a monitor AZ 3040 is connected to the system it is not possible to perform the BIOS settings. The AZ
3040 also do not show the text messages during the start of the radar. Any multisync monitor must be
connected to show the BIOS menus and the text messages during the start.
8.4 Trouble-Shooting
8.4.1 Hints
In case the of problems during setting-to-work, the cabling should be checked again. All components
must be supplied with power.
- Read the system fault messages on the screen to get more information about the problem.
- Try to perform the self-check routines as described in Section 5.8 on page 118 to localize the fault.
- If no radar video is displayed, the LEDs DS1 and DS2 of the RSC pcb indicate, whether the incoming
signal is correct.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 211

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8 Repair/Maintenance RADARPILOT 1000
8.4 Trouble-Shooting Technical Manual
8.4.2 System Faults
The system fault codes are displayed on the monitor together with a short description. To obtain more
information about the system faults and to display the existing faults, use the System Maintenance
Manager with the submenu Telemonitoring Data. For the description of Telemonitoring Data, see
Section 5.9 on page 122.
The system faults of the Telemonitoring Data screen are displayed in four columns. These columns are:
- Error
- Dev.
- SubDev.
- Info
The column "Error" shows the system fault number. The column "Dev." shows the device which is
causing the fault, and the column "SubDev." gives an indication for the defective subdevice, if possible.
The column "Info" gives more detailed information about the fault. The system faults are also listed in
Section 10 on page 237 in this manual. This information cannot cover all defects. It will be updated as
often as possible.
8.4.3 Trackball works jerking
If the trackball does not work proper, it is advisable to clean it. Usually the trackball got dirty by crumbs
or shed soft drinks or coffee.
To clean the trackball, it must be removed from the Operating Unit. On the upper side of the trackball are
three screws which must be removed to open it.
The trackball and the roll wheels can be cleaned by means of cloth and alcohol.
8.4.4 Defective Ethernet Module for Tekram S3ZX-A Motherboards causes "Red Screen"
If the following preconditions are fulfilled

1. The motherboard Tekram S3ZX-A is used and
2. the Ethernet module is plugged into the slot No. 1
in case of a defective Ethernet network (for example: incorrect termination, plug disconnected from this
radar, Ethernet cable damaged) the radar may show a red screen about 1...15 Min after the defect
appeared.
To prevent this malfunctioning it is definitely advisable to change the position of the Ethernet module from
slot No. 1 to Slot No. 5. The Display Electronics Unit should be checked for this during service or main-
tenance works.
See also Section 4.5.3 from page 53 on for further information. This problem does not appear with moth-
erboards different from Tekram S3ZX-A.
212 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.4 Trouble-Shooting
8.4.5 Display Electronics Unit does not start
If the Display Electronics Unit does not start, check the items of the following table.
Appearance/Problem Remedy
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if This happens, if the BIOS settings have been lost. In this case the
the ATX Power On contacts are shortened BIOS Setup has to be performed as described in Section 5.13.4.
(see Section 5.13). See the next line if this remedy has no success.
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if The BIOS settings have not been saved after powering off and on. In
the ATX Power On contacts are shortened this case the back-up battery on the motherboard may be discharged
(see Section 5.13) although the BIOS or the Motherboard is defective.
setup has been performed beforehand.
The ATX power supply fan does not work. - 230 V mains supply is missing.
- The internal fuse of the power supply (Display Electronics Unit) is
blown.
- The power supply is defective.
- One off the power outlets of the power supply is short-circuited.
- One of the devices connected to the power supply is defective.
The CPU’s heatsink fan does not work. - The CPU’s heatsink fan is defective.
- The motherboard is defective.
- One of the Pcbs connected to the motherboard is defective or
- connected incorrect.
- The power supply is defective.
- The CPU is defective.
The buzzer sounds continuously long - The memory module is defective or connected incorrect to the
beeps. motherboard
The buzzer sounds a sequence of one - The graphics and video processor is defective or connected
long and three short beeps (repeatedly). incorrect to the motherboard.
The buzzer sounds one short beep, but - The connection between monitor and graphics and video
the monitor remains black or displays "NO processor is incorrect.
SYNC" - The graphics and video processor is defective.
The Electronics Unit does not start. The power supply unit is equipped with a protective gear against
tottering contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within
0.5 s, the power supply does not start and it must be switched off
and waited for 5...10 s until it can be switched on again.
General Guidelines for Troubleshooting with the Display Electronics Unit

Before removing or inserting any component, switch off the power!
1. Check all power supply connectors.
2. Check if the pcbs are connected correctly in their sockets. If there is any doubt, remove and insert
the pcb again.
3. Insert the memory module in another socket.
4. If one or more pcbs seem to be installed in an askew way (not vertically or distorted) then:
- Remove the pcbs.
- Untighten the motherboard’s screws (so that the motherboard can be shifted).
- Re-insert the pcbs and fix them by means of their screws.
- Tighten the screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the pcbs.
5. Clean the pcbs’ and memory modules’ contacts using at first a plastic rubber and afterwards a cotton
cloth with some alcohol.
6. Remove all pcbs from the motherboard and connect a speaker to the motherboard’s speaker
connector (labelled "SPKR" or "SPEAKER").
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 213

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.4 Trouble-Shooting Technical Manual
6.1 When powering on the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds continuously long beeps,
because the memory module is missing. If this does not happen, the motherboard must be
exchanged.
6.2 Insert the memory module in one of the memory sockets.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds repeatedly a sequence of
one long and three short beeps, because the graphics and video processor is missing. If this
does not happen, the memory modules must be exchanged.
6.3 Insert the graphics and video processor into the appropriate socket and connect the monitor
directly.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep, the BIOS
copyright message appears on the screen. If this does not happen, the graphics and video proc-
essor must be exchanged.
6.4 Insert the IMB into the appropriate socket.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep, the BIOS
copyright message appears on the screen and the radar software is started. If this does not
happen, the IMB must be exchanged.
6.5 Insert the remaining pcbs step by step an verify the function of the Display Electronics Unit.
If any malfunctions are detected, the last replaced pcb must be exchanged.
8.4.6 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting
If the Service Switch S1/8 of the IMB is switched on (see Section 4.5.7 on page 69), the sequential start
of the processes is displayed during booting (function is not available with monitor AZ3040). When an
error is detected, the booting is stopped and the process which causes the problem can be recognized.
This function may be helpful to localize a problem in cooperation with the service department of the
manufacturer.
214 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.5 Software Update and Installation
8.5 Software Update and Installation
To update the radar software, follow the instructions in Section 5.11.1 on page 156 on.
Please pay also attention to the following sections.
8.5.1 Software Update Version 2.2 or newer and RSC Rev. 04 or newer
The RSC ≥Rev. 04 is programmed during an update of the radar software version 2.2 or newer. To
enable this function, it is necessary to perform the update twice to prepare the radar, if the RSC has not
been programmed with a radar software 2.2 or newer before (the PCI Bus configuration must be changed
once to gain access to the RSC flash memory). For all further updates it is not necessary to perform the
update routine twice.
Performing the update:

The update must be started as described in Section 5.11.1 on page 156. Read the messages on the
display during the installation. The programming of the RSC follows the programming of the IMB and is
the last action before programming the TCU(s). If the message Must start update again after reboot!
appears in red characters, the RSC has not been programmed before, the PCI configuration is actually
being modified. In this case wait until the update is finished, switch the Display Electronics Unit off and
on again and perform the software update a second time.
NOTE:
Display Electronics Units with software version 2.2 or higher and an RSC ≥Rev. 04 must not be
programmed with software version 2 or older (downgrading).
8.5.2 Software Update Version 2.2 or newer and RSC Rev. 03 or older
During an update to the radar software version 2.2, the message RSC Flash Memory Download Revi-
sion: Unable to determine download revision appears. RSCs of the Rev. 03 or older cannot be
updated automatically during a radar software update. In this case the RSC-PROM must be exchanged
manually if necessary. See the Product Notes (also available via Internet) for further information about
the software versions of the different pcbs).
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 215

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.6 Opening the Housings Technical Manual
8.5.3 System Software Installation/Update
The operating system and the radar software are combined in one and the same program. This program
is stored in a Flash-ROM on the IMB. Under normal circumstances it is not necessary to install the soft-
ware. Only if the System Maintenance Manager cannot be started to update the software, might it
be helpful to reinstall the complete software to find out, whether the hardware is damaged or whether the
software installation was faulty.
It is definitely advisable to rule out any other reason for a defect before the system software is
installed again.
1. To install the software, switch off the radar and open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit.
2. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the IMB in accordance with the description in Section 4.5.7 on page 69.
By means of this switch, the radar is forced to boot directly from the diskette drive.
3. Put the "Flash Update Facility Boot Disk" into the diskette drive.
4. Start the radar.
5. Follow the instructions.
6. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the IMB back to the normal position and restart the radar.
7. Restore the parameters from another Display Electronics Unit of the system or from the back-up
diskette. If no back-up diskette or no other Display Electronics Unit is available, the parameters
(system configuration) must be entered manually by means of the System Maintenance Manager.
The parameters of the Transceiver are stored in the TCU. They can be loaded from there. Check,
whether these transceiver parameters make sense.
8. Test that the radar is functioning correctly.
If a monitor AZ3040 is connected, this cannot be used for the installation process, because it cannot
switch to the required resolution. Connect a standard PC monitor for the installation process.
If the system parameters cannot be stored, even although the system software has recently been
installed, the IMB must be exchanged.
8.6 Opening the Housings
8.6.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing
The cover of the Display Electronics Unit is fixed with 4 screws. Remove the screws to open the housing.
8.6.2 Interconnection Box
Depending on the version, the Interconnection Box is mounted under the Display Electronics Unit (see
Figure 2-4 on page 24) or as a single bulkhead housing. To open the bulkhead version, remove the
screws in the cover. To gain access to the interconnection unit when it is mounted under the Display
Electronics Unit, the Display Electronics Unit must be removed. To do this, unscrew (but do not remove)
the 4 screws in the flange of the Display Electronics Unit, lift it about 10 mm and remove it. The cables
do not have to be disconnected.
216 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.6 Opening the Housings
8.6.3 Console Housings
For service purposes, the console hous- 4

ings can be opened below the Oper-
ating Unit, at the base region and at the
monitor. 3
To remove the cover in the base region,
two locks (1) must be released. For
some housings a special key is neces-
sary for the locks.
To open the Operating Unit from below,
a metal plate must be removed from the
unit. It is fixed by means of several
recessed head screws or two locks.
The SCC console can be opened in the
base region as described above. To
gain access to the monitor, the monitor
front frame must be removed. Under the
Operating Unit, three tommy screws are
visible (2). After these screws have
ztr1_087.eps
been undone, the cover can be pulled

outwards a few millimeters (3), pushed 2
1
upwards and taken off.
Fig. 8-1 Opening the SCC console
The top cover is mounted by means of
hinges on the back of the housing. It can be turned up (4) and fixed in the opened position. The monitor
can be turned vertically, too. To unlock its bearings, the cover in the base region must be removed and
the two large tommy screws inside the enclosure must be undone.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 217

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.7 Fuses Technical Manual
8.6.4 Desktop Housings
The desktop housing contains the monitor and the Oper-

ating Unit. To gain access to the monitor, disconnect the
unit from mains, remove the screws (1) on top of the
housing. Pull the frame carefully from the monitor (the 1
power switch is mounted in the frame, watch for the
cabling) and lift the cover at the rear off the housing.
The keyboard section is covered on the underside.
Remove the screws to dismount the cover. Then the
keyboards and the keyboard controller are visible as
shown in Section 4.5.13, page 93.
ztr1_123.jpg
Fig. 8-2 Opening the desktop housing version
8.7 Fuses
See Section 8.10 on page 227 for the order numbers of the spare parts.
Interconnection Box (GE3044G206 / GE3044G216)

No. Rating
F1 6.3 A slow blow
F2 6.3 A slow blow
F3 4 A slow blow
F4 0.1 A slow blow
F5 1 A slow blow
Analog Interface (GE3044G207)

No. Rating
F1 0.5 A slow blow
218 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.8 Exchange of Parts and Testing
8.8 Exchange of Parts and Testing
8.8.1 Exchange of the Main Processor
The processor is a standard PC-Processor. It is plugged in a socket and can be removed without any
tools after the fan has been removed. Different types of processors are in use due to the technical
progress. For the exchange of the fan see Section 8.8.16.2 on page 225.
NOTE:
The motherboard TEKRAM S3ZX-A does not support Celeron processors with a clock frequency higher
than 556 MHz. This motherboard has been used in Rev. "-" of the Display Electronics Unit GE3044G020
and it may have been used as a spare part in later revisions of the Display Electronics Unit. The TEKRAM
S3ZX-A motherboard must be replaced by a type DFI CA61, CB61 or newer, if a processor with a clock
frequency of 667 MHz or higher is to be used.
NOTE:
At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard the fan
and the memory modules, see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 227.
8.8.2 Exchange of the Motherboard
The procedure for exchanging the motherboard depends on the version. Switch off the radar, open the
housing of the Display Electronics Unit and disconnect all cables on the motherboard and on the pcbs in
the slots. Remove the slot screws of all pcbs and disconnect them (note the position - they must be
connected in the same slots of the new motherboard again or, if the replacement motherboard is of a
different type, in the slots which are described Section 4.5.3.2 on page 55). Remove the screws with
which the motherboard is fixed in the housing. Replace the motherboard and wind in the screws without
fastening them. Insert the extension pcbs into their slots and fasten the slot screws. Now tighten the
screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the installed extension pcbs.
For the exchange of the main processor see Section 8.8.1. For the exchange of the fan see Section
8.8.16.2 on page 225.
If the motherboard has been exchanged, the correct BIOS settings must be set in accordance with
Section 5.13 on page 168 (if the motherboard is equipped with a soft power switch, this must be disabled
by the BIOS settings before the system can be started).
NOTE:
Some of the motherboards are equipped with an on-board sound option. In this case, the covers must be
removed from the openings for the sound connectors in the electronics unit’s housing.
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set ex works.
NOTE:
At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fan
and, depending on the spare part kit, the memory modules.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 219

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.8 Exchange of Parts and Testing Technical Manual
8.8.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules
The memory modules are standard PC modules (DIMM). Two types of memory are in use: 64 MB
modules and 128 MB modules. The 64 MB modules are not available any longer. In case of a defect, the
64 MB modules can be replaced by 128 MB modules. No changes in the BIOS setup have to be made.
8.8.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery
The lifetime of the battery depends on the use of the Display Electronics Unit. The shelf life of the battery
itself is about 10 years. If the battery is mounted in a radar which is permanently or often in operation,
the life will be about 5...7 years. In radars that are used rarely, the life may be shorter.
When the CMOS backup battery is changed, the BIOS settings get lost and the settings must be
performed by means of an additional ASCII keyboard. If a monitor AZ3040 is connected, an additional
monitor of type "multisync" is needed.
To exchange the battery, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and
remove the pcbs which are positioned above the backup battery (each pcb is fixed by means of a screw).
The battery is fixed by means of a clamp. The clamp can be bent to exchange the battery. Insert the new
battery with inscription on the upper surface.
Plug in and fix the pcbs in the same slots as before, close the housing and continue with the setting of
the BIOS parameters.
The BIOS settings must be performed as described from Section 5.13 on page 168 on.
8.8.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G203, GE3044G213)
To change the GVP, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and remove
the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Replace the GVP and fix the new one with the screw.
Further hardware or software settings are not necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
NOTE:
For the use of GE3044G213 the software version must be 2.4 or newer.
GE3044G213 is marked by means of a label. GE3044G203 is not marked.
8.8.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module
To change the Ethernet network module, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics
Unit and remove the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Disconnect the T-connector, replace
the network module and fix the new one with the screw. Further hardware or software settings are not
necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
If the Ethernet module is part of a CHARTRADAR 1000 and has been exchanged, the licensing
must be renewed, because the CHARTRADAR Identification Code has changed.
8.8.7 Exchange of Radar Scan Converter (RSC)
To exchange the RSC, open the Display Electronics Unit.
220 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
1. Disconnect the connector J3 cable from the board (only ARPA radars).
2. Disconnect the TVA input cable from the sub-D connector outside the housing.
3. Unscrew the fastening screw of the RSC and pull the RSC carefully out of its slot.
4. Set the jumpers of the new RSC to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
5. Push the new RSC into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the cable to
J3 (only ARPA radars).
6. Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >
Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be
compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a software
update must be performed. For further information about the software versions see the "Software
Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via internet). If it is not certain, that the software
versions are compatible with each other, it is advisable to perform a software update to the latest
release. For further information about a software update see Section 5.7 from page 115 on.
7. Adjust the video signal amplitude of TVA1 and TVA2 and the TVA signal offset. See Section 4.5.4.1
on page 61 for further information.
NOTE:
See Section 8.8.10, E x c h a n g e o f R S C , I M B o r A R P A P C B : S o f t w a r e C o m p a t i b i l i t y for further information.
NOTE:
See Section 8.5 on page 215 for further information about the software update procedure with software
version 2.2 or newer and an RSC pcb Rev. 04 or newer.
8.8.8 Exchange of ARPA Pcb (ARPA10T)
To exchange the ARPA pcb, switch off the radar and open the Display Electronics Unit.
1. Disconnect the connector J2 cable from the board.
2. Unscrew the fastening screw of the pcb and pull it carefully out of its slot.
3. Set the jumpers of the new ARPA pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4. Push the new ARPA pcb into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the
cable to J2.
update must be performed. For further information about the software versions see the "Software
Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via Internet). If it is not certain, that the software
versions are compatible with each other, it is advisable to perform a software update to the latest
release. For further information about a software update see Section 5.7 from page 115 on.
6. Adjust the video offset and the TVA gain. See Section 4.5.5.1 on page 66 for further information.
NOTE:
8.8.9 Exchange of Interface and Memory Board (IMB)
To exchange the IMB, switch off the radar and open the Display Electronics Unit.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 221

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
The IMB contains all parameters and the system software (operating system and radar software) of the
system. Some parameters (transceiver parameters) are also stored in the TCU, and a back-up diskette
with all parameters should exist. If it is not certain, that the parameters stored on the diskettes are current,
it is advisable to make a back-up (if possible). The parameters can be transferred from one Display Elec-
tronics Unit (SW ≥2.2) to all other Display Electronics Units (Config Transfer function). If it is ensured,
that another Display Electronics Units of the system has the same (and complete) set of parameters for
all units, they can be transferred to the Display Electronics Unit whose IMB has been exchanged.
1. Disconnect the cable from the 50-pole Sub-D connector outside the housing.
2. Unscrew the fastening screw of the pcb and pull it carefully out of its slot.
3. Set the jumpers and DIP-switches of the new IMB pcb to the same position as on the defective pcb.
4. Push the new IMB pcb into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the 50-
pole cable.
5. Switch on the power to the radar.
update must be performed. For further information about the software versions see the Technotes
(also available via Internet). If it is not certain, that the software versions are compatible with each
other, it is advisable to perform a software update to the latest release. For further information about
a software update see Section 5.7 from page 115 on and the "Software Change Notes" and "Tech-
notes" (also available via Internet).
7. The IMB now contains a default set of system parameters. Check whether the IMB has been
programmed with the current system software by means of the System Maintenance Manager (see
Section 5.9.2 on page 124). If necessary, perform a software update.
8. Restore the parameters by means of the Config Transfer function (see Section 5.12), performed on
another Display Electronics Unit (software version ≥2.2) or from the back-up diskette (software
version ≤2.0, some transceiver parameters can also be restored from the TCU). If the Config
Transfer function or a back-up diskette is not available, the system must be parameterized manu-
ally. See Section 6 from page 177 on for further information.
9. Check the system configuration and test whether the radar is functioning correctly.
NOTE:
8.8.10 Exchange of RSC, IMB or ARPA PCB: Software Compatibility
IMB/ARPS and RSC pcbs which have been used formerly in a RADARPILOT 1000 with software version
≥2.2 do not work in a radar with software version ≤2.0 and vice versa because the software of the pcbs
does not fit to the radar software version. From software version 2.2 on these pcbs are programmed
during a software update of the radar software.
Procedure:
Replacing pcbs in a Display Electronics Unit with a software version ≤2.0 (the pcbs have been used in a
radar with software version ≥2.2 before):
- Update the radar software to 2.2 or higher before inserting the new pcb.
- RSC and ARPA pcb only: After inserting the pcb perform the software update again.
222 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Replacing pcbs in a Display Electronics Unit with a software version ≥2.2 (the spare parts have not been
used in a radar with software version ≥2.2 before):
- RSC or ARPA pcbs: Insert the pcb and perform a software update to version 2.2 or higher.
- IMB pcb: Remove the RSC and ARPA pcbs, insert the spare IMB and run a software update to
version 2.2 or higher. Then insert the ARPA and RSC pcbs and perform the software update
again.
NOTE:
See the "Technotes" for further information.
8.8.11 Exchange of Analog Interface
To exchange the Analog Interface, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
WARNING
If a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Interface,
dangerous voltages might be present, even although all supplies to the
radar system are switched off. Short-circuiting of the gyro will damage
the gyro output.
1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the Analog Interface.
2. The Analog Interface is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
3. Set the jumpers on the new Analog Interface pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
other it, is advisable to perform a software update to the latest release. For further information about
a software update see Section 5.7 from page 115 on.
7. The Analog Interface contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the
IMB. When the radar is started, the parameters are sent from the IMB to the Analog Interface auto-
matically.
8.8.12 Exchange of the COM-Expander
To exchange the COM-Expander, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the Analog Interface.
2. Remove the plug-in adapter pcbs for the interface conversion and connect them to the new pcb at
the corresponding position. Do not change the position of the jumpers on the pcbs.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 223

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
3. The pcb is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
4. Set the jumpers on the new pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
5. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
other it, is advisable to perform a software update to the latest release. For further information about
a software update see Section 5.7 from page 115 on.
8. The COM Expander contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the IMB.
When the radar is started, the parameters are sent from the IMB to the COM Expander automati-
cally.
8.8.13 Exchange of the Diskette Drive
If the diskette drive is mounted in the console hous-

ings or desktop housings the Operating Unit must
be opened from below. A metal plate must be
removed from the unit. It is fixed by means of
several recessed head screws or two locks. The
diskette drive is fixed by two nuts.
For the correct connection of the data cable at the
diskette drive see Figure .
ztr1_200.jpg
Connection of the data cable at the diskette drive
8.8.14 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply
Two versions of the power supply exist. See Section 4.5.8 on page 73 for further information.
To exchange the power supply, switch off the radar, disconnect the mains supply cable and open the
Display Electronics Unit.
1. Disconnect all supply cables (power supply output).
2. The power supply unit is mounted by means of 4 screws. Two of them must be removed at the rear
(outside) of the Electronics Unit housing, the other two screws must be removed inside the housing.
3. Fix the new power supply by means of the screws and connect the supply cables.
224 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.8.15 Exchange of Filter Pads
The filter pad of the Display Electronics Units

housing must be changed or washed with a mild
detergent every 3 months. If the Display Electronics
Unit is installed in a dusty environment, the replace-
ment or cleaning must be done more often.
The filter pad can be exchanged without tools. It is
trapped under the metal cover of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit’s fan outlet. Remove it at the cover
corner which is not fixed by a screw.
The part number of the filter pad is:
GE3044T030, order No. 2175640.
Washed filter pads must be allowed to dry
completely.
ztr1_062.jpg
Location of the filter pad
8.8.16 Exchange of Fans
8.8.16.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing
To remove the fan, open the cover of the housing. Disconnect the fan and unscrew the four nuts on the
housing of the fan. Exchange the fan and fix the new one with the four nuts. Connect the fan to the supply
and close the housing of the Display Electronics Unit. It is advisable to check the filter pad (see Section
8.8.15) on this occasion.
8.8.16.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan
If the fan of the main processor of the motherboard is defective, it is possible that the main processor
itself is damaged, too. The function of the main processor should be tested. Depending on the type of
processor, the lifetime of this component can be reduced drastically or destroyed within a few minutes if
it is allowed to run without a fan.
The method of exchanging the fan depends on the main processor type. Usually, the fan is fixed with
metal clamps which can be opened carefully by means of a small screwdriver. The fan must be
connected to a 3-pole connector on the motherboard next to the processor socket. This connector is
marked by a print on the motherboard pcb.
NOTE:
At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard the fan
and the memory modules, see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 227.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 225

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.9 Maintenance Technical Manual
8.9 Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance of the radar is limited to
Work Interval Remarks
Exchanging or cleaning the filter Every 3 month, depending on Nevertheless it makes sense to check the
pad of the Display Electronics the dustiness of the environ- pad whenever maintenance or repair work
Unit ment; operators maintenance has to be done.
work
Checking the housing fan and the Whenever maintenance or
CPU fan of the electronics unit repair work has been done
Exchanging the CMOS backup Every 5 years. See the hints in Section 8.8.4 on page
battery 220.
It is not necessary to exchange the gear lubricant oil.
226 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.10 Spare Parts
8.10 Spare Parts
8.10.1 Spare Part Concept
Most of the components in the Display Electronics Unit are parts which cannot be serviced. In the case
of a defect, the complete part must be exchanged.
8.10.2 Spare Part List
Some of the components of the Display Electronics Unit in particular will be modified at short intervals,
so that it is likely that it will not be possible to deliver spare parts which are absolutely identical to the
original part. In such cases, a Technote for the exchange is delivered with the spare part and new
versions of components are added to this manual as soon as possible.
Electronics Unit GE3044

Part Order No.
Motherboard with 400 MHz Main Processor and Fan, for Display Electronics Unit Rev. -, Moth-
erboard Tekram (GE3044G008) 300004951
Motherboard with 400 MHz Main Processor and Fan, for Display Electronics Unit Rev. 01 and 300004949
02, Motherboard DFI CA61, CB61 (GE3044G006)
Motherboard with 667 MHz Main Processor and Fan, for Display Electronics Unit Rev. 03 and
04, Motherboard DFI CA64 (GE3044G007) 300004950
Motherboard with 1000 MHz Main Processor, Fan and Memory Module, for Display Electronics
Unit Rev. 05, Motherboard DFI CA64-TN (GE3044G066) 300006104
This spare part kit can replace the kits GE3044G007...009, if necessary.
Memory Module (128 MB) for Display Electronics Unit Rev. -, 01, 02, 03 and 04 with Main Proc- 300004943
essors ≤667 MHz
RSC pcb (GE3044G201) 2861439
IMB pcb (GE3044G205) 2868490
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G203) 2870985
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G213) 300006090
ATX-Power Supply (FSP235-60GT) 5935633
ATX-Power Supply (FSP300-60FPN) 300004624
ARPA pcb (GE3044G202) 2869448
Processor Celeron 400 MHz (alternatively 433/466 Mhz) for Display Electronics Unit 300003726
GE 3044 G 020 Rev. - ... Rev. 02, see also Section 8.8.1 and Section 8.8.2
Processor Celeron 667 MHz for Display Electronics Unit ≥Rev. 03, see also Section 8.8.1 and 300004881
Section 8.8.2
Processor Fan DP5-5G51 with heatsink 300003727
Set of Cables GE3044 (GE3044G038) 2777209
Filter pad (GE3044T030, 110x110 mm) for Electronics Unit 2175640
Fan (250-1533 for Electronics Unit Housing) 5035335
Ethernet Module (LCS-8034TB) 300006169
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 227

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.10 Spare Parts Technical Manual
Part Order No.

Connector (female, for supply Operating Unit / Diskette Drive, T3303100) 5321296
Software Upgrade Kit, consisting of diskettes and EPROMs for the current software version 300004472
(GE3044G005)
CMOS backup battery CR2032 271126851
Interconnection Box VS3034

Part Order No.
Analog Interface Kit (GE3044G059, Log/Gyro Interface) 2576100
RGB Buffer Kit (GE3044G058) 2576075
Interconnection Board (GE3044G206) 2571303
Interconnection Board (GE3044G216) 300005044
Plug-in pcb TTL (GE3044G211) 300004562
Plug-in pcb 20 mA current loop (TTY) (GE3044G212) 300004561
Plug-in pcb RS232 (GE3044G214) 300004560
Plug-in pcb RS422/RS485 (GE3044G218) 300004559
Analog Interface pcb (Gyro/Log Interface, GE3044G207) 2571304
COM Expander pcb (GE3044G210) 300004738
Fuse, Analog Interface, F1, 0.5 A, slow blow 5070558
Fuses, Interconnection Board
F1, 6.3 A, slow blow 5071038
F2, 6.3 A, slow blow 5071038
F3, 4.0 A, slow blow 5073585
F4, 0.1 A, slow blow 5070551
F5, 1.0 A, slow blow 5070561
Operating Unit BD3027

Part Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872
Radar Keyboard (0822/01) 5933833
TRACKPILOT Keyboard (0832/01) 5933831
Keyboard Controller (0824/01) 5933834
Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 300004763
Fuse for GE3048G200, F1, 2.0 A, slow blow (SMD, 0454 002) 300005060
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186
Trackball BD3028
Part Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186
228 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.10 Spare Parts
Interface Expander GE3041

Part Order No.
Processor Controlled Interswitch Board 1894740
(PCI, NG3013G205)
Interface Expander (SI) 8 Channel (GE3044G209) 300003756
TTL Interface (SH3014G201) 1877057
20 mA current loop (TTY) Interface (SH3014G202) 1877059
RS422 Interface (SH3014G203) 1877061
V24 Interface (SH3014G204) 1877063
RS485 Interface (SH3014G205) 2850009
8.10.3 Spare Parts for Monitors
The spare parts lists for the monitors are contained in the monitor service manuals. The standard monitor
AZ3040G020 has been equipped with an additional beeper and has an ECDIS approval. The monitor is
called AZ3040G040, now. It has the order No. 300004020.
If a monitor is not intended for service/repair, a separate technical manual is not available for this monitor.
AZ3053G040
The 21" monitor AZ3053 must be replaced if it is defective. The monitor can be ordered with the order
No. 5936256. From the year 2000 on, the monitor AZ3053 has been replaced by the version AZ 3058
with the order No. 300003695. If a replacement monitor of the type AZ3053 has been ordered, the
AZ3058 will be delivered.
AZ3056G041
The TFT-monitor AZ3056G041 has to be exchanged in case of a defect.
AZ3058
If the monitor AZ3058 is defective, it must be replaced.
AZ3059
The TFT-monitor AZ3059 has to be exchanged in case of a defect.
AZ3063
The TFT-monitor AZ3063 has to be exchanged in case of a defect.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 229

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.10 Spare Parts Technical Manual
230 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e08.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 9 Technical Data
Technical Manual 9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions
9 Technical Data
9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions
The Gearboxes and Scanners comply with DIN EN 60945 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results).
The system of protection required for the Gearbox by DIN EN 60945 is not valid for internal parts of the
Gearbox.
All components, except of the Scanner and the Gearbox (in Version A including the Transceiver Elec-
tronics Unit) belong to the category "protected from the weather".
The Scanner and the Gearbox (in version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the
category "exposed to the weather".
9.2 Performance
9.2.1 Performance Data of Radar Scan Converter GE3044G201
- Possible RPM of the antenna: 23 RPM, 28 RPM, 46 RPM, 56 RPM

- Max. ship’s speed: 70 kt
- Max. ship’s rate of turn: 1200°/min
- Pulse length: variable from 80 to 1000 ns
- Azimuth resolution: 1024 sweeps/circle = 0.35°
- Transformation: 1024 sweeps/360°
- Max. PRF for receiving: 4 kHz
- Max. PRF for processing: 2 kHz
- Ranges: 0.25 / 0.5 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 24 / 48 / 96 NM and
additionally two metric Ranges with 250 / 500 m
- Off-center range: max. 75%
- X/Y memory: 1024x1024x8 bit
- DSP clock frequency: 50 Mhz
- Video transmission to GVP: 15 Hz or higher
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 231

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9 Technical Data RADARPILOT 1000
9.2 Performance Technical Manual
9.2.2 Performance Data of the ARPA-PCB GE3044G202
Tracks
- Maximum number of targets: 50
- Range: 20 NM
- Max. speed (HSC, IEC 80/149 (936-2) D.1): true 70 kt
Manual target acquisition

- Min. distance: 0.01 NM
- Max. distance: 20 NM
- Time until track stable: about 10 turns
- Time until course and speed stable: about 15 turns
Automatic target acquisition:

- Min. distance: 0.1 NM
- Max. distance: 20 NM
- Number of target acquisition rings: 2
- Number of target acquisition sectors: 2
Maximum own ships speed: 70 kt
9.2.3 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G203
- Resolution: at least 1024 x 768 and 1280 x 1024 pixel

- Vertical refresh rate: at least 70 Hz in all resolutions
- Color depth: at least 256 colours
- Bus frequency: compatible with 100 MHz bus
9.2.4 Performance Data of the Interface and Memory Board GE3044G205
- Flash memory 4 MB or 8 MB
- CMOS RAM with 32 kB
- 4 serial interfaces RS422
- 4 alarm outputs, 2 alarm inputs
- 2 CAN Bus interfaces for Radar Bus and Nav Bus
232 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 9.2 Performance
9.2.5 Performance Data of the Analog Interface
- Microcontroller Siemens SAB 80C167CR with the following specifications:

- 2 kB internal RAM
- 2 kB XRAM
- 56 interrupt sources with 16 possible priority levels and separate interrupt vectors
- 16 A/D converters
- 9 timers (16 bit)
- 2 serial interfaces
- Programmable watchdog timer
- Bootstrap loader
- CAN controller
- Data memory 128 k x 8 bit RAM
- Parameter memory 256 k x 6 bit EEPROM
- Program memory 128 k x 8 bit flash-ROM
- AIS interface (RS422) (≥Rev.03)
9.2.6 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G208 (optional)
- Maximum resolution: 1280 x 1024 pixel

- Maximum vertical refresh rate: 75 Hz
- Maximum horizontal rate: 80 kHz
- Pixel clock: 135 MHz
Current consumption of the RGB buffer board: about 190 mA
9.2.7 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply
The power supply units conform to the ATX specification.

- Mains voltage: 115 V / 230 V (switchable or automatic full range)
FSP235-60GT:
- Max. mains consumption: 115 V/7 A, 230 V/4 A (±10%), 50...60 Hz (±5%)
- Output power: 235 W
- Output voltages/currents:
Voltage Current
+3.3 V 14.0 A
+5 V 22.0 A
+12 V 8.0 A
-12 V 0.8 A
-5 V 0.3 A
+5 V stand-by 0.8 A
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 233

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9.3 External Interfaces Technical Manual
FSP300-60PFN:
- Max. mains consumption: 115 V/10 A, 230 V/5 A, 50...60 Hz
- Output power: 300 W
- Output voltages/currents:
Voltage Current
+3.3 V 28.0 A
+5 V 30.0 A
+12 V 15.0 A
-12 V 0.8 A
-5 V 0.3 A
+5 V stand-by 2.0 A
9.3 External Interfaces
The Antenna Unit and the Transceiver have no external interfaces. The interfaces of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit are described in Section 4.5.10. For the IEC 61162 interfaces, see the service manual
ED3038G072.
9.3.1 Analog Interface
The interfaces for the analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and the pulse log can be parameterized for
different systems. For further information about the Analog Interface see Section 4.5.11.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
9.3.1.1 Analog Gyro
Input voltage ranges: <35 V or >35 V (set by parameterization)

Bearing resolution: 1/6° (typical) or 1/3°
Sensor type: AC, DC
Reference frequency: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
234 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 9.4 Power Supply
9.3.1.2 Pulse Log
Number of axes: 1 (x-axis) or 2 (x-, y-axes)

Number of pulses per NM: 125, 200
Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
Input Function
X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
XPM voltage can be configured in the service menus.
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
YPM voltage can be configured in the service menus.
BT Bottom track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be
configured in the service menus.
Water track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be
WT configured in the service menus.
External input for log-error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
ST2 input by jumper settings. See Section 4.5.11.
9.3.2 Interface Expander (EXTSIR1T)
For information, see the technical manual for the Ship’s Interface/Interface Expander/Navigation Inter-
face.
9.4 Power Supply
9.4.1 Display Electronics Unit
The mains supply required for the monitor depends on the type of monitor. See the monitor service
manual. The keyboards are supplied with power by the Display Electronics Unit. The maximum power
consumption of the Display Electronics Unit power supply is about 115 V / 7.4 A or 230 V / 4 A. The ATX
power supply unit has a maximum power output of 350 W.
9.4.1.1 Operating Unit
The Operating Unit must be supplied with power via the PS/2 connector and the keyboard illumination
must be supplied with power via an additional cable from the Display Electronics Unit.
The voltage supply is: 5 V DC ±10%
The following currents have been measured:
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 235

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9.5 Dimensions and Weights Technical Manual
- All LEDs at max. brightness 490 mA

- Without background illumination, 110 mA
status display at max. brightness
- Without background illumination 50 mA
and status display
9.5 Dimensions and Weights
For dimensions and weights, see the technical drawings. The drawings are shown in Section 13.
9.6 Compass Safe Distances
Standard Steering Standard Steering

compass compass compass reduced compass reduced
BD3028 Trackball 2.50 m 1.30 m
BD3027
Operating Unit 1). 2.50 m 1.35 m 1.50 m 0.80 m
AZ3040 Monitor 29" 2.70 m 1.50 m 1.60 m 0.90 m

AZ3053 Monitor 21" 2) 1.10 m 0.55 m 0.70 m 0.35 m
AZ3054 Monitor 29" 1.75 m 1.05 m 1.05 m 0.65 m
AZ3056G041 2.00 m 1.35 m 1.20 m 0.85 m
Monitor 20.1"
AZ3058 Monitor 21" 1.40 m 0.80 m 0.85 m 0.50 m
AZ3059 Monitor 20.1" 0.50 m 0.40 m 0.30 m 0.30 m
AZ3063 Monitor 23.1" 2.20 m 1.50 m 1.35 m 0.90 m
GE3044 Electronics
Unit 0.45 m 0.30 m 0.30 m 0.30 m
VS3034
Interconnection Box 0.50 m 0.40 m 0.30 m 0.30 m
GE3041 1.50 m 0.90 m 0.90 m 0.55 m

Interface Expander
1)
in iron sheet metal casing
2)
with BD 3027 in an aluminium desktop housing
236 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e09.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 10 System Faults
Technical Manual 10.1 System Fault Messages
10 System Faults
10.1 System Fault Messages
The following system faults are indicated by means of texts but not by means of codes.
Error Description
SP/EI CONFIG SP-PARAM DIFFER The SPEEDPILOT parameters saved in this Indicator do not corre-
(additional acoustic signal) spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT Electronics
Unit. The TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit might not be configured
correctly.
CONFIG TP-SPECIAL DIFFER The "Special Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-
(additional acoustic signal) spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP-SYSTEM DIFFER The "System Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-
(additional acoustic signal) spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
TRACKPILOT Electronics Unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP-USER DIFFER The "User Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond
(additional acoustic signal) with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACK-
PILOT Electronics Unit might not be configured correctly.
NEW INDICATOR CONFIG FILE A new set of parameters has been transmitted to the Indicator
from a second Indicator. The message cannot be acknowledged.
It disappears, when the Indicator has been restarted and therefore
the new set of parameters is in use.
INTERSWITCH ADJUST The Interswitch (PCI) is switched to service mode.
INDICATOR SERVICE SWITCH The Indicator of this radar is switched to service mode (hardware
switch). Programming of parameters and system configuration is
possible.
SI SERVICE SWITCH The Ship’s Interface which is connected to the system via a Radar
9xxx, is switched to service mode (hardware switch).
SP/EI SERVICE SWITCH The SPEEDPILOT is switched to service mode. Programming of
parameters and system configuration is possible.
TP SERVICE SWITCH The TRACKPILOT is switched to service mode. Programming of
parameters and system configuration is possible.
SP/EI Programming Active The parameters are currently stored. Wait until the storing process
has been finished.
10.2 AIS Faults
If a UAIS DEBEG 3400 Electronics Unit is connected, see the technical manual of the AIS Electronics
Unit for further information.
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 237

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults RADARPILOT 1000
10.3 System Fault Code List Technical Manual
10.3 System Fault Code List
The system fault codes are constantly under development. This list will be updated as often as possible.
The list also contains the fault codes for the Transceiver Electronics Unit.
Abbreviations:
General:
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check PCB Printed Circuit Board
DMA Direct Memory Access PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
EOT End Of Text QUEUE Kind of FIFO Memory
LEC Last Error Code ROT Rate-Of-Turn Sensor
NAK Negative Acknowledge SIO Serial Input Output (Serial COMM Port)
National Marine Electronics Association
NMEA (Standard for interfacing marine electronic WIND Wind Sensor
devices)
Devices:
Analog Interface (Gyro/Log I/F) or Inter-
AIS AIS-System, see AIS manuals MSI face Expander PCB
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid PCB NAVBUS CAN1-Bus
Interswitch (Processor Controlled Inter-
CFG Configuration PCI switch)
FSYS File System RKE Remote Keyboard Electronics
GYRO non NMEA serial gyro systems RSC Radar Scan Converter PCB
IMB Interface and Memory Board PCB SI9600 Ship’s Interface
LAN LAN Network SP SPEEDPILOT
MDB Track Data Base TP TRACKPILOT
MON Monitor TRM Transceiver (CUT/TCU)
Subdevices:
ADC Analog/Digital Converter GYRO Gyro
BITE Built-In Test Equipment IND Radar Indicator (Display Electronic Unit)
CAN-KBC (remote keyboard electronics
CAN_KB CAN-Bus) IVSC Part of RSC PCB
CAN0 Radar Bus LOG Log Sensor
CAN1 Navigation Bus MC Microcontroller
COMM Communication (generic) MPS Map Planning Station (Planning System)
CONFIG Configuration (System Configuration) POS Position Sensor
Conrac Monitor Manufacturer PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
CPOOL Memory Pool PS/2 PS/2 interface
DEPTH Depth Sensor QUEUE Queuesystem
DOLOG DOLOG Sensor RAM Random-Access Memory
DPM Dual-Ported Memory ROM Read-Only Memory
DRIVER Device Driver ROT Rate of Turn
DRV Driver SIO Serial Input/Output
Internal system resources (e.g. CPU
DSP Digital Signal Processor SYSTEM timer)
EEPROM Electrically Erasable PROM UART UART
238 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 10.3 System Fault Code List
System Faults:
Error Device Subdevice Info Activities
00131 FSYS Root filesystem checksum error
00132 FSYS File system error 2
00141 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam corrupt

00142 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam was corrupt
00143 CFG CONFIG bad chart function license key
00501 RSC1 DRIVER device not found

00502 RSC1 DRIVER video DMA timeout
00503 RSC1 COMM timeout error
00504 RSC1 COMM timeout warning
00505 RSC1 COMM receive pool empty
00506 RSC1 COMM send pool empty
00507 RSC1 COMM received unmatched message type
00508 RSC1 COMM received unexpected message
00509 RSC1 COMM reset timeout error
00511 RSC1 DSP1 startup BITE failure
00512 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-Bus overrun
00513 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-DMA failure
00521 RSC1 DSP2 startup BITE failure
00522 RSC1 DSP2 sweep DMA overrun
00523 RSC1 DSP2 antenna azimuth step overflow
00524 RSC1 DSP2 sweep read timeout
00531 RSC1 IVSC TVA sync start error
00532 RSC1 IVSC TVA antenna azimuth data error
00533 RSC1 IVSC control fault
00601 MON1 Ser1 NAK received

00602 MON1 Ser1 EOT not found
00603 MON1 Ser1 checksum error
00604 MON1 Ser1 invalid telegram
00605 MON1 Ser1 invalid command
00606 MON1 Ser1 timeout, or monitor switched off
01101 IMB1 SIO1 receive pool empty

01102 IMB1 SIO1 receive FIFO full
01103 IMB1 SIO1 receive buffer insufficient
01104 IMB1 SIO1 send pool empty
01105 IMB1 SIO1 send FIFO full
01106 IMB1 SIO1 send buffer insufficient
01107 IMB1 SIO1 illegal interrupt
01108 IMB1 SIO1 unexpected transmit interrupt
01111 IMB1 SIO1 binary: lost block
01112 IMB1 SIO1 binary: lost bytes
01113 IMB1 SIO1 binary: checksum error
01115 IMB1 SIO1 gyro: lost bytes
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 239

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01117 IMB1 SIO1 STXETX: lost bytes
01121 IMB1 SIO1 chip: overrun error
01122 IMB1 SIO1 chip: parity error
01123 IMB1 SIO1 chip: framing error



240 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01501 IMB1 CAN0 initialization error

01502 IMB1 CAN0 receive pool empty
01503 IMB1 CAN0 receive FIFO full
01504 IMB1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
01505 IMB1 CAN0 send pool empty
01506 IMB1 CAN0 send FIFO full
01507 IMB1 CAN0 send buffer insufficient
01508 IMB1 CAN0 unexpected transmit interrupt
01511 IMB1 CAN0 lost message
01512 IMB1 CAN0 message checksum error
01513 IMB1 CAN0 lost frame
01514 IMB1 CAN0 illegal frame type
01515 IMB1 CAN0 transmit request hang
01516 IMB1 CAN0 ghost interrupt
01517 IMB1 CAN0 receive overrun
01521 IMB1 CAN0 chip: warning
01522 IMB1 CAN0 chip: bus off
01523 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: no error
01524 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error
01525 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: form error
01526 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
01527 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error
01529 IMB1 CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error
01601 IMB1 CAN1 initialization error

01602 IMB1 CAN1 receive pool empty
01603 IMB1 CAN1 receive FIFO full
01604 IMB1 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
01605 IMB1 CAN1 send pool empty
01606 IMB1 CAN1 send FIFO full
01607 IMB1 CAN1 send buffer insufficient
01608 IMB1 CAN1 unexpected transmit interrupt
01611 IMB1 CAN1 lost message
01612 IMB1 CAN1 message checksum error
01613 IMB1 CAN1 lost frame
01614 IMB1 CAN1 illegal frame type
01615 IMB1 CAN1 transmit request hang
01616 IMB1 CAN1 ghost interrupt
01617 IMB1 CAN1 receive overrun
01621 IMB1 CAN1 chip: warning
01622 IMB1 CAN1 chip: bus off
01623 IMB1 CAN1 chip: LEC: no error
01624 IMB1 CAN1 chip: LEC: stuff error
01625 IMB1 CAN1 chip: LEC: form error
01626 IMB1 CAN1 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
01629 IMB1 CAN1 chip: LEC: CRC error
01801 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (generic)

01802 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (AIS)
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 241

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01810 LAN1 DRV send error (generic)
01811 LAN1 DRV send error (AIS)
01820 LAN1 DRV receive error (generic)
01821 LAN1 DRV receive error (AIS)
01851 PIXMAP DRV send fifo full

01860 PIXMAP DRV send error
01870 PIXMAP DRV receive error
01901 MDB system track read error

01902 MDB track catalog read error
02011 TRM COMM checkword timeout

02012 TRM COMM checkword error
02013 TRM COMM protocol failure
02014 TRM COMM receive failure
02015 TRM COMM send failure
02021 TRM CONFIG X/S-Band mismatch
02022 TRM CONFIG generation mismatch (R9600/R1000)
02100 TRM SYSTEM clock failure
02124 TRM RAM error
02125 TRM ROM error
02130 TRM IND1 invalid message type
02135 TRM IND1 setup data 1 incomplete
02140 TRM IND1 invalid sector count value
02145 TRM IND1 transmit data timeout
02150 TRM IND1 invalid frequency deviation
02155 TRM IND1 reset handling error
02160 TRM IND1 plausibility check failed
242 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02165 TRM IND1 setup data absent
02170 TRM IND1 checkword error
02175 TRM IND1 checkword timeout
02180 TRM IND1 invalid transmit data
02185 TRM IND1 invalid mode request
02190 TRM IND1 invalid indicator number
02195 TRM IND1 invalid PM parameter
02205 TRM IND1 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold
02210 TRM IND1 setup data 2 absent
02215 TRM IND1 invalid SEA (STC) curve
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 243

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02220 TRM IND1 invalid potentiometer curve
02270 TRM ADC interrupt tune
02271 TRM ADC interrupt auto SEA (STC)
02272 TRM invalid pulse per revolution count
02274 TRM invalid transceiver number
02275 TRM no antenna rotation
02276 TRM no external trigger
02277 TRM external trigger exceeds minimum
02278 TRM external trigger exceeds maximum
02279 TRM magnetron current failure - Check F1 on the Power Supply
Unit NG3028G202
- Check the correct functioning of
the HV supply switch in the
transceiver housing/Gearbox.
- Exchange Pulse Generator
NG3028G203 or NG3028G206
02280 TRM magnetron fatal error - Exchange Magnetron
- Exchange TCU NG3028G201
- Exchange Power Supply
NG3028G 202
- Exchange Mains Transformer
NG3028G007 X-Band or
NG3029G007 (S-Band)
02281 TRM no trigger
02300 TRM CAN0 checkword timeout
02301 TRM CAN0 checkword error
02302 TRM CAN0 invalid CAN object number
02303 TRM CAN0 invalid message type
02304 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in progress)
02305 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in queue)
02310 TRM CAN0 unknown error
02311 TRM CAN0 invalid parameter
02312 TRM CAN0 invalid write max value
02313 TRM CAN0 standard: checksum error
02314 TRM CAN0 standard: invalid block count
02315 TRM CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
02316 TRM CAN0 chip: reset hang
02317 TRM CAN0 invalid interrupt
02318 TRM CAN0 standard: lost block
02319 TRM CAN0 short pool empty
02320 TRM CAN0 long pool empty
02321 TRM CAN0 chip: bus off
02322 TRM CAN0 re-initialization error
02405 TRM BITE test not available
02406 TRM BITE BITE still active
02407 TRM BITE BITE inactive
02410 TRM BITE test not available
02411 TRM DPM select error
02412 TRM DPM lower RAM error
244 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02413 TRM DPM upper RAM error
02414 TRM ADC conversion error
02420 TRM supply voltage error
02500 TRM EEPROM checksum error
02501 TRM EEPROM write timeout
02502 TRM EEPROM first time initialization (new device)
02503 TRM SYSTEM controller watchdog
02504 TRM SYSTEM stack overflow
02505 TRM SYSTEM stack underflow
02506 TRM SYSTEM undefined operation
02507 TRM SYSTEM protection fault
02508 TRM SYSTEM illegal word access
02509 TRM SYSTEM illegal instruction access
02510 TRM ADC limit error: +5 V
02513 TRM ADC limit error: -15 V
02515 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error
02516 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
02517 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error
02518 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 0 error
02519 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error
02520 TRM no video
02521 TRM magnetron operation hours limit
02522 TRM EEPROM data compare error
02523 TRM try high speed antenna without option
02524 TRM magnetron heating voltage error
02525 TRM magnetron bias current error
02526 TRM adjust magnetron currents
03010 NAVBUS checkword timeout

03011 NAVBUS checkword error
03012 NAVBUS incompatible version
03013 NAVBUS no navigation data from sensor master
03014 NAVBUS fast gyro timeout
03020 NAVBUS multiple sensor master
03101 SI9600 CPOOL error (1..3)

03102 SI9600 CPOOL invalid pool
03103 SI9600 CPOOL invalid buffer
03104 SI9600 CPOOL pool empty
03111 SI9600 QUEUE error (1..4)
03112 SI9600 QUEUE receive event w/o buffer
03113 SI9600 QUEUE invalid queue
03114 SI9600 QUEUE invalid buffer
03115 SI9600 QUEUE BAB pool empty
03124 SI9600 RAM error
03125 SI9600 ROM error
03130 SI9600 EEPROM checksum error
03131 SI9600 EEPROM erase error
03132 SI9600 EEPROM write hang
03133 SI9600 EEPROM data error
03135 SI9600 LOG invalid configuration
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 245

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03136 SI9600 LOG VX noise
03137 SI9600 LOG VY noise
03138 SI9600 POS invalid configuration
03139 SI9600 CONFIG reset missing
03140 SI9600 CONFIG data changed
03141 SI9600 WIND double source
03142 SI9600 DEPTH double source
03143 SI9600 CONFIG SI to SI error
03150 SI9600 GYRO sample start missing
03151 SI9600 GYRO RST phase error
03152 SI9600 GYRO phase jumping
03153 SI9600 GYRO RST oscillating
03154 SI9600 GYRO CAN id 16 timeout
03155 SI9600 GYRO serial data timeout
03156 SI9600 ROT serial data timeout
03157 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: serial data error
03158 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: serial data error
03159 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error
03160 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: checksum error
03161 SI9600 GYRO NMEA: serial data error
03162 SI9600 ROT NMEA: serial data error
03163 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: serial data error
03164 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: serial data error
03165 SI9600 GYRO serial data jumping
03166 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error
03167 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: checksum error
03168 SI9600 COMPASS reference error
03169 SI9600 COMPASS difference error
03170 SI9600 SIO pool initialization error
03171 SI9600 SIO pool back
03172 SI9600 SIO pool empty
03173 SI9600 SIO buffer insufficient
03211 SI9600 SIO1 send timeout
03212 SI9600 SIO1 receive error
03213 SI9600 SIO1 send error
03214 SI9600 SIO1 invalid message length
03215 SI9600 SIO1 checkword timeout
03216 SI9600 SIO1 data timeout
246 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03290 SI9600 MPS checkword timeout
03291 SI9600 MPS checkword error
03292 SI9600 MPS track checksum error
03300 SI9600 CAN1 checkword timeout
03301 SI9600 CAN1 checkword error
03302 SI9600 CAN1 invalid CAN object number
03303 SI9600 CAN1 invalid message type
03304 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in progress)
03305 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in queue)
03310 SI9600 CAN1 unknown error
03311 SI9600 CAN1 invalid parameter
03312 SI9600 CAN1 invalid write max value
03313 SI9600 CAN1 standard: checksum error
03314 SI9600 CAN1 standard: invalid block count
03315 SI9600 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
03316 SI9600 CAN1 chip: reset hang
03317 SI9600 CAN1 invalid interrupt
03318 SI9600 CAN1 standard: lost block
03319 SI9600 CAN1 short pool empty
03320 SI9600 CAN1 long pool empty
03321 SI9600 CAN1 chip: bus off
03330 SI9600 CAN1 pool back
03331 SI9600 CAN1 pool empty
03401 SI9600 SIO1 checksum error
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 247

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03410 SI9600 DOLOG invalid message length
03411 SI9600 DOLOG sensor timeout
03412 SI9600 DOLOG speed timeout
03413 SI9600 DOLOG depth timeout
03498 SI9600 invalid configuration
03500 SI9600 BITE test not available
03614 AIS SIR10T receive failure

03615 AIS SIR10T send failure
03616 AIS SIR10T SIR10T timeout
03617 AIS AIS AIS timeout
03701 GYRO C.Plath: 01 - Failure of gyro power supply

03702 GYRO C.Plath: 02 - Reset of the controller
03703 GYRO C.Plath: 03 - Computer is in test mode or dip-
switch ’External Synchronisation’ closed
03704 GYRO C.Plath: 04 - RAM internal error
03705 GYRO C.Plath: 05 - RAM external error
03706 GYRO C.Plath: 06 - PROM checksum error
03707 GYRO C.Plath: 07 - Heading error at 2 deg light
barrier
03708 GYRO C.Plath: 08 - Heading error at 360 deg light
barrier
03709 GYRO C.Plath: 09 - Failure of 2 deg light barrier
03710 GYRO C.Plath: 10 - Failure of 360 deg light barrier
03711 GYRO C.Plath: 11 - Watchdog alarm
03712 GYRO C.Plath: 12 - Heading not synchronized
03713 GYRO C.Plath: 13 - Reset after Power-Down-Mode
03714 GYRO C.Plath: 14 - RAM-Power alarm
03715 GYRO C.Plath: 15 - AD-Failure
03716 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error
03717 GYRO C.Plath: sync bit error
03718 GYRO C.Plath: message size error
03719 GYRO C.Plath: magnetic compass
03721 GYRO Anschuetz: second gyro differs
03722 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro invalid
03723 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro phase < 45 deg
03724 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro settling phase
03725 GYRO Anschuetz: sensor not available
03726 GYRO Anschuetz: heading jumping
03727 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error
03728 GYRO Anschuetz: high bit error
03729 GYRO Anschuetz: system error
03730 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro error
03740 GYRO GYRO heading jump
03801 SI1 RAM error

03802 SI1 ROM error
03803 SI1 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error
03804 SI1 CAN1 buffer error
03805 SI1 CAN1 protocol error
03806 SI1 EEPROM error
248 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03807 SI1 MC system error
03809 SI1 GYRO RST combination error
03810 SI1 GYRO RST step size error
03811 SI1 GYRO reference timeout
03812 SI1 GYRO error input
03813 SI1 LOG error input
03814 SI1 LOG VX input error
03815 SI1 LOG VY input error
03816 SI1 AIS target overflow
03817 SI1 COMM checkword timeout
03818 SI1 COMM checkword error
03819 SI1 COMM incompatible version
03820 SI1 COMM invalid message type
03824 SI1 CPOOL CPOOL error
03825 SI1 CPOOL Pool bad
03826 SI1 CPOOL Buffer bad
03827 SI1 CPOOL Pool empty
03828 SI1 QUEUE Queue error
03829 SI1 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer
03830 SI1 QUEUE Queue bad
03831 SI1 QUEUE Buffer bad
03833 SI1 LOG Configuration fault
03834 SI1 UART1 Read error
03835 SI1 UART1 Write error
03836 SI1 UART1 Message length ill
03837 SI1 UART1 Data time-out
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 249

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03866 SI1 CAN1 No check
03867 SI1 CAN1 Bad check
03868 SI1 CAN1 Bad object ID
03869 SI1 CAN1 Bad transfer number
03870 SI1 CAN1 Send in progress
03871 SI1 CAN1 Send in queue
03872 SI1 CAN1 Unknown error
03873 SI1 CAN1 Bad parameters
03874 SI1 CAN1 Bad write maximum
03875 SI1 CAN1 Bad checksum
03876 SI1 CAN1 Bad block count
03877 SI1 CAN1 Receive buffer too small
03878 SI1 CAN1 Reset hang
03879 SI1 CAN1 Bad interrupt
03880 SI1 CAN1 Lost data block
03881 SI1 CAN1 Short pool empty
03882 SI1 CAN1 Long pool empty
03883 SI1 CAN1 Bus error
03884 SI1 CAN1 Send bool back
03885 SI1 CAN1 Send bool empty
03886 SI1 UART1 Checksum error
03894 SI1 SI Configuration wrong
03895 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro time out
03896 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error
03901 SI2 RAM error

03902 SI2 ROM error
03903 SI2 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error
03904 SI2 CAN1 buffer error
03905 SI2 CAN1 protocol error
03906 SI2 EEPROM error
03907 SI2 MC system error
03909 SI2 GYRO RST combination error
03910 SI2 GYRO RST step size error
03911 SI2 GYRO reference timeout
03912 SI2 GYRO error input
03913 SI2 LOG error input
03914 SI2 LOG VX input error
03915 SI2 LOG VY input error
03916 SI2 AIS target overflow
03917 SI2 COMM checkword timeout
03918 SI2 COMM checkword error
03919 SI2 COMM incompatible version
03920 SI2 COMM invalid message type
250 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03924 SI2 CPOOL CPOOL error
03925 SI2 CPOOL Pool bad
03926 SI2 CPOOL Buffer bad
03927 SI2 CPOOL Pool empty
03928 SI2 QUEUE Queue error
03929 SI2 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer
03930 SI2 QUEUE Queue bad
03931 SI2 QUEUE Buffer bad
03933 SI2 LOG Configuration fault
03966 SI2 CAN1 No check
03967 SI2 CAN1 Bad check
03968 SI2 CAN1 Bad object ID
03969 SI2 CAN1 Bad transfer number
03970 SI2 CAN1 Send in progress
03971 SI2 CAN1 Send in queue
03972 SI2 CAN1 Unknown error
03973 SI2 CAN1 Bad parameters
03974 SI2 CAN1 Bad write maximum
03975 SI2 CAN1 Bad checksum
03976 SI2 CAN1 Bad block count
03977 SI2 CAN1 Receive buffer too small
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 251

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03978 SI2 CAN1 Reset hang
03979 SI2 CAN1 Bad interrupt
03980 SI2 CAN1 Lost data block
03981 SI2 CAN1 Short pool empty
03982 SI2 CAN1 Long pool empty
03983 SI2 CAN1 Bus error
03984 SI2 CAN1 Send bool back
03985 SI2 CAN1 Send bool empty
03994 SI2 SI Configuration wrong
03995 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro time out
03996 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error
04001 ARPA DRIVER device not found

04010 ARPA north marker timeout
04011 ARPA DRIVER video DMA interrupt timeout
04020 ARPA video offset low (R102: DS4red)
04021 ARPA video offset high (R102)
04022 ARPA video gain low (R101) or too much SEA(STC)
04023 ARPA video gain high (R101: DS2red)
04100 ARPA target acquired twice
04101 ARPA target distance small
04102 ARPA no sweeps in video memory
04103 ARPA sweep to sweep angle small
04104 ARPA unexpected change of sweep to sweep angle
04105 ARPA time per revolution small
04106 ARPA PRF out of limits
04107 ARPA missing threshold from DSP
04108 ARPA target bearing not in video memory
04109 ARPA target bearing disappeared in video memory
04110 ARPA target speed out of limit
04111 ARPA target size large
04112 ARPA shutdown received
05011 PCI1 COMM checkword timeout

05012 PCI1 COMM checkword error
05014 PCI1 COMM receive error
05015 PCI1 COMM send error
05100 PCI1 SYSTEM clock error
05124 PCI1 RAM error
05125 PCI1 ROM error
05130 PCI1 RELAY 0 switch error
252 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

05155 PCI1 RELAY 0 i/o error
05160 PCI1 IND1 invalid inter-switch request
05165 PCI1 IND1 invalid transmit data
05170 PCI1 target device overflow
05171 PCI1 unknown i/o device
05172 PCI1 unable to release CAN chip
05173 PCI1 unable to release relay matrix
05174 PCI1 unable to release i/o relay
05300 PCI1 CAN0 checkword timeout
05301 PCI1 CAN0 checkword error
05302 PCI1 CAN0 invalid CAN object number
05303 PCI1 CAN0 invalid message type
05304 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in progress)
05305 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in queue)
05310 PCI1 CAN0 unknown error
05311 PCI1 CAN0 invalid parameter
05312 PCI1 CAN0 invalid write max value
05313 PCI1 CAN0 standard: checksum error
05314 PCI1 CAN0 standard: invalid block count
05315 PCI1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
05316 PCI1 CAN0 chip: reset hang
05317 PCI1 CAN0 invalid interrupt
05318 PCI1 CAN0 standard: lost block
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 253

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

05319 PCI1 CAN0 short pool empty
05320 PCI1 CAN0 long pool empty
05321 PCI1 CAN0 chip: bus off
05322 PCI1 CAN0 re-initialization error
05405 PCI1 BITE test not available
05406 PCI1 BITE BITE still active
05407 PCI1 BITE BITE inactive
05410 PCI1 BITE test not available
06001 TP DRIVER checkword timeout

06002 TP DRIVER checkword error
06005 TP DRIVER cancel timeout
06006 TP DRIVER BITE timeout
06007 TP DRIVER no BITE response
06101 TP MC1 CPOOL: error (1..3)
06102 TP MC1 CPOOL: invalid pool
06103 TP MC1 CPOOL: invalid buffer
06104 TP MC1 CPOOL: pool empty
06111 TP MC1 QUEUE: error (1..4)
06112 TP MC1 QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
06113 TP MC1 QUEUE: invalid queue
06114 TP MC1 QUEUE: invalid buffer
06115 TP MC1 QUEUE: BAB pool empty
06124 TP MC1 RAM: error
06125 TP MC1 ROM: error
06127 TP MC1 CMOS-RAM: error
06129 TP MC1 EEPROM organization bad
06130 TP MC1 EEPROM general failure
06131 TP MC1 EEPROM protect hang
06132 TP MC1 EEPROM lock hang
06133 TP MC1 EEPROM programming timeout
06134 TP MC1 EEPROM verify failed
06139 TP MC1 address overflow
06140 TP MC1 EEPROM user & system configuration invalid
06141 TP MC1 EEPROM tp settings configuration invalid
06142 TP MC1 EEPROM special configuration invalid
06150 TP MC1 lost data (CAN curve buffer small)
06180 TP MC1 invalid TP configuration (2*TP1 or 2*TP2)
06181 TP MC1 Slave system displays wrong control mode
06199 TP MC1 ghost interrupt from PIC
06201 TP MC1 serial message not send
06211 TP MC1 SIO receive error
06212 TP MC1 SIO send error
06213 TP MC1 SIO invalid message length
06214 TP MC1 SIO checkword timeout
06215 TP MC1 lost data: SYN TX buffer small
06216 TP MC1 lost data: TP-SYN buffer small
06217 TP MC1 lost data: SP-SYN buffer small
06219 TP MC1 lost data: CHL-SYN buffer small
06220 TP MC1 track checksum error
06221 TP MC1 track parameter 1 error
254 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06226 TP MC1 track checksum error 1
06230 TP MC1 NAV-Data new
06231 TP MC1 NAV-Data changed
06232 TP MC1 NAV-Data not complete
06233 TP MC1 NAV-Turnpoints equal
06234 TP MC1 NAV-WPT synch.
06235 TP MC1 NAV-Start
06236 TP MC1 track lat/lon error
06238 TP MC1 WPRQ fast
06239 TP MC1 WPRQ slow
06240 TP MC1 NAV-X/Y overflow
06241 TP MC1 NAV-Xrel overflow
06242 TP MC1 NAV-Yrel overflow
06243 TP MC1 NAV-Delta XB overflow
06244 TP MC1 NAV-Delta YB overflow
06245 TP MC1 NAV-Delta XC overflow
06246 TP MC1 NAV-Delta YC overflow
06247 TP MC1 Track checksum error
06248 TP MC1 Track checksum error 1
06249 TP MC1 Track checksum error 2
06250 TP MC1 FPU not available
06251 TP MC1 FPU initialization error
06252 TP MC1 FPU domain error
06253 TP MC1 FPU result error
06255 TP MC1 FPU test 1 error
06260 TP MC1 NAV-Position timeout
06261 TP MC1 NAV-Course/Speed timeout
06262 TP MC1 NAV-Date/Time timeout
06263 TP MC1 NAV-WPT-Track timeout
06264 TP MC1 NAV-Task timeout
06300 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
06301 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
06302 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
06303 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
06304 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
06305 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
06310 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
06311 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
06312 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
06313 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
06314 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
06315 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
06316 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
06317 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
06318 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
06319 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 255

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06320 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
06321 TP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
06400 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
06401 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
06402 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
06403 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
06404 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
06405 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in queue)
06410 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown check
06411 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
06412 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
06413 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
06414 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
06415 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
06416 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
06417 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
06418 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
06419 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
06420 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
06421 TP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
06480 TP MC1 CAN send nav pool empty
06481 TP MC1 CAN send nav pool back
06501 TP MC1 MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
06502 TP MC1 MMCI pool is empty
06503 TP MC1 MMCI DPM error
06504 TP MC1 MMCI pool size too small during initialization
06505 TP MC1 MMCI function address is null
06506 TP MC1 MMCI received event without buffer queue
06507 TP MC1 MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
06508 TP MC1 MMCI DPM clear to send timeout
06509 TP MC1 MMCI invalid message length received
06510 TP MC1 MMCI illegal partition size
06511 TP MC1 MMCI lost data during receive
06520 TP MC1 MC2 checkword timeout
06521 TP MC1 MC2 checkword error
06522 TP MC1 MC2 invalid message type
06530 TP MC1 MC2 BITE timeout
06549 TP MC1 MC2 unknown error code
06551 TP MC2 MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
06552 TP MC2 MMCI pool is empty
06553 TP MC2 MMCI DPM error
06554 TP MC2 MMCI pool size too small during initialization
06555 TP MC2 MMCI error function address is null
06556 TP MC2 MMCI received event without buffer queue
06557 TP MC2 MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
06558 TP MC2 MMCI DPM clear to send timeout
06559 TP MC2 MMCI invalid message length received
06560 TP MC2 MMCI illegal partition size
06561 TP MC2 MMCI lost data during receive
06580 TP MC2 MC1 checkword timeout
06581 TP MC2 MC1 checkword error
06601 TP MC2 CPOOL error (1..3)
06602 TP MC2 CPOOL invalid pool
256 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06603 TP MC2 CPOOL invalid buffer
06604 TP MC2 CPOOL pool empty
06611 TP MC2 QUEUE error (1..4)
06612 TP MC2 QUEUE receive event w/o buffer
06613 TP MC2 QUEUE invalid queue
06614 TP MC2 QUEUE invalid buffer
06615 TP MC2 QUEUE BAB pool empty
06624 TP MC2 RAM error
06625 TP MC2 ROM error
06626 TP MC2 missing EEPROM and CMOS data
06699 TP MC2 ghost interrupt
06701 TP MC2 serial message (RC) not send
06710 TP MC2 RC UART timeout
06711 TP MC2 RC receive error
06712 TP MC2 RC send error
06713 TP MC2 RC invalid message length received
06714 TP MC2 RC checkword timeout
06715 TP MC2 RC checkword error
06716 TP MC2 RC data not complete
06717 TP MC2 RC unknown error code
06718 TP MC2 RC control mode not available
06721 TP RC: RC ROM error
06722 TP RC: RC RAM error
06725 TP RC: RC status fault A/D-converter
06726 TP RC: RC error test signal T1 (AN.-OUT 1)
06727 TP RC: RC error test signal T2 (AN.-OUT 2)
06728 TP RC: RC error test signal T3 (+10V)
06729 TP RC: RC error test signal T4 (-10V)
06730 TP RC: RC set rudder overflow
06731 TP RC: RC ser-RX: parity error
06732 TP RC: RC ser-RX: checksum error
06733 TP RC: RC ser-RX: invalid message type
06738 TP MC2 serial integ-control system timeout
06739 TP MC2 azimuth thruster interface error
06740 TP MC2 actual rudder not equal set-rudder
06741 TP MC2 Rudder1 not equal Rudder2
06742 TP MC2 Port rudder failure
06743 TP MC2 Starboard rudder failure
06744 TP MC2 Rudder feedback failure
06750 TP MC2 ROT prediction error
06800 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword timeout
06801 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword error
06802 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid CAN object number
06803 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid message type
06804 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in progress)
06805 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in queue)
06810 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 unknown error
06811 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid parameter
06812 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid write max value
06813 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: checksum error
06814 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: invalid block count
06815 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
06816 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: reset hang
06817 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid interrupt
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 257

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06818 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: lost block
06819 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 short pool empty
06820 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 long pool empty
06821 TP MC2 NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: bus off
06910 TP MC2 course integration error
06912 TP MC2 joystick fault
06914 TP MC2 missing position type
06915 TP MC2 missing position status
06916 TP MC2 Trackmode-data wrong update
06917 TP MC2 Trackmode-data timeout
06918 TP MC2 Trackmode: OFF COURSE for NEW TRACK
06919 TP MC2 Trackmode: NEW TRACK in curve
06920 TP MC2 trackmode centered
06922 TP MC2 invalid curve sequence
06923 TP MC2 filtered XTD too large
06931 TP MC2 RPM PRT missing
06932 TP MC2 RPM STB missing
08001 SP DRIVER checkword timeout

08002 SP DRIVER checkword error
08005 SP DRIVER cancel timeout
08006 SP DRIVER BITE timeout
08007 SP DRIVER no BITE response
08010 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of system parameter
08011 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of user parameter
08101 SP MC1 CPOOL: error (1..3)
08102 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid pool
08103 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid buffer
08104 SP MC1 CPOOL: pool empty
08111 SP MC1 QUEUE: error (1..4)
08112 SP MC1 QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
08113 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid queue
08114 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid buffer
08115 SP MC1 QUEUE: BAB pool empty
08124 SP MC1 RAM: error
08125 SP MC1 ROM: error
08126 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 TP-DMC1 timeout
08127 SP MC1 CMOS-RAM: error
08129 SP MC1 EEPROM organization bad
08130 SP MC1 EEPROM general failure
08131 SP MC1 EEPROM protect hang
08132 SP MC1 EEPROM lock hang
08133 SP MC1 EEPROM programming timeout
08134 SP MC1 EEPROM verify failed
08139 SP MC1 address overflow
08140 SP MC1 EEPROM parameter configuration invalid
08141 SP MC1 EEPROM user/system configuration invalid
08199 SP MC1 ghost interrupt from PIC
08201 SP MC1 serial message not send
08211 SP MC1 SIO receive error
08212 SP MC1 SIO send error
08213 SP MC1 SIO invalid message length
08214 SP MC1 SIO checkword timeout
08215 SP MC1 SIO checkword error
258 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

08220 SP MC1 speed timeout
08300 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
08301 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
08302 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
08303 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
08304 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
08305 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
08310 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
08311 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
08312 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
08313 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
08314 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
08315 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
08316 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
08317 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
08318 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
08319 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
08320 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
08321 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
08400 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
08401 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
08402 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
08403 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
08404 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
08405 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
08410 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown error
08411 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
08412 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
08413 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
08414 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
08415 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
08416 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
08417 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
08418 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
08419 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
08420 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
08421 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
08480 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool empty
08481 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool back
08501 SP MC1 MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
08502 SP MC1 MMCI pool is empty
08503 SP MC1 MMCI DPM error
08504 SP MC1 MMCI pool size too small during initialization
08505 SP MC1 MMCI function address is null
08506 SP MC1 MMCI received event without buffer queue
08507 SP MC1 MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
08508 SP MC1 MMCI DPM clear to send timeout
08509 SP MC1 MMCI invalid message length received
08510 SP MC1 MMCI illegal partition size
08511 SP MC1 MMCI lost data during receive
08520 SP MC1 MC2 checkword timeout
08521 SP MC1 MC2 checkword error
08522 SP MC1 MC2 invalid message type
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 259

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

08601 SP MC1 SI checkword timeout
08602 SP MC1 SI checkword error
08603 SP MC1 SI invalid broadcast message type
08604 SP MC1 SI invalid message type
08700 SP MC1 EI1 analog input fault
08701 SP MC1 EI1 VDIG voltage fault
08702 SP MC1 EI1 VDD_M voltage fault
08703 SP MC1 EI1 VEE_M voltage fault
08704 SP MC1 EI1 VREF voltage fault
08705 SP MC1 EI1 VLM voltage fault
08706 SP MC1 EI1 VLP voltage fault
08710 SP MC1 EI1 high int. freq. at digtal input
08800 SP MC1 EI2 analog input fault
08801 SP MC1 EI2 UKOM voltage fault
08802 SP MC1 EI2 VDD_M voltage fault
08803 SP MC1 EI2 VEE_M voltage fault
08805 SP MC1 EI2 temperature input fault
08810 SP MC1 EI2 lever output fault
08811 SP MC1 EI2 busy relay fault
08812 SP MC1 EI2 lever feedback fault
08814 SP MC1 EI2 watchdog
08815 SP MC1 EI/SP no master
08816 SP MC1 SP lost one of two enable signals
09001 RKE1 RAM check error

09002 RKE1 ROM check error
09003 RKE1 CAN_KB bus frame error
09004 RKE1 CAN_KB bus buffer error
09005 RKE1 CAN_KB bus protocol error
09006 RKE1 EEPROM checksum error
09007 RKE1 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... )
09008 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error
09009 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error
09010 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error
09011 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error
09020 RKE1 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE
09021 RKE1 CAN_KB no default Slave found
09029 RKE1 COM1 error while reading byte
09030 RKE1 COM1 error while writing byte
09031 RKE1 COM1 illegal size for message type
09032 RKE1 COM1 data time out while reading
09033 RKE1 COM1 uart 1 checksum error
260 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05


ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 261

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05



262 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05



ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 263

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05


264 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05



ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 265

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10001 VDR offline

10002 VDR no picture written, LAN connection lost
10010 VDR final recording medium data overflow
10011 VDR microphone test failed
10012 VDR error during process load
10013 VDR process aborted
10014 VDR error during picture grabbing
10016 VDR main power failure
10017 VDR UPS fault
10018 VDR audio not found
10019 VDR error during 4300 control process load
10020 VDR final recording medium bit error
10021 VDR final recording medium not connected
10022 VDR final recording medium IP control failure
10023 VDR receive timeout of NMEA 0183 data (IEC
61162-1/2) on serial interfaces or LAN
10024 VDR network error
10025 VDR external alarm
266 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e10.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 11 Index of Parameters
Technical Manual
11 Index of Parameters
A Channel of this Gyro (Sensor Interface) 145, 147

Acceleration 129 CHARTRADAR Function (Indicators) 133
Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display 152 CHARTRADAR Function License Key (Indicators) 133
Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display 152 CHARTRADAR Identification Code (Indicators) 133
Additional Alarms Setup Menu 130 Check IMB Alarm IO 156
Additional Information (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 Check RSC Adjust 156
Additional Information (Transceiver) 138 Clutch Label 153
Administration 128 C-Map CM93/2 Database 154
Administration (Indicators) 132 C-Map CM93/3 Database 154
Advanced Settings (Service) 162 C-Map Identifier 152
AFT Bridge is active String 131 Coloured Angle Display Limit 152
AIS 128 Commissioning Data 166
AIS Channel 144 Compress 126
AIS Lost Target witout Alarm 131 Config Transfer 166
Alarm Relays Activation Delay (Indicators) 132 Configure 125
Allowed to be Sensor Master (Indicators) 133 Connected Monitor (Indicators) 132
Analog Gyro System (Sensor Interface) 141 Connected Planning System 128
Antenna (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 Conning 152
Antenna (Transceiver) 138 Conning (Indicators) 133
Antenna Information (Service) 164
Antenna Motor Frequency (Transceiver) 139
ARCS Database 154 D
ARCS User Permit Number 152 Dangerous Target Alarm (Indicators) 132
ARPA 121 Date & Time 115
ARPA Adjust 157 Default Depth (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
ARPA Lost Target without Alarm 131 Default Weather (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
Availability of additional Displays 153 Default Wind (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution (Transceiver) 139 Depth (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
Azimuth Thruster Parameters 152 Depth (Sensor Interface) 146, 147
Depth Sensor 1 (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
Depth Value 137, 146
B Differentiated Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier (Sensor Interface) 148, 150 Direct ENC Database 154
Based on Specification (Indicators) 133 Diskette 117
Basic Radar 131 Displacement 154
Baud Rate (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135 Displacement Table 154
Baud Rate (Sensor Interface) 145, 148 Display Pitch Bar 153
Beam Width (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 Display Power Bar 153
Beam Width (Transceiver) 138 Display Selected Gyro 135, 137, 144, 145, 147
BIOS Settings 168 Distance Longitudinal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135,
BIOS Settings for Motherboard DFI CA61/CB61 170 136
BIOS Settings for Motherboard Tekram S3ZX-A 169 Distance Longitudinal (Sensor Interface) 142, 145, 146,
Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 147, 148, 149
Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver) 138 Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver) 138
Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver) 138 Distance to Bow (System) 128
Bottom Track (BT) Input (Sensor Interface) 142 Distance to P (System) 128
Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) (Sensor Interface) Distance to SB (System) 128
148, 150 Distance to Stern (System) 128
Buzzer 118 Distance Transversal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135,
136
Distance Transversal (Sensor Interface) 142, 145, 146,
C 147, 148, 149
Distance Transversal (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
Camera 148 Distance Transversal (Transceiver) 138
Catalog (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137 Double End Ferry 134
Catalog (Sensor Interface) 147 Draught 154
Central Dimming Adjustment 134 Driver (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135
Channel (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135, 136, 137
Channel (Sensor Interface) 145, 146, 147, 148, 149
Channel of this Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135,
137
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 267

t_eu1_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
11 Index of Parameters RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
E M
ENC Database 154 Magnetron (Service) 162
ENC User Permit No. 152 Magnetron Current (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDPILOT) 127 Magnetron Current Long (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
Error Input (Sensor Interface) 141, 142 Magnetron Current Medium (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
Expand 126 Magnetron Current Short (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
Magnetron Hours (Service) 164
Map Delete 116
F Map Transfer 115
Frequency Deviation (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 Maximum Radius 129
Frequency Deviation (Transceiver) 138 Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 129
Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of 130 Minimum Radius 129
FWD Bridge is active String 131 Monitor Adjust 156
Monitor Aspect Ratio 134
Monitor Control Interface 134
G
Generator Parameters 153
GLL, GGA Selection (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135 N
GLL, GGA Selection (Sensor Interface) 145, 149 NACOS 151, 165
Guard Zone Alarm (Indicators) 132 NACOS (System Layout) 127
Gyro (Sensor Interface) 141 Name (Indicators) 132
Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor 129 Nominal Speed 129
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor 129 Number of Azimuth Thrusters 152
Gyro against Magnetic Compass 129 Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver 9xxx) 140
Gyro Input Voltage (Sensor Interface) 141 Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver) 138
Gyro Monitoring 129 Number of Clutches 153
Number of Generators 153
Number of Shafts 153
H
Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
Heading Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 141 O
Headmarker (Service -> Transceiver) 159 Output (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 136, 149
Headmarker Adjust (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 Own Database 154
P
I Planning System 151
Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of 129 PM Adjust (Service -> Transceiver) 161
Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of 130 PMA Display (Service -> Transceiver) 160
IMB Map Storage Test 118 Position (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135
Increment (Sensor Interface) 141, 142 Position (Sensor Interface) 145, 148
Indicator 127 Position (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
Indicator (Service) 156 Position against Redundant Position Sensor 130
Installed Type of Tracking Facility 132 Position Monitoring 130
Interswitch 164 Position Quality Check 129
Interswitch (PCI) 127 Pulse Log (Sensor Interface) 141
K R
Keyboard 118 Radar 132
Keyboard (Indicators) 132 Radar PPI Radius 133
Radio Direction Finder 148
Reference (Sensor Interface) 141
L RKE Settings 158
Last Modification Date (Transceiver) 139, 140 RKE Software Update 158
Length at Waterline 129 Route (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
Local Indicator Number 127 Route (Sensor Interface) 146
Log Type (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 136 RSC Test Pictures 119
Log Type (Sensor Interface) 142, 146, 147, 149 RTE Message Route Identifier (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter- faces) 137
faces) 136 RTE Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface)
143, 146, 147, 149
Lost Target Alarm (Indicators) 132 S
Scale Generator Power Bar 153
268 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 11 Index of Parameters
Technical Manual
Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar 153 System Maintenance Manager 113

Scale Off Course Bar 153 System Position (System) 128
Scale Off Track Bar 153
Scale Orientation 152
Scale RPM Bar 152, 153 T
Scale Rudder Display 153 TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn 131
Scale Shaft Power Bar 153 Thruster Angle Display Coloured 152
Sector Blanking (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Thruster Angle Display Mode 152
Sector Blanking (Transceiver) 138 Time (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 136
Security Unique Identifier (UID) 152 Time (Sensor Interface) 146, 149
Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets Time (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
151 Time from Selected Position Sensor (Startup Sensor Sel-
Selfcheck 118 ection) 131
Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT 151 Tools 115
Sensor Interface 140 Track Transfer 117
Sensor Interface Identifier (Sensor Interface) 142 TRACKPILOT 127
Sensor Interfaces 127 TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces)
Sensor Number (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135 137
Sensor Number (Sensor Interface) 145, 149 TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Sensor Interface) 147
Serial Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 135 Transceiver 127
Serial Gyro (Sensor Interface) 145 Transceiver (Service) 159
Serial I/O Monitor 157 Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT 134
Serial Output used as 137, 150 Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
Service 155 faces) 136
Service Report 167 Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 143,
Settings for Anschutz (serial Gyro) (Sensor Interface) 147 146, 147, 149
Settings for ATLAS DOLOG (Sensor Interface) 147 Trigger Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 159
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P (Sensor Inter- Trigger Delay (Transceiver 9xxx) 139
face) 147, 150 Tuning Indication Gain 163
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz (Indicator’s Serial In- Tuning Offset (Service) 163
terfaces) 137 Type of AIS 144
Settings for C.Plath (serial Gyro) (Sensor Interface) 147 Type of Camera 148
Settings for Camera 148 Type of Generation (Transceiver) 138
Settings for Lambrecht (Wind Sensor) (Sensor Interface) Type of Radio Direction Finder 148
147
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) (Sensor Interface)
145, 148 U
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) (Indicator’s Seri- Use Speed from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
al Interfaces) 135 faces) 135
Settings for Radio Direction Finder 148 Use Speed from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 145,
Settings for Thies (Wind Sensor) (Sensor Interface) 147 149
Setting-to-Work (Service -> Transceiver) 159 Use Time from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
Shaft Parameters 153 faces) 136
Ship Data 128 Use Time from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 146,
Ship Data for AIS 128 149
Software Update 157
Speed (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 136
Speed (Sensor Interface) 146, 147, 149 V
Speed (Startup Sensor Selection) 131
Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor 130 VDR 128
Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor 130 Video Anti Clutter Sea 131
Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor 130 Video MBS (Service -> Transceiver) 159
Speed Capability (Transceiver) 138 VX Input (Sensor Interface) 143
Speed Monitoring 130 VY Input (Sensor Interface) 143
Speed Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 141
Squat Coefficient 154
Startup Sensor Selection 131 W
STC Compensation (Service) 163 Water Track Input (WT) (Sensor Interface) 143
STC Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 159 Weather (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
STC Delay (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Weather (Sensor Interface) 146
STC Delay Long Pulse (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Wind (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
STC Delay Medium Pulse (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Wind (Sensor Interface) 146
STC Delay Short Pulse (Transceiver 9xxx) 140 Wind Reference (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 136, 150
STC-Curve (Transceiver 9xxx) 139 WPL Remark (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 137
System / Ship Parameters 128
System Fault Alarm (Indicators) 132
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 269

t_eu1_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
11 Index of Parameters RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
X
XPM Input (Sensor Interface) 143
Y
YPM Input (Sensor Interface) 143
270 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 12 Cabling Documents
Technical Manual
12 Cabling Documents
Title Page
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/3 273
Cable Diagram, Single Installation, 2/3 274
C a b l e D i a g r a m , D u a l A l o f t I n s t a l l a t i o n ( Ve r s i o n A ) , 3 / 3 275
Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G206, 1/4 276
Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G216, 2/4 277
Connection Diagram, Intercon. Board GE3044G216, Analog Interface, COM Expander 3/4 278
C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r u p , Tr a n s c e i v e r d o w n , 4 / 4 279
X - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 280
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 4 281
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H e a d m a r k e r a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 1 a / 4 282
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 4 283
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H e a d m a r k e r a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 2 a / 4 284
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d H e a t i n g c a b l i n g , 3 / 4 285
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r , 4 / 4 286
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , c a b l i n g I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o a r d , b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 287
S - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r , Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 288
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 7 289
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 7 290
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d S t a r t U n i t 2 c a b l i n g , 3 / 7 291
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 4 / 7 292
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 5 / 7 293
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r , H e a t i n g a n d S t a r t U n i t 1 c a b l i n g , 6 / 7 294
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r c a b l i n g , 7 / 7 295
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , C o n n e c t i o n B o a r d i n b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 296
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 271

t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
12 Cabling Documents RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
Grounding
All components of the radar system have contacts such as bolts or terminals for grounding. Grounding is
important for EMC purposes as well as for protecting people’s lives.
Both purposes are covered by the standard grounding of the system’s housings to the ship’s metallic
structure (bolted or welded). Regardless of the type of ship’s grounding (e.g. star pattern or ground plane
pattern), no potential difference should be measurable between two different ground connectors. Potential
differences cause compensation currents on the cable shields. If the ship has no metallic structure, all
conductively connected metallic parts form an artificial ground.
All ground connections should be as short as possible. If possible, different units should be connected to
individual ground connectors. Whenever possible, metallic housings should be screwed or welded directly
to the ship’s metallic structure. If a safe grounding contact is not ensured, additional conductors are
necessary. Furthermore, all ground connections should have a low RF-impedance, and should be
resistant against vibration and corrosion. Grounding conductors on an open-air deck must be made of
corrosion-protected steel, and inside the ship they must be made of copper.
The grounding should be done in such a way that the connection can be inspected in a convenient
manner.
EMC Purposes
The shields of all cables must be connected at both ends if no other instructions are given.
CAUTION
The screen of the coax cables must be connected to the
cable glands or cable entries of the housings AND to the
appropriate terminals. If the screen is connected to the
terminals only, the signals might be disturbed.
See Figure 3-2 on page 33.
Protective Ground
All removable metallic parts of the housings are grounded by means of separate, flexible cables to the
main structure of the housing. It is important to connect this ground-cable after parts have been
dismounted or exchanged.
272 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_201.pdf
Fig. 12-1 Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/3

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 273
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_202.pdf
Fig. 12-2 Cable Diagram, Single Installation, 2/3

274 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_203.pdf
Fig. 12-3 Cable Diagram, Dual Aloft Installation (Version A), 3/3
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 275
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_204.pdf
Fig. 12-4 Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G206, 1/4
276 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_205.pdf
Fig. 12-5 Connection Diagram, Display Electronics Unit, Interconnection Board GE3044G216, 2/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 277
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_206.pdf
Fig. 12-6 Connection Diagram, Intercon. Board GE3044G216, Analog Interface, COM Expander 3/4
278 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_207.pdf
Fig. 12-7 Connection Diagram, Transceiver up, Transceiver down, 4/4

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 279
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_407.pdf
Fig. 12-8 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1

280 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
mains supply cable must be connected
to supply the transceiver electronics.
If a 3-ph motor is used, a separate
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.
ztr1_404.pdf
Fig. 12-9 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 281
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_404a.pdf
Fig. 12-10 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined Headmarker and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4
282 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_405.pdf
Fig. 12-11 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 283
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_405a.pdf
Fig. 12-12 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined Headmarker and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4
284 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_406.pdf
Fig. 12-13 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 285
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_400.pdf
Fig. 12-14 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4

286 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_408.pdf
Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 287
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_415.pdf
Fig. 12-16 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1

288 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.
ztr1_409.pdf
Fig. 12-17 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 289
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_410.pdf
Fig. 12-18 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7
290 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_411.pdf
Fig. 12-19 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 291
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_412.pdf
292
Fig. 12-20
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V Version A
(transmitter up).
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7
For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):
jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
ztr1_413.pdf
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
RADARPILOT 1000
Fig. 12-21
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7
For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):
jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
293
Technical Manual
ztr1_414.pdf
Fig. 12-22 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7
294 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_401.pdf
Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 295
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_416.pdf
Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1
296 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e12.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
Title Page
Interconnection Box, GE3044G015 299
Disp lay Ele ctronic s U nit with mo unte d Inte rc onn ec tio n B ox , GE3 044 O000 MB 1 /3 300
Interconnection Box Stand-Alone, GE3044O000 MB 2/3 301
Electronics Unit Stand-Alone,GE3044O000 MB 3/3 302
S C C ’ 9 6 C o n s o l e , b = 5 5 0 m m , S i d e / R e a r V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 5 4 2 7 0 . G Z 1 / 4 303
S C C ’ 9 6 C o n s o l e , b = 5 5 0 m m , Fro n t / S i d e V i ew, o p e n d e d , 2 7 1 . 1 5 4 2 7 0 .G Z 2 / 4 304
SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Space for Installations, 271.154 270.GZ 3/4 305
SCC ’96 Console, b=55 mm, Foundation, 271.154 270.GZ 4/4 306
S C C ’ 9 6 C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , S i d e / R e a r V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 5 1 0 0 9 . G Z 1 / 6 307
S C C ’ 9 6 C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , Fro n t / S i d e V i ew, o p e n e d , M o n i t o r 2 9 " , 2 7 1 . 1 5 1 0 0 9 .G Z 2 / 6 308
S C C ’ 9 6 C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , Fro n t / S i d e V i ew, o p e n e d , M o n i t o r 2 4 " , 2 7 1 . 1 5 1 0 0 9 .G Z 3 / 6 309
SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Space for Installations, 271.151 009.GZ 4/6 310
SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.151 009.GZ 5/6 311
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 312
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 318
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 5 5 0 m m , S i d e / R e a r V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 6 . G Z 1 / 5 324
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 5 5 0 m m , Fr o n t V ie w, M o u n t i n g Pa n e l , 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 6 . G Z 2 / 5 325
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 5 5 0 m m , Pa n e l V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 6 . G Z 3 / 5 326
Compact Console, b=550 mm, Foundation, 271.167 236.GZ 4/5 327
Compact Console, b=550 mm, Bracket, 271.167 236.GZ 5/5 328
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , S i d e / R e a r V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 7 . G Z 1 / 5 329
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , Fr o n t V ie w, M o u n t i n g Pa n e l , 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 7 . G Z 2 / 5 330
C o mp a c t C o n s o l e , b = 7 0 0 m m , Pa n e l V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 7 2 3 7 . G Z 3 / 5 331
Compact Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.167 237.GZ 4/5 332
Compact Console, b=700 mm, Bracket, 271.167 237.GZ 5/5 333
D e s k P l a t e , b = 5 0 0 m m , S i d e / R e a r V i e w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 6 3 9 1 . G Z 1 / 4 334
D e s k P l a t e , b = 5 0 0 m m , F r o n t V i e w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 6 3 9 1 . G Z 2 / 4 335
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 297

t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
Title Page
D e s k P l a t e , b = 5 0 0 m m , Pa n e l V ie w, 2 7 1 . 1 6 6 3 9 1 . G Z 3 / 4 336
Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Casing Base, 271.166 391.GZ 4/4 337
Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3027O000 MB 338
Tr a c k b a l l O p e r a t i n g U n i t ( f o r s h i p y a r d ’ s i n s t a l l a t i o n ) , B D 3 0 2 8 O 0 0 0 M B 339
F loppy Disk Drive, Panel Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 1/2 340
Floppy Disk Drive, Bulkhead Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 2/2 341
20.1" TFT Color Monitor AZ 3056 G 041, AZ3056G041 MB 1/1 342
A Z3058 CRT 21", A Z3058O000 MB 1/3 343
A Z3058 CRT 21", A Z3058O000 MB 2/3 344
A Z3058 CRT 21", A Z3058O000 MB 3/3 345
A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 , 2 3 . 1 " T F T, A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 M B , 1 / 4 346
A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 , 2 3 . 1 " T F T, b r a c k e t s , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 M B , 2 / 4 347
A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 , 2 3 . 1 " T F T, b r a c k e t m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 M B , 3 / 4 348
A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 , 2 3 . 1 " T F T, r o t a t i o n b r a c k e t m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 6 3 G 0 4 1 M B , 4 / 4 349
A Z 3 0 6 5 G 0 4 0 , 1 7 . 4 " T F T, A Z 3 0 5 6 G 0 4 0 M B 1 / 4 350
A Z 3 0 6 5 G 0 4 0 , 1 7 . 4 " T F T, b r a c k e t s , A Z 3 0 5 6 G 0 4 0 M B 2 / 4 351
A Z 3 0 6 5 G 0 4 0 , 1 7 . 4 " T F T, b r a c k e t m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 5 6 G 0 4 0 M B 3 / 4 352
A Z 3 0 6 5 G 0 4 0 , 1 7 . 4 " T F T, r o t a t i o n b r a c k e t m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 5 6 G 0 4 0 M B 4 / 4 353
A Z 3 0 6 6 G 0 4 0 , 1 5 . 1 " T F T, A Z 3 0 6 6 G 0 4 0 M B 1 / 2 354
A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 , 1 9 . 0 " T F T, A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 M B 1 / 5 356
A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 , 1 9 . 0 " T F T, b r a c k e t s , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 M B 2 / 5 357
A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 , 1 9 . 0 " T F T, r o t a t i o n b r a c k e t m o u n t i n g , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 M B 4 / 5 359
A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 , 1 9 . 0 " T F T, r o t a t i o n b r a c k e t , A Z 3 0 6 8 G 0 4 0 M B 5 / 5 360
298 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_322.pdf
Fig. 13-1 Interconnection Box, GE3044G015

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 299
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_324.pdf
Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3044O000 MB 1/3
300 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_325.pdf
Fig. 13-3 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone, GE3044O000 MB 2/3

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 301
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_326.pdf
Fig. 13-4 Electronics Unit Stand-Alone,GE3044O000 MB 3/3

302 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_341.pdf
Fig. 13-5 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.154 270.GZ 1/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 303
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_342.pdf
Fig. 13-6 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Front/Side View, opended, 271.154 270.GZ 2/4
304 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_343.pdf
Fig. 13-7 SCC ’96 Console, b=550 mm, Space for Installations, 271.154 270.GZ 3/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 305
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_344.pdf
Fig. 13-8 SCC ’96 Console, b=55 mm, Foundation, 271.154 270.GZ 4/4
306 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_345.pdf
Fig. 13-9 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.151 009.GZ 1/6
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 307
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_346.pdf
Fig. 13-10 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Front/Side View, opened, Monitor 29", 271.151 009.GZ 2/6
308 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_347.pdf
Fig. 13-11 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Front/Side View, opened, Monitor 24", 271.151 009.GZ 3/6
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 309
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_348.pdf
Fig. 13-12 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Space for Installations, 271.151 009.GZ 4/6
310 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_349.pdf
Fig. 13-13 SCC ’96 Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.151 009.GZ 5/6
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 311
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M
312
A 30° A
AIR VENTILATION
Fig. 13-14
1150
13 Outline Drawings
B B
750
670
606,76
C C
0
550
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3

Type of enclosure : IP22
E
300005562
Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:15

SCC C4
STANDARD 0.5 Werkstoff
2002 Datum Name

Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
Norm for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
STN ATLAS Marine Electronics Blatt
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 1
Member of the EuroMarine Group
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
Zust. Änderung Datum Name Urspr. Ers.f.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
VIEW A
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
0
HANDRAIL
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
63
RADARPILOT 1000
Fig. 13-15
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
566,50
600 VIEW B
D D

VIEW B
E
300005562

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 2
313
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
314
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
0
20
100
450
530
550
Fig. 13-16
13 Outline Drawings
B 0 B
16
20
100
A A
190
C C
AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
390
470
D 490 D

FRONT
HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm

1.0 * DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005562
* EQUALITY ACCORDING TO
DIN ISO 1101
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm. STANDARD
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO
FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS 2002 Datum Name
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
DECK Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
F
A-A (1 : 2) MSV 42
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 3
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\700_M_AZ3054
30°
A A
AIR VENTILATION
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
RADARPILOT 1000
1150
Fig. 13-17
B B
740
660
596,76
C C
0
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D

E
300005563

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 1
315
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
316
A A
VIEW A
HANDRAIL
63
Fig. 13-18
13 Outline Drawings
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
VIEW B
578
611
D D

VIEW B
E
300005563

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 2
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
0
20
100
600
680
700
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
RADARPILOT 1000
Fig. 13-19
0
20 16
B B
100
A A
190
C C
390 AVAILABLE SPACE

FOR CABLE INPUT
470
490
D D

FRONT
1.0 * HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm

DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005563
DIN ISO 1101 Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY SCC C4
FLOOR LEVEL 0.5 Werkstoff
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS STANDARD
THAN 1mm.
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO 2002 Datum Name
DECK FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Norm
A-A (1 : 2) DISTANCE OF 1mm ) for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 3
317
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M_Stand_Alone
318
A 30° A
AIR VENTILATION
1150
Fig. 13-20
13 Outline Drawings
B B
750
670
606,76
C C
0
550
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3

E
300005564

SCC C4 Werkstoff
STANDARD 0.5
2002 Datum Name

Bearb. 12.Sep. Het
Section 550, Monitor Cons.
Norm Stand Alone for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 1
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
VIEW A
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
0
HANDRAIL
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
63
RADARPILOT 1000
Fig. 13-21
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
566,50
600 VIEW B
D D
VIEW B

E
300005564

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 2
319
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
320
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
0
20
100
450
530
550
Fig. 13-22
13 Outline Drawings
B 0 B
16
20
100
A A
190
C C
AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
390
470
D 490 D
FRONT

HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm
1.0 * DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005564
DIN ISO 1101
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm. STANDARD
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO
FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS 2002 Datum Name
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
DECK Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
F
A-A (1 : 2) MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 3
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30°
A A
AIR VENTILATION
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
RADARPILOT 1000
1150
Fig. 13-23
B B
740
660
596,76
C C
700
0
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D

E
300005565

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 1
321
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
322
A A
VIEW A
HANDRAIL
63
Fig. 13-24
13 Outline Drawings
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
VIEW B
578
611
D D
VIEW B

E
300005565

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 2
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
RADARPILOT 1000
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
Technical Manual
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
0
20
100
600
680
700
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
RADARPILOT 1000
Fig. 13-25
0
20 16
B B
100
A A
190
C C
390 AVAILABLE SPACE

FOR CABLE INPUT
470
490
D D
FRONT

1.0 * HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm
DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005565
DIN ISO 1101 Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY SCC C4
FLOOR LEVEL 0.5 Werkstoff
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS STANDARD
THAN 1mm.
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO 2002 Datum Name
DECK FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Norm
A-A (1 : 2) DISTANCE OF 1mm ) Stand Alone for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 3
323
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
Technical Manual
ztr1_301.pdf
Fig. 13-26 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.167 236.GZ 1/5
324 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_302.pdf
Fig. 13-27 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Front View, Mounting Panel, 271.167 236.GZ 2/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 325
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_303.pdf
Fig. 13-28 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Panel View, 271.167 236.GZ 3/5
326 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_304.pdf
Fig. 13-29 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Foundation, 271.167 236.GZ 4/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 327
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_305.pdf
Fig. 13-30 Compact Console, b=550 mm, Bracket, 271.167 236.GZ 5/5
328 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_306.pdf
Fig. 13-31 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.167 237.GZ 1/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 329
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_307.pdf
Fig. 13-32 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Front View, Mounting Panel, 271.167 237.GZ 2/5
330 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_308.pdf
Fig. 13-33 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Panel View, 271.167 237.GZ 3/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 331
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_309.pdf
Fig. 13-34 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Foundation, 271.167 237.GZ 4/5
332 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_310.pdf
Fig. 13-35 Compact Console, b=700 mm, Bracket, 271.167 237.GZ 5/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 333
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_311.pdf
Fig. 13-36 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Side/Rear View, 271.166 391.GZ 1/4
334 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_312.pdf
Fig. 13-37 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Front View, 271.166 391.GZ 2/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 335
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_313.pdf
Fig. 13-38 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Panel View, 271.166 391.GZ 3/4
336 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_314.pdf
Fig. 13-39 Desk Plate, b=500 mm, Casing Base, 271.166 391.GZ 4/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 337
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_327.pdf
Fig. 13-40 Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3027O000 MB

338 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_328.pdf
Fig. 13-41 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 339
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_329.pdf
Fig. 13-42 Floppy Disk Drive, Panel Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 1/2

340 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_330.pdf
Fig. 13-43 Floppy Disk Drive, Bulkhead Mounting, ZG3017O000 MB 2/2

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 341
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_356.pdf
Fig. 13-44 20.1" TFT Color Monitor AZ 3056 G 041, AZ3056G041 MB 1/1
342 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_350.pdf
Fig. 13-45 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 1/3

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 343
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_353.pdf
Fig. 13-46 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 2/3

344 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_354.pdf
Fig. 13-47 AZ3058 CRT 21", AZ3058O000 MB 3/3

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 345
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3063G041MB-001--.pdf
Fig. 13-48 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, AZ3063G041 MB, 1/4

346 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3063G041MB-002--.pdf
Fig. 13-49 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, brackets, AZ3063G041 MB, 2/4

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 347
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3063G041MB-003--.pdf
Fig. 13-50 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, bracket mounting, AZ3063G041 MB, 3/4
348 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3063G041MB-004--.pdf
Fig. 13-51 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, rotation bracket mounting , AZ3063G041 MB, 4/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 349
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3065G040MB-001--.pdf
Fig. 13-52 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, AZ3056G040 MB 1/4

350 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3065G040MB-002--.pdf
Fig. 13-53 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, brackets, AZ3056G040 MB 2/4

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 351
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3065G040MB-003--.pdf
Fig. 13-54 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, bracket mounting, AZ3056G040 MB 3/4

352 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3065G040MB-004--.pdf
Fig. 13-55 AZ3065G040, 17.4" TFT, rotation bracket mounting, AZ3056G040 MB 4/4
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 353
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3066G040MB-001--.pdf
Fig. 13-56 AZ3066G040, 15.1" TFT, AZ3066G040 MB 1/2

354 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3066G040MB-002--.pdf

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 355
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3068G040MB-001--.pdf
Fig. 13-58 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, AZ3068G040 MB 1/5

356 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3068G040MB-002--.pdf
Fig. 13-59 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, brackets, AZ3068G040 MB 2/5

ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 357
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3068G040MB-003--.pdf

358 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
AZ3068G040MB-004--.pdf
Fig. 13-61 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, rotation bracket mounting, AZ3068G040 MB 4/5
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 359
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
300.003041-001--.pdf
Fig. 13-62 AZ3068G040, 19.0" TFT, rotation bracket, AZ3068G040 MB 5/5

360 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e13.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record
Technical Manual
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record

0°
345° 15°
330° 30°
315° 45°
300° 60°
285° 75°
270° 90°
255° 105°
240° 120°
225° 135°
Example: 0°
210° 150°
315° 45° 195° 165°
180°
270° 90°
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
225° 135°
Blind Sector
(outer circle) 180°
Ship’s Name: Antenna Location:
Radar No.: Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company: Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 361

t_eu1_e14.fm / 06.09.05
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual

0°
345° 15°
330° 30°
315° 45°
300° 60°
285° 75°
270° 90°
255° 105°
240° 120°
225° 135°
Example: 0°
210° 150°
315° 45° 195° 165°
180°
270° 90°
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
225° 135°
Blind Sector
(outer circle) 180°
Ship’s Name: Antenna Location:
Radar No.: Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company: Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:

362 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu1_e14.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT 1000 Notes
Technical Manual
Notes
Space for your notes:
ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09) 363

t_eu1_eno.fm / 06.09.05
Notes RADARPILOT 1000
Technical Manual
364 ED3038G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu1_eno.fm / 06.09.05

Radar 1000 Tech - Manual Ver 3.1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radar 1000 Tech - Manual Ver 3.1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Including Installation Instructions

Display Electronics Unit GE3044

Item No.: ED3038G542 Revision: 02 (2005-09) Order No.: 390002009

SAM Electronics GmbH

4.2 "Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

5.3 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.11.3 Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

6 Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

7 Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

9.6 Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

10 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

11 Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

12 Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

13 Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Fig. 1-1 Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fig. 5-5 System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Fig. 13-48 AZ3063G041, 23.1" TFT, AZ3063G041 MB, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:

1.1 Software Releases

This manual describes the RADARPILOT 1000/CHAR-

1.2 Hardware Versions

Rev., marked by "X"

Order No. Item No. of Serial No.

Fig. 1-1 Version label

Item No. of the pcb itself, Print version

Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling

1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

1.4 Safety Warnings

If a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Inter-

Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for

The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically

1.6 Safety Switches

1.6.1 Man Aloft Switch

The man aloft switch is situated under the Gearbox. If it is switched to

Man aloft switch

1.6.2 HV Supply Switch (Interlock)

The HV supply switch in the Transceiver switches off the high

pulled out to supply power to the RF electronics.

HV supply switches (different versions)

X-Band S-Band Version B

Fig. 2-1 System overview of RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1000

RADARPILOT 10XYY / NNNN-XN XN

Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature

Fig. 2-3 Desktop and console indicator

Resolution 1024x768 1280x1024 (1024x768 not 1024x768 1280x1024 (960)

Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors

Additional Sensor Interfaces

2.2.3 Operating Units

Fig. 2-5 Operating Unit with all keyboards

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment

For the CHARTRADAR 1000 see Section 2.4.

2.4 CHARTRADAR 1000

- Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

- Software version ≥2.4.

2.4.3 User Chart Objects

Interconnection CAN Bus Interconnection UAIS

When the radar is connected to

Fig. 2-6 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit